Home

RX Debug - Renesas Electronics

1. 28 erresa void main woid oo 29 30 long a 10 31 int i 32 char tmp 2 33 int ret 34 char isnuminput 35 36 while i 37 E EEETSESA Code on this line executed at 100 40 EEff8f7c 41 E EEff8E83 42 EEff8f8d gt 43 ffFfFR 90 Code on this line executed at 0 Not 44 while 1 executed 45 Efff8f92 ret Scan 46 EEff8E9c if ret EOF i 47 ffff8fal if tmp 0 LF R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 149 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 138 Example of the Code Coverage Measurement Result Disassemble Panel tain fLffsfSa fLLLst6o ffffSf66 ETES EGB 38 ffff f6e f Lffst74 fLffst7s ffff8f 7a 40 E ab a a d f Aff o ffff8f7e ffffertsei 415 f Lffsfs3 fLffstss ffffSf s7 fLLLsSCSh 42 435 ffff8f90 45 ffff8f92 ffff8f94 ffLffsfo6 fLffstfIa 46 frfrsfgyse ffLffsfort 47 tori i 0 printf Data Input Code on this line executed at 100 i lt iO it it printf a d i a i 0 isnuminput FALSE 6606 MOV L Code on this line executed at 0 Not ret scanf sc tmp 7eab PUSH L executed 7eaa PUSH L R10 osfe0300 BSR A _scant 6280 ADD 8H RO if ret EOF VSOLLr CMP 01H R1 2074 BEQ B _tmain B6H if tmp 0 LF j b Display of code coverage rates for each function Check the Code Coverage item in th
2. Combination Seaueia Object event No Event 1 After Execution sort c 33 Oxffff865f 2 Read g_CharBuf 0 1000 0 1000 0x55 3 Write q_IntBuf 02142c 0x142f Oxb Up Down RA Event Reset event Event After Execution sort cH36 Oxffff860e een 2 17 5 Deleting events To delete any event you ve set select the subject event and then click the toolbar button R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 165 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS However you cannot delete the unconditional trace event and Run Break timer event which are the built in events of the debug tool Remarks 1 E1 E20 For the timer event you can delete an event by clicking its event mark that is displayed on the Editor panel or Disassemble panel 2 For the software hardware break and the trace event consisting of execution related events you can delete an event by clicking their event mark that is displayed on the Editor panel or Disassemble panel 3 To delete all of the events you ve set at a time select Select All on the context menu and then click the button not including the built in events 2 17 6 Entering comments for events For any event you ve set you can enter a comment freely as you wish To enter a comment select an event for which you want to enter a comment click in the Comment area and then enter any text directly from the keyboard
3. Cautions 1 E1 E20 The pass count can be specified by any value other than 1 for only one event among all events including execution related events If a pass count of other than 1 is specified for two events an error results 2 E1 Serial RX200 Series E20 Serial RX200 Series The pass count can only be specified by 1 Any value other than 1 cannot be specified 2 For Simulator a Address Address Displays the address at which an access related event is set No address values can be specified here Default Depends on selected event Modifying Not changeable b Address Condition Compare condition Displays address compare condition Default No specification Modifying Not changeable R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 367 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c Data Condition Access type Specify the type of access Default Depends on selected event Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Read The specified type of access is a read Write The specified type of access is a write Read Write The specified type of access is a read and a write Access size Specify the access size Default Depends on selected event Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values No conditions No access size is specifie
4. Indicates that elements are displayed in descending order Indicates that elements are displayed in ascending order Displays category nodes and file names in the order specified by the user Indicates that elements are not displayed in customized order Indicates that elements are displayed in customized order default Drag and drop a category node or file name to customize the order in which they are displayed R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 194 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Context menu Using Debug Tool APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Shows a cascaded menu to select the debug tool used Note that the debug tools displayed here differ with the microcontroller type selected for the project see Table 2 1 Relationship between Types of Microcontroller and Connectable Debug Tools Microcontroller type E1 Serial Uses E1 in serial communication mode Microcontroller type E1 JTAG Uses E1 in JTAG communication mode Microcontroller type E20 Serial Uses E20 in serial communication mode Microcontroller type E20 JTAG Uses E20 in JTAG communication mode Microcontroller type Simulator Uses the simulator Property R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Displays the properties of the selected debug tool on the Property panel ztENESAS Page 195 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPEND
5. Note Step execution can be performed either at the source level or at the instruction level For details see Section 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps 2 Debug toolbar The debug toolbar comprises buttons each representing a command for controlling program execution Each button and their functionality are as follows default Remarks 1 The buttons in each toolbar can be customized using the User Settings dialog box Also this same dialog box can be used to create a new toolbar 2 Right clicking on the toolbar displays a context menu which allows selection of a group to be displayed in or hidden from the toolbar Builds a project and after building downloads the file to the active project s debug tool If CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool at this time it is automatically connected to the debug tool before a download is executed However if a build fails no download is executed This is the same as selecting Build and download to the debug tool from the Debug menu Downloads a specified file to the active project s debug tool If CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool at this time it is automatically connected to the debug tool before a download is executed However this item is disabled during program execution or when Build amp Download is under execution This is the same as selecting Download from the Debug menu R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 188 of 429
6. This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu IOR Panel Only Items Edit menu IOR Panel Only Items Context Menu How to open Choose IOR from the View menu R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 268 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Search area This area performs a search of I O register names Specify the character string to be searched not case sensitive Enter a character string directly from the keyboard specifiable in up to 512 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches for I O register names that include the character string specified in the text box in upward direction with the search result placed in selected state Searches for I O register names that include the character string specified in the text box in downward direction with the search result placed in selected state Remarks 1 The I O register names that are hidden as classified by category folder also are searched expanded and placed in selected state 2 After entering the character string to be searched press the Enter key and the same option as would be when the button is clicked is performed or press the Shift Enter keys and the same operation as would be when the button is clicked is perform
7. Note Runs the program from the current PC position by executing one step at a time updating the content of each panel step in execution For a function call the program stops at the beginning of the called function However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Step In from the Debug menu Note Runs the program from the current PC position by executing one step at a time updating the content of each panel step over execution For a function call by a jump to subroutine instruction all of the source lines or instructions in that function are executed successively in one step until a place is reached at which control returns from the function step executed until there is as many nesting as would be when a jump to subroutine instruction is executed For other than a jump to subroutine instruction the same operation as the button is clicked is performed However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Step Over from the Debug menu Runs the program until control returns from the currently executed function until control returns to the calling function return out execution However this item is disabled during program execution For other tha
8. a Specifying Search text Enter characters to search A word variable function at the caret position in the Editor panel is specified by default If you want to change it directly enter the characters into the text box up to 1024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 items b Specifying Search location Select Current document file name from the drop down list c Clicking the Find Previous Find Next button When the Find Previous button is clicked search will start in the order from the large address number to small and the search results are displayed selected in the Editor panel When the Find Next button is clicked search will start in the order from the small address number to large and the search results are displayed selected in the Editor panel Remarks 1 Click the Option button to specify to use wild card case sensitivity word by word search and so on 2 In the Find and Replace dialog box various search replace operation can be performed by selecting Find in Files Quick Replace or Replace in Files tab Moving to a specified line To move to a specified address in the source text select Go To on context menu and use the Go to Line dialog box that is opened In this dialog box follow the procedure described below to move to a specified line Figure 2 68 Move to the Specified Line in Source Text Go to Line Dialog Box Go to Line
9. Caution This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 lt 2 gt Supply voltage Specify the power voltage supplied to the target system from the following drop down list This property appears only when the Power target from the emulator MAX 200mA property is set to Yes The voltage value that can be specified differs depending on the type of the microcontroller R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 18 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Caution This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 lt 3 gt Communications method Displays the method of communication used by the E1 emulator for communicating with the microcontroller on the target system Specifying RX E1 Serial for a debug tool in the Project Tree panel will display FINE in this property and specifying RX E1 JTAG will display JTAG You cannot change the value of this property For the details of debug tool selection see 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use lt 4 gt JTAG clock MHz From the drop down list select the baud rate JTAG clock to be used by the E1 emulator for communicating with the microcontroller on the target system This property is displayed only when JTAG is selected in the Communications method property The following baud rate is displayed in the drop down list 16 5 default 12 38 6 188 3 094 1 547 Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 2 De
10. On the Project Tree panel double click the file On the Project Tree panel select a source file and then select Open from the context menu On the Project Tree panel select Add gt gt Add New File from the context menu and then create a text file or source file On the Disassemble panel Call Stack panel Trace panel or Events panel select Jump to Source from the context menu Automatically opens if there is a source text line correspond to the current PC value when the current PC value is forcibly changed or the program stops executing R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 229 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Titlebar The name of the opened text file or source file is displayed Marks displayed at the end of the file name indicate the following Mark Description The text file has been modified since being opened Update time and date of the source file opened are later than the one of the downloaded load module file in the case the text file which is contained in the load module file downloaded in the connected debug tool as debug information is opened Read only The opened text file is read only When you right click in this area the context menu is displayed The following menu items are exclusive for the Editor panel other items are common to all the panels Save file name Saves the contents of the
11. from the File menu will open the Save As dialog box in which you can save all contents of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv For details on how to save call stack information see 4 Saving the displayed contents of call stack information R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 294 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbar Each button in the toolbar are disabled during program execution E Obtains latest information from the debug tool and updates display Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays values on this panel in per variable predetermined notation default Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in decimal Displays values on this panel in octal Displays values on this panel in binary Shows the following buttons that change the encode in which string variables are displayed Displays string variables in ASCII code default Displays string variables in Shift_JIS code Displays string variables in EUC JP code Displays string variables in UTF 8 code Displays string variables in UTF 16 code Adds a module file name to the information displayed default Adds function call parameters to the information displayed default File Menu Call Stack Panel Only
12. 2 Progress bar Shows the progress of the currently executed process by means of the length of a bar Note that when the progress rate reaches 100 when the right edge of the bar is reached this dialog closes automatically Function button Cancel Aborts the currently executed process and closes this dialog However if the process under execution cannot be aborted this button is disabled R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 382 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Option dialog box This dialog box makes various environment settings of CubeSuite The settings in this dialog box are saved as settings for the current user of CubeSuite Figure A 67 Option Dialog Box G Startup and Exit Display E External Text Editor 1 A Font and Color E Extemal Tools G Build Debug G Text Editor Update Others G User Information 2 gt AS This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Select Options from the Tool menu Description of each area 1 Category selection area Select an item to set from the categories below Category Content of Setting General Startup and Exit category Make settings related to startup or exit time General Display category Make settings related to display General External Text Editor category Ma
13. Default After breaking 0 is the current number of specified processes How to change Specify with the Text Edit dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Format Either one of the following I O register name space Value Process Automatically overwrites the value of I O register with Value CPU register name space Value Process Automatically overwrites the value of CPU register with Value source Python script path Process Automatically executes a script file specified with Python script path ztENESAS Page 227 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Editor panel This panel is used to display and edit text files and source files Furthermore the source level debugging see 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps and the code coverage measurement result display Simulator see 2 15 Measure Coverage Simulator can be performed when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened in this panel When opened the file encoding Shift_JIS EUC JP UTF 8 and newline code is automatically detected and retained when it is saved You can open a file with a specific encoding selected in the Encoding dialog box If the encoding and newline code is specified in the Save Settings dialog box then the file is saved with those settings This panel can be opened multiple times max 100 panels Remarks 1 When a project is closed all of the Editor p
14. Displays action events Printf event interrupt event Simulator iE a ENE Displays built in events unconditional trace event or Run Break timer event 2 17 3 Jump to an event address By clicking one of the following buttons it is possible to jump to the relevant panel corresponding to the address of a currently selected event However these buttons are disabled when a trace event timer measurement event or a built in event unconditional trace event or Run Break timer event is selected The Editor panel opens with the caret on it moved to the source line corresponding to the address at which a selected event is set The Disassemble panel opens with the caret on it moved to the disassembled result corresponding to the address at which a selected event is set The Memory panel opens with the caret on it moved to the memory value corresponding to the address at which a selected event is set 2 17 4 Editing detailed settings of events This section describes how to edit detailed settings of various events For information on editing of timer measurement events see 3 Editing a timer measurement event For information on editing of action events Printf events and interrupt events see 2 16 Set an Action into Programs 1 Editing execution related events 2 Editing access related events 3 Editing combination conditions of events E1 E20 1 Editing execution related events It
15. Name of an I O register Value of the I O register Label name te 3 EQU symbol name and immediate value Note 3 Values of a label and an EQU symbol and an immediate address Integer constant Integer constant value Floating constant Floating point constant value Character constant Notes 1 Character constant value C89 C99 or C language variable 2 When using a member variable of a base class specify the scope before the member name e g variable BaseClass member 3 Ifthe label name or EQU symbol name includes a be sure to enclose the name in Example Label Any imaginary number must be multiplied by an uppercase I e g 1 0 2 0 1 When you specify the CPU register name I add REG e g REG to distinguish it from the keyword I that indicates an imaginary number From Table 2 31 Basic Input Format of Watch Expressions the following watch expressions with operator can be constructed For the operators listed in the table below the expression is parsed according to C language specifications Table 2 32 Construction of Watch Expressions with Operators Expression Description Expression Specifies the order in which operations are performed Expression Inverts symbol Expression Logical negation Expression Bit inversion Expression Expression Multiplication Expression Expression Divisi
16. Table 2 12 Trace Start Event and Trace End Event Marks Execution related Events Trace start Trace end Figure 2 121 Example of Trace Start and Trace End Events Set by Using Execution related Events For the Disassemble panel Event area 40 id tutorial void indicates that a trace start N pei 7 nas hate _tutorial event is set as execution Lp to ffffS56 6e68 related event fLLLS563 710008 J 47 p_sam sg Sample ff ff8566 b7204100000 Indicates that a trace end N 48 init p sam pO FrTTfsessc e er event is set as execution Lp dy noes en ffff856e 05670000 related event J 50 for i 0 i lt 10 i R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 126 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b For access related events By setting access related events for the trace start and trace end events it is possible to start and finish the collection of trace data when a specified access is made to any variable or I O register At this time it is also possible to limit the values accessed The types of access specifiable in access related events are as follows Read Table 2 13 Types of Access for Variables Access Type Description Collection of trace data is started or finished when a specified variable or I O register is accessed for read i e to read data from it Write Collection of trace data is started or finished when a specif
17. change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable One of the following as selected from the drop down list value 1 2 4 8 16 32 Accumulate trace time Specify whether to display the accumulated tracing time in the Trace panel Simulator Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes Displays the accumulated tracing time value No Displays the trace time with differential value Trace memory Specify the size of memory that holds trace data by a number of trace frames Note 2 size frames Default 64K Simulator How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable One of the following as selected from the drop down list value 64K 128K 256K 512K 1M Notes 1 This property is automatically set to Yes when selecting Start Tracing Stop Tracing from the context menu in the Editor panel Disassemble panel 2 The trace frame is a unit for the trace data Each fetch write read uses one trace frame 6 Timer E1 E20 The detailed information on timer functions is displayed and its configuration can be changed Use 64bit counter Specify whether or not to use a 64 bit measurement counter E20 JTAG RX600 However if Yes is specified measurement is performed in only one section Series Default No How to By selecting from the
18. 102 lt gt Main area Characters area Event area Address area Coverage area Line number area 5 ae O 5050 This section describes the following 1 2 Displaying variables Searching for characters 1 2 3 Moving to a specified line 4 Jump to functions 5 Jump to a desired line tag jump Displaying variables When hovering the mouse cursor over a variable in the source text a pop up that shows the name and value of the variable is displayed lt variable name gt lt variable value gt The display format of the variable value is same as Table A 10 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default depending on the type of the variable Figure 2 66 Pop up Display of Variables Editor Panel m minute 0 m second 0 a second 0 0x0 init lS Mouse cursor Searching for characters To search for memory values use the Find and Replace dialog box that is opened by selecting the button on the toolbar In this dialog box follow the procedure described below to search for characters R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 61 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Figure 2 67 Character Search in Source Text Find and Replace Dialog Box Find and Replace Quick Find Find in Files Il Quick Replace ll Replace in Files Search text main Search location Current document main c
19. 130 2 13 5 Displaying an execution history 131 2 13 6 Clearing the trace memory 133 2 13 7 Searching for trace data 134 2 13 8 Saving the displayed content of an execution history 139 Measuring the Execution Time 141 2 14 1 Setting the timer measurement operation E1 E20 141 2 14 2 Measuring execution time from start to stop 141 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section E1 E20 143 2 14 4 Range of measurable time 147 Measure Coverage Simulator 148 2 15 1 Configure the coverage measurement 148 2 15 2 Display coverage measurement results 148 Set an Action into Programs 151 2 16 1 Insert printf 151 2 16 2 Insert an interrupt event Simulator 153 Event Management 156 2 17 1 Changing states of setting Enabled Disabled 157 2 17 2 Displaying only a specific type of event 158 2 17 3 Jump to an event address 158 2 17 4 Editing detailed settings of events 158 2 17 5 Deleting events 165 2 17 6 Entering comments for events 166 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting 166 Setting Up the Hook Process 169 Using the Debug Console 172 About Input Value 178 2 20 1 Input rule 178 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function 181 2 20 3 Icons for invalid input 182 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 183 A 1 Description 183 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS 406 B 1 Standard Input Output and File Inp
20. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Verify on writing to memory lt 1 gt Memory mappings 28 On chip RAM area Reserved area 1 0 registers area Reserved area 1 0 registers area 1 0 registers area Reserved area Data flash area Reserved area Other memory area Reserved area 1 0 registers area Reserved area 1 0 registers area Reserved area External area CS 7 External area CS6 External area CS5 External area CS 4 External area CS3 External area CS2 External area CS1 Reserved area Other memory area Reserved area Other memory area Reserved area On chip ROM area Yes Current memory mapping status is displayed for each type of memory area This property displays only the number of memory areas Expanding Memory mapping property will display the following sub items R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 21 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Memory type Indicates the memory type of the corresponding area Each memory type corresponds to the following areas On chip ROM area Program ROM and data flash On chip RAM area Internal RAM I O registers area Peripheral I O register Divided into areas with different endians for display External area CS7 CS6 CSO External address space CS0 to CS7 are displayed separately Other memory area FCU RAM FCU firm user b
21. OK Applies the detailed settings specified in the dialog box to the timer event and closes this dialog box Cancel Nullifies settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 357 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Detailed Settings of Execution Events dialog box This dialog box displays or changes detailed information on an execution related event selected on the Events panel Note that the execution related events refer to the following events on the Events panel Hardware break Post execution break in detailed information on combination break E1 E20 Post execution event as start and end condition in detailed information on trace Post execution event as start and end condition in detailed information on timer E1 E20 Figure A 56 Detailed Settings of Execution Events Dialog Box E1 E20 Detail Toolbar f 4 E tAddress He Pass Count 256 Pass count 2 4 Specifies pass count 1 256 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 358 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 57 Detailed Settings of Execution Events Dialog Box Simulator Detail Toolbar 2 Al tAddress He Pass Count 16383 Pass count 2 Specifies pass count 1 16383 Function buttons 4 This section desc
22. 1 2 3 4 5 6 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu Trace panel dedicated items Edit menu Trace panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Trace On the Editor panel Disassemble panel select Trace Settings gt gt Show Trace Result from the context menu R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 298 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 2 3 4 Number area The trace number showing the trace frame is displayed Time h min s ms us ns area This area displays the time required from the execution start of the program to the execution start of an instruction of each frame or generation of memory access cause The time is displayed in units of hours minutes seconds milliseconds microseconds and nanoseconds If overflow occurs this area is displayed in invalid color gray Remarks 1 Simulator The question of whether to set the time display as an integrated value or differential value depends on the setting of the Accumulate trace time property on the Trace category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel 2 E1 E20 Time display function is not supported Line Address area The address of the assemble code or the line number of a source file is displayed The notation of
23. 2 Overlay sections Address groups where overlay sections exist are displayed This property only appears when Yes is displayed on the Specify the debugged overlay section property Figure 2 81 Overlay sections Property E Debuginformation Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset Yes Specified symbol _main E 0 03000 0x3014 ke Fe ram01 v 1 043100 0 3110 2 0 3200 043203 This property shows the current information of overlay sections per address group in detail Only Priority section can be changed File Name of the load module file in which the selected address group has been downloaded this cannot be changed Start address First address of the selected address group this cannot be changed End address Last address of the selected address group this cannot be changed Priority section List of sections defined in the selected address group You can choose a section to be debugged priority section from this list Cautions 1 Settings related to overlay sections are not saved in the project file After you have downloaded a load module select the priority section again 2 Only debugging information is switched when the selection for Priority section is changed The debug tool does not copy data of the target section R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 76 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS The following figure shows an example
24. CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Disassemble panel This panel is used to display the results of disassembling the contents of the memory disassembled text and execute line assembly see 2 6 4 Performing line assembly Furthermore the instruction level debugging see 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps and the code coverage measurement result display Simulator see 2 15 Measure Coverage Simulator can be performed in this panel Up to a maximum of four of these panels can be opened Each panel is identified by the names Disassemble1 Disassemble2 Disassemble3 and Disassemble4 on the titlebar The source text in the source file corresponding to the code data can also be displayed by setting to the mixed display mode default This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool A step execution is performed in instruction level units when the focus is in this panel see 2 9 3 Caution Execute programs in steps Remarks 1 Using the Scroll Range Settings dialog box that is opened by clicking the toolbar button itis possible to set the range in which the vertical scroll bar of this panel can be scrolled 2 You can print the current screen image of this panel by selecting Print from the File menu Figure A 24 Disassemble Panel When Mixed Display Mode Is Selected Disassemble1 Toolbar 4 i View _main TETTOSSE 2efad _main void tutorial void _tutorial 6e68 R6 R
25. Denotes a parameter Denotes a function Note To display auto variables be aware that the exact values of local variables cannot be displayed at the prolog of functions in functions and epilog of functions in functions The addresses of auto variables are relative addresses from the stack pointer SP so that they are indefinite until the SP value is fixed in the function As the SP is manipulated at the prolog and epilog its value is indefinite Therefore exact values cannot be displayed at the prolog and epilog This area has the following features a Registration of watch expressions C variables can be registered in the Watch panel as watch expressions For details on how to register See 1 Registering watch expressions Remark The registered watch expressions have their scope specification automatically given b Jump to memory Selecting Jump to Memory on context menu opens the Memory panel Memory1 with the caret moved to the address at which a selected local variable is located If the memory panel Memory1 is already open CubeSuite jumps to it directly R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 275 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 4 5 Value area This area displays or changes the values of local variables The notation of a data value and encoding of character strings can be selected using the toolbar buttons or from the context
26. Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Evenis panel move the caret to the combination break you wish to set then select Edit Condition from the context menu On the Events panel move the caret to the trace you wish to set then select Edit Condition from the context menu R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 352 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Tab selection area You can display detailed information on the matching combination conditions by the selection of a tab Types of tabs to be displayed will differ depending on the event you have selected on the Events panel Combination break Only Break tab is displayed Trace Start Condition tab and Stop Condition tab are displayed By switching you can set the combination condition for each tab 2 Combination condition selection area a Combination Select the conditions from the following drop down list Conditions Functions The condition is satisfied when one of the set events is encountered The condition is satisfied when all the set events are encountered irrespective of the time line Sequential The condition is satisfied when the set events are encountered in the specified sequence Cautions 1 When the combination condition is Sequential break event access type can be specified for the 1st to the 3rd position
27. Opens the Go to Line dialog box to move the caret to the specified line Outlining Displays a cascading menu for controlling expand and collapse states of source file outlining see a Code outlining Collapse to Definitions Collapses all nodes that are marked as implementation blocks e g function definitions Toggle Outlining Expansion Toggles the current state of the innermost outlining section in which the cursor lies when you are in a nested collapsed section Toggle All Outlining Toggles the collapsed state of all outlining nodes setting them all to the same expanded or collapsed state If there is a mixture of collapsed and expanded nodes all nodes will be expanded Stop Outlining Stops code outlining and remove all outlining information from source files Start Automatic Outlining Starts automatic code outlining and automatically displayed in supported source files Advanced Displays a cascading menu for performing an advanced operation for the Editor panel Increase Line Indent Increases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Decrease Line Indent Decreases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Uncomment Lines Removes the first set of line comment delimiters from the start of the current cursor line appropriate to the current language e g C This operation will only be avail
28. Property l AX E20 Serial Property 1 p E Memory Memory mappings 23 Verify on writing to memory Yes 2 E Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution No Update the display during execution Yes Update interval ms 500 3 P E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used 4 E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM No Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH No Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Yes Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Yes Routine to run immediately after execution stops 5 gt E Trace Usage of trace function Operation after trace memory is full Trace data type Branch External trace output CPU execution Trace memory size MByte 1 6 gt E Timer Operating frequency MHz Hardware break Trace Overwrite trace memory and continue execution 25 0000 Memory Hook Transaction Settings Connect Settings R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 211 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Property AX E20UTAG Property Figure A 15 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab E20 JTAG RX600 Series A ory Memory mappings Verify on writing to memory E Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution Update the d
29. Set Timer lt N gt Specify a channel in which a timer start event is set Set Timer End R W Value Sets an event that causes the timer to finish upon read write access to a selected watch expression see b How to set a timer end event Set Timer lt N gt Specify a channelN te in which a timer start event is set Periodic Updating The following cascade menus are displayed to set for the real time display update function see a Real time display update function Periodic Updating Options Opens the Property panel to set for the real time display update function Refresh Reacquires all the values of the registered watch expression and updates the display Note that the values of read protected I O register are not re read Force Read Value Forcibly reads once the values of the read protected I O register This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Add New Watch Registers a new watch expression Directly input the watch expression in the text box see c Registering new watch expression Note that up to 128 watch expressions can be registered in one watch panel Create Category Adds a new category folder Directly input the category name in the text box Note that up to 64 categories can be created in one watch panel categories cannot be created in categories Deletes the selected character string s If the watch expression s category s are
30. Specify a channelNote in which a timer start event is set View Result of Timer Opens the Events panel and displays only timer related events Clear Coverage Information Simulator Clears all the coverage measurement results currently being stored in the debug tool Note that this item appears only when the debug tool used supports the coverage function Edit Disassemble Changes to the edit mode to edit the instruction of the line at the caret position see 2 6 4 Performing line assembly This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Edit Code Changes to the edit mode to edit the code of the line at the caret position see 2 6 4 Performing line assembly This item becomes invalid during execution of a program View The following cascade menus to set the display contents in the disassemble area are displayed Show Offset Displays the offset value of the label The offset value from the nearest label is displayed when a label is defined for the address Show Symbol Displays the address value in the format symbol offset value default Note that when a symbol has been defined as the address value only the symbol is displayed Settings Scroll Range Opens the Scroll Range Settings dialog box to set the scroll range Mixed Display Sets to the mixed display mode and displays the correspondence between the disassembled data and the source text default Jump to Source
31. b Saving the contents of the CPU register Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is write disabled the same operation is applied as the selection in Save CPU Register Data As Save CPU Register Data Opens the Save As dialog box to newly save the contents of this panel to the specified text file txt As CSV file csv see b Saving the contents of the CPU register Edit menu CPU Register panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the CPU Register panel other items are all invalid Cut Deletes the selected character string and copies it to the clipboard This item becomes valid only when the character string is being edited Copy Copies the selected character string to the clipboard during editing If a line is selected copies the register or the category to the clipboard The copied item can be pasted to the Watch panel Paste Pasts the character string copied in the clipboard to the caret position This item becomes valid only when the character string is being edited Select All Selects all the items of this panel Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Find in Files tab selected Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Replace in Files tab selected R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 266 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context men
32. displayed in it For each displayed item change their setting Download object Specify whether or not to download object information from a specified file Default Yes Method to change By selecting from drop down list Specifiable value Yes Downloads object information No Does not download object information Download symbol information Specify whether or not to download symbol information from a specified file Note 1 Default Yes Method to change By selecting from drop down list Specifiable value Yes Downloads symbol information No Does not download symbol information Specify the PIC PID offset Specify whether or not to change the positions of PIC Position Independent Code and PID Position Independent Data areas of the load module to be downloaded from those at which they were when the load module was created When this item is changed to Yes PIC Offset and PID Offset are displayed in the sub item Default No Method to change By selecting from drop down list Specifiable value Yes Specifies PIC PID offset 2 No Does not specify PIC PID offset R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 RENESAS Page 52 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS PIC Offset Enter an offset value from an address that was in the load module when it was created For example if the pr
33. 0x10 0x100 Before Execution 0x300 Hardware Break Formati lt Generation condition gt lt File name Variable name gt lt Address range gt Generation condition lt Comparison condition gt lt Comparison value gt Access related Example Read main c variable1 0x100 0x101 0x5 Write sub c variable2 0x200 0x200 0x7 Read Write sub2 c variable3 0x300 0x303 0x8 Format2 lt Generation condition gt lt File name Function name Variable name gt lt Address range gt lt Comparison condition gt lt Comparison value gt Example Read main c funcl variable1 0x100 0x101 0x10 Format3 lt Generation condition gt lt Variable name gt lt Address range gt lt Comparison condition gt lt Comparison value gt Example Write variable 0x100 0x101 0x10 Software Break Format1 lt Generation condition gt lt File name Line number gt lt Address gt E1 E20 Example Before Execution main c 40 0x102 Before Execution sub c 101 0x204 Format2 lt Generation condition gt lt Symbol Offset gt lt Address gt Example Before Execution funcA 0x12 0x102 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 308 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Event Type Display ContentsNotet Combination break lt Combination condition gt Generation condition lt Detailed information of combination break gt Execution related Access relat
34. 10 history entries To specify multiple pieces of initialization data specify a maximum of 16 pieces of up to 4 bytes 8 characters of data by separating each with a space Each piece of initialization data are interpreted as comprising 1 byte in units of 2 characters from the tail end of the character string If the data consists of an odd number of characters the first character in it is assumed to be comprising 1 byte Values consisting of 2 bytes or more will be converted to the arrays of bytes that match the endians in the address range to be initialized before being written to the target memory R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 103 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Input Character String Initialize data Written in image in bytes 00 012 345 00 12 00 45 03 00 00 12 03 45 000 12 000345 00 00 12 45 03 00 00 00 12 00 03 45 c Clicking the OK button Click the OK button A pattern of the specified initialization data is written into the specified address range of memory repeatedly If the end address is reached in the middle of this pattern the write process is terminated However if an invalid value or address expression is specified CubeSuite displays a message and does not initialize memory values 7 Saving displayed memory contents It is possible to save a specified range of memory contents to a text file txt or a CSV file csv When saving to a file CubeSuite gets
35. 2 Regarding settings of timer measurement events e g about limitation on valid number of events also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting 1 Setting the timer start event and timer end event On the Editor panel Disassemble panel or Watch panel set the events at which you want a timer measurement to start and end a How to set a timer start event To set from the Editor panel Move the caret to the line or address Note 1 Timer Settings on context menu and from it choose Start Timer A timer start event is set for the instruction at the beginning address corresponding to the line or address at the caret position at which you want a timer measurement to start and then select To set from the Disassemble panel Note 1 Move the caret to the line or address at which you want a timer measurement to start and then select Timer Settings on context menu and from it choose Start Timer and then Set Timer Note 2 A timer start event is set for the instruction at the beginning address corresponding to the line or address at the caret position Move the caret to the variable at which you want a timer measurement to start and then select Timer Settings on context menu and from it choose Set Timer Start R W Value and then Set Timer Note 2 A timer start event is set for the variable at the caret position To set from the Watch panel Note 3 Move the caret to the watch expression at which yo
36. 2 Bytes Displays memory values in 16 bit width The value is converted according to the endian in the target memory area 4 Bytes Displays memory values in 32 bit width The value is converted according to the endian in the target memory area 8 Bytes Displays memory values in 64 bit width The value is converted according to the endian in the target memory area Encoding Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the character code in the character string area However this menu is disabled during program execution ASCII Displays character strings in ASCII code default Shift_JIS Displays character strings in Shift_JIS code EUC JP Displays character strings in EUC JP code UTF 8 Displays character strings in UTF 8 code UTF 16 Displays character strings in UTF 16 code View Shows the following cascaded menu to change the display form Settings Scroll Range Opens the Scroll Range Settings dialog box to set the scroll range Highlight Accessed Checking this menu will highlight the memory value which has been changed due to program execution default However this menu is disabled during program execution Periodic Updating Shows the following cascaded menu to set realtime display updates see b Realtime display update function Periodic Updating Options R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Opens the Property panel to comprehensively set the Realtime display update 2tENESAS Page 250 of 429
37. 2011 2tENESAS Page 325 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE PID Offset Input the offset values to the PID register specified at the time of load module creation For instance if you want to set 0x200 to the PID register when executing the load module enter 200 here Default 0 How to change Enter directly from the keyboard Specifiable value Hex number between 0x0 and OxFFFFFFFF Notes 1 If any file as the subject to build in the project is selected in the Download File List area or while the program is under execution the button is not displayed 2 Unless symbol information is downloaded source level debugs cannot be performed 3 Proper debug operation is not guaranteed when you have selected Yes for load modules that were created without using PIC PID function see Section 2 7 Usage of PIC PID Function Function buttons Button Function Terminates download file settings and closes this dialog box Nullifies download file changes made and closes this dialog box Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 326 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Text Edit dialog box This dialog box is used to input modify character strings Figure A 41 Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function
38. 5 Select the debug tool to use Select the debug tool to be used in a project Remark The selectable debug tool differs depending on the microcontroller type to be used in a project 6 Configure the operating environment for the debug tool Configure the operating environment for the debug tool selected in step 5 E1 E20 Simulator 7 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite to start communication 8 Execute downloading Download the load module created in step 3 to the debug tool 9 Displaying source files Display the contents of the downloaded load module source files on the Editor panel or Disassemble panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 9 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 10 Execute programs Execute the program using the operation method that matches your purpose If you wish to stop the program at the arbitrary position set a breakpoint break event before executing the program see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint 2 10 3 Stop the program at the arbitrary position break event E1 E20 Note These functions are implemented by setting events to the debug tool used See 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting when you use events 11 Stop the program manually Stop the program currently being executed Note that if a breakpoint break event has been set in steps 10 the program execution will be
39. Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator Mx 200m4 Communications method FINE baud rate bps E Flash Input Mode of ID code ID code Work RAM start address Work RAM size bytes B Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Register setting Endian E External Flash External flash definition file No E1 XXXXXKXKX No FINE 2000000 Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal Res FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Fes 1000 1024 Single chip mode Single chip mode Little endian data 4 Size of internal ROM KBytes Size of the internal ROM ztENESAS Page 15 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 7 Property Panel E1 JTAG Property g S A KBytes Size of internal RAM KBytes Size of DataFlash memory KBytes E Clock Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator MAX 200m4 method internal A Lommunications JTAG clock MHz B Flash Input Mode of ID code ID code Work RAM start address work RAM size bytes E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Register setting Endian E External Flash External flash definition file E1 XXXXXXXXX N
40. An example of using Optlnk s start option to define overlay sections is given below Example Defining overlay sections by OptInk start Psect01 1000 Psect02 2000 Psect03 3000 ram01 ram02 ram03 5000 rom Psect01l ram01 Psect02 ram02 Psect03 ram03 The rom option reserves section ramXxX which is as large as the PsecXX section and relocates the symbols defined in the PsecXX section to the corresponding addresses in the ramXX section XX 01 02 or 03 in this example Remark For setting of overlay sections by the build tool refer to Chapter 2 Functions in CubeSuite for the RX Build Figure 2 79 Allocation of Overlay Sections Memory space 0x0000 0x1000 0x2000 0x3000 Overlay sections Section to be Section to be Section to be debugged Psec01 debugged Psec02 debugged Psec03 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 75 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 1 Selecting the priority section The priority section can be selected under the Debug Information category on the Download File Settings tab in the Property panel Figure 2 80 Debug Information Category E Debug information Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset Yes Specified symbol main Specify the debugged overlay section D 1 Specify the debugged overlay section Yes is displayed when overlay sections exist in the load module this cannot be changed
41. By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable value One of the following as selected from the drop down list 2000000 750000 500000 250000 Note The specifiable voltage value differs with each selected microcontroller 6 Flash E1 E20 The detailed information on the flash memory writing is displayed and its configuration can be changed Input Mode of ID code Specify ID code input mode Default ID code specified in 32 hexadecimal digits How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable value Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal Enter ID code in 32 hexadecimal digits Specify the ID code Enter ID code within 16 ASCII characters as an ASCII code within 16 characters ID code Specify ID code that is used when code in memory is read out Default For Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF For Specify the ID code as an ASCII code within 16 characters Blank How to change By entering directly from the keyboard However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable value For Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal 32 hexadecimal digits For ID code specified within 16 characters ASCII 16 ASCII code characters if l
42. E20 2 Notation Size Notation Encoding C Move when Stop D 3 O D 9 D 2 Notation Size Notation Encoding C Move when Stop 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 8 2 7 2 90x09 Memory E B Notationy Size Notation Encoding x C Move when Stop 0x1000 5 Searching for memory contents To search for memory values use the Memory Search dialog box that is opened by selecting Find on context menu A search is conducted in the subject area either the memory value or the character string area where the caret exists R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 101 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS In this dialog box follow the procedure below to search for memory contents Figure 2 102 Searching for Memory Contents Memory Search Dialog Box Memory Search Search Data Search Range Specify address range Address 0x0 z _Oxtftfftf Caution Memory contents cannot be searched during program execution a Specify the Search Data Specify the data you want to search Directly enter it in the text box specifiable in up to 256 bytes or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries To perform a search in the memory value area you need to enter data in the same display form numeral system and size as that area A
43. Line number 1 133 m R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 62 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a Specifying Line number valid line range valid line range shows the range of valid lines in the current file Directly enter a decimal value as the number of the line you want to move the caret to You can also enter a symbol in this area By default the number of the line where the caret is currently located in the Editor panel is displayed b Clicking the OK button The caret moves to the specified line 4 Jump to functions It automatically recognizes the currently selected characters or the word at the caret position as the function name and jumps to the first executable line of the target function Select Jump to Function from the context menu after moving the caret to the target function on the source text Figure 2 69 Jump to Functions 97 98 FEEFS6e0 Funo 99 ffff86e3 fund E 100 o ioi q je End user Ps Register Action Event 102 Cut Ctrl x 103 al 104 Start user code nE Copy Sues 105 Efff86ed void func1 E 106 zki E 107 UINT i A Find Ctrl F 108 w GoTo Ctrl G 109 E ff86ef for i 0 110 EEff86fd fund 111 Back to Last Cursor Position 112 113 Goto Here 114 E fff8711 void funcla gt Set PC to Here 115 i 116 UINT i lt la Jump to Function F12 gt lt Tag Jump X Shift F1 Note t
44. Look in B sample DefaultBuild 2 El sample mtpj My Recent Documents 2 T Desktop My Documents My Computer amp File name i JD Ea My Network Files of type 3 4 Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu select Open File or Open with Encoding Description of each area 1 Look in area Select the folder which contains the file you want to open When you first open this dialog box C Documents and Settings user name My Documents will be selected After the second time the last selected folder will be shown by default 2 File List area This area shows the list of files that meet the conditions specified in Look in and Files of type areas 3 File name area Specify the name of the file to be opened R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 398 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Select the type of the file to be opened All files All formats Project File mtpj Project file Project File for CubeSuite cspj Project file for CubeSuite Workspace File for HEW hws Workspace file for HEW Project File for HEW hwp Project file for HEW Workspace File for PM prw Workspace file for PM Pr
45. Note that when arrays or register are displayed expanded the comment cannot be input for each element To edit the comment input the character strings directly from the keyboard after double clicking on the item to be edited press the Esc key to cancel the edit mode Up to 256 character strings can be input line feed code is ignored After editing the character strings complete the editing by pressing the Enter key or moving the focus to outside the edit region Toolbar Reacquires all the values of the registered watch expression and updates the display Note that read protected I O register values are not re read Resets highlighting of the selected watch expression whose value has been changed by executing a program This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Registers a new watch expression Directly input the watch expression in the text box see c Registering new watch expression Note that up to 128 watch expressions can be registered in one watch panel Adds a new category folder Directly input the category name in the text box Note that up to 64 categories can be created in one watch panel categories cannot be created in categories Deletes the selected character string s If the watch expression s category s are selected deletes them except when the expanded item of the watch expression is selected Notation The following buttons to ch
46. Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode After editing a comment press the Enter key or move the focus to other than the editing area to complete your editing A comment can be entered in up to 256 characters which is saved as the setting of the current user 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting Here the points to note when you make settings of various events are described 1 Limitation on the number of valid events 2 Types of events that can be set or removed during execution 3 Other precautions 1 Limitation on the number of valid events The number of events that can be set as valid or Enabled events at the same time are subject to the following limitations Therefore if this limit is exceeded when you set one or more new valid events some of the events that are already set need to be Disabled before you can set a new one Table 2 22 Limitation on the Number of Valid Events RX600 Series Debug tool Type of event E1 Serial E1 JTAG Simulator E20 Serial E20 JTAG Software break 256 Hardware break execution related gNotet before Go Break event execution related after gNote1 Go Break event access related Read 4Note1 Note3 Write Read Write Combination break g 4Note1 Note2 Notes Trace trace start trace end g 4Note1 Note2 Note6 Point trace 4Note1 Note2 8 4Note1 Note2 Note6 Timer result timer start timer end R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1
47. Property AX E1 Serial Property 1 5 Memory Memory mappings 23 Verify on writing to memory Yes 2 Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution No Update the display during execution Yes Update interval ms 500 3 P E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used Hardware break 4 E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM No Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH No Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Yes Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Yes ine to run immediately after execution stops Je of trace function Trac Operation after trace memory is full Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Trace data type Branch 6 P G Timer Use 64bit counter No Operating frequency MHz 25 0000 look Transaction Settings R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 209 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Property amp AX E1 Serial Property Figure A 11 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab E1 Serial RX200 Series A Memory mappings Verify on writing to memory Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution Update the display during execution Update interval ms E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used E System
48. RENESAS Page 307 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Notes 1 A breakpoint that is set by a one click operation of the mouse is displayed Break see 2 Seta breakpoint 2 This is set in the debug tool by default 3 E1 E20 A channel number indicating the range to be measured by the timer is given to this event type e g Timer Result 1 The number of measurement ranges varies with the Microcontroller RX600 Series 2 ranges RX200 Series 1range Remark The following event types are also displayed when an event breakpoint or break event is set on the Function panel or the Variable panel of the analyze tool Program Analyzer In the case of a breakpoint at a function Break at start of function In the case of a break event to a variable Access break to variable 2 Detail Information area Detailed information about each event is displayed The contents of the information that is displayed differ depending on the event type as follows Table A 13 Detailed Information with Event Type Event Type Display ContentsNotet Hardware Break Formati lt Generation condition gt lt File name Line number gt lt Address gt Generation condition Execution related Example Before Execution main c 39 0x100 Before Execution 0x300 Execution main c 39 0x300 Simulator Format2 lt Generation condition gt lt Symbol Offset gt lt Address gt Example Before Execution funcA
49. Remarks 1 If panel contents are saved over an existing file by selecting Save Disassembled Data on File menu the respective Disassemble panels disassembly 1 4 are handled individually Also as to the save range the previously specified address range is applied when data is saved 2 By selecting File gt gt Print you can print the image currently displayed on this panel 2 6 3 Executing a build in parallel with other processes CubeSuite provides a facility to automatically start a build in synchronism with the timing described below rapid build function 1 For other than the debug only project When any of the C source files C source files assembler source files header files link directive files symbol information files object module files relocatable module files or library files added to the project is updated When a file to build is added or removed from the project When the order in which object module files is linked is changed When the properties of the build tool or the file to build are changed 2 For the debug only project When a C source file C source file assembler source file or header file added to the debug only project is saved after editing When aC source file C source file assembler source file or header file is added or removed from the debug only project When properties of the debug only project are changed R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 69 of 429 Oct 01 2
50. Setting the properties of a download file to add In the Download file property area select a download file you want to add and set its download conditions For each displayed item make the following setting When setting is completed the file name you ve specified here is reflected in the blank item in the Download File List area Specify a download file to add hex format hex Motorola S format mot or binary data format bin specifiable in up to 259 characters Default Blank Method to By entering directly from the keyboard or specifying in the Select Download change File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button displayed at the right edge of this property when it is selected Specifiable See Table 2 2 Downloadable File Formats values R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 53 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS File type Specify the file type of a download file to add Here select Hex File S Record File or Binary Data File Default Load module file Method to By selecting from drop down list change Specifiable Either one of the following values Load module file Hex file S record file Binary data file This item is displayed only when the file to download is a hex format hex or Motorola S format mot Specify an offset value from the address at which a download of a specified file begins Default
51. The size of work RAM to be used by the debugger firmware at a designated RAM location address is indicated in Work RAM size bytes property Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E20 2 This area can also be used by the user program since the memory contents are swapped and restored However you cannot designate this area as the source or destination of DMA or DTC function transfer lt 4 gt Work RAM size bytes Displays the size of work RAM to be used by the debugger Operating Modes of CPU In this category you configure the operating mode of the microcontroller to be emulated Caution This property cannot be changed while connected to E20 Figure 2 32 Operating Modes of CPU Category E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Single chip mode Register setting Single chip mode Endian Little endian data lt 1 gt Mode pins setting Specify the operating mode set by the mode pin of the microcontroller lt 2 gt Register setting Specify the operating mode to be set by the register The operating mode that can be specified depends on the type of the microcontroller lt 3 gt Endian Displays the project endian Acquires endian information from the project and displays its value Can be selected only when the debug tool is disconnected External Flash In this category you can configure external flash The settings in this category are required when downloading to an external flash
52. Whitespace Deletes any trailing whitespace that appears after the last non whitespace character on the cursor line Delete Line Completely delete the current cursor line Duplicate Line Duplicates the cursor line inserting a copy of the line immediately after the cursor line Delete Blank Lines Deletes the line at the cursor if it is empty or contains only whitespace Break Settings The following cascade menus are displayed to set the break related event Note that events can be set only for lines for which events can be set see 6 Event area Set Hardware Break Sets a breakpoint Hardware Break event to the line at the caret position see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint Note 1 Set Software Break E1 E20 Sets a breakpoint Software Break event to the line at the caret position see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint Note 1 Set Read Break to Simulator Sets a break event with read access condition to the line at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable I O register see 1 Set a break event access type to a variable I O register Set Write Break to Simulator Sets a break event with write access condition to the line at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static vari
53. access related has been set for the selected watch expression and it is managed on the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management Access type Operation Read write Trace start event Choose Record Start R W Value from Trace Output and then hit the Enter key Trace end event Choose Record End R W Value from Trace Output and then hit the Enter key If a value is specified in the text box of the menu at this time collection of trace data is started or finished only when a read write is performed with a specified value If no values are specified collection of trace data is started or finished when a selected watch expression is read or written to no matter what value is read or written Cautions 1 Only the watch expressions in current scope are selectable To use any watch expression outside the current scope for a trace event select a watch expression that has its scope specified 2 The access types that can be set from watch expressions are only a read write To change the access type to a read or write after setting trace start and end events edit them in a dialog box that opens from the Events panel see 4 Editing trace start and trace end events When a trace start event and trace end event are set they are managed collectively on the Events panel as one instance of a trace event When you click the mark at a trace event item detailed information on the trace start and trace end events you ve
54. global Global variable file func var current file func Static variables in a static function 23 file var current file global Static variables in a file var Notes 1 current current current A Note 4 If the load module name or file name includes a space or one of the following symbols be sure to enclose the name in double quotes Example c folder prog abs file c func 46 8 amp 4 745 27 51 lt gt 2 When you specify a function defined within a name space add the scope to the function e g Scope func If there are two or more functions that have the same name also specify the parameter type e g func int int 3 Ifthe current PC value exists within a specified function even the local variables that are not declared to be static are searched for 4 Local variables intra file static variables and global variables are searched for in that order from the scope of the current PC value Local variables and intra file static variables outside the scope are not searched Table A 8 Scope Specification of CPU Register with Watch Expression Registration Scope Specification R10 REG Register Bank Name of CPU Register R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 283 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Table A 9 Scope Specification of I O register with Watch Expression Registration Sc
55. menu R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 193 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Project tree area This area displays the project s constituent elements in tree form at the following nodes Node Description Microcontroller type Debug tool name debug tool Microcontroller type Shows the type name of a selected microcontroller RX Debug tool name Shows the debug tool name used in the project E1 Serial E1 JTAG E20 Serial E20 UTAG or Simulator When a new project is created Simulator is set When a node is selected its detailed information properties is displayed on the Property panel allowing the set tings on it to be changed If this panel is not open yet double click a node to open it Toolbar Displays category nodes and file names sorted in order of name character code Ascending display descending display are switched over each time the button is clicked Indicates that displayed elements are not sorted in order of name default Indicates that elements are displayed in descending order Indicates that elements are displayed in ascending order Displays category nodes and file names sorted in order of timestamp Ascending display descending display are switched over each time the button is clicked Indicates that displayed elements are not sorted in order of timestamp default
56. menu and their functionality are as follows default Shows the following cascaded menu to open the Watch panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Watch1 Opens the Watch panel Watch1 Watch2 Opens the Watch panel Watch2 Watch3 Opens the Watch panel Watch3 Watch4 Opens the Watch panel Watch4 Local Variable Opens the Local Variables panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Call Stack Opens the Call Stack panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Memory Shows the following cascaded menu to open the Memory panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Opens the Memory panel Memory1 Memory1 Memory2 Opens the Memory panel Memory2 Opens the Memory panel Memory3 Memory3 Memory4 Opens the Memory panel Memory4 Opens the IOR panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool CPU Register Opens the CPU Register panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Opens the Trace panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Disassemble Shows the following cascaded menu to op
57. only the symbol is displayed 3 Moving to a specified address To move to a specified address in the disassembled text select Go to on context menu and use the Go to the Location dialog box that is opened In this dialog box follow the procedure described below to Move to a specified address Figure 2 73 Move to the Specified Address in Disassembled Text Go to the Location Dialog Box Go to the Location ddress Symbol a Specifying Address Symbol Specify an address to which you want to move the caret Enter an address directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 67 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b Clicking the OK button The caret moves to the specified address 4 Moving to a symbol definition part The caret position can be moved to the address at which a symbol is defined Move the caret to an instruction that is referencing the symbol and then click the toolbar button i Also if subsequently to the above operation you click the toolbar bal button the caret position is returned to the instruction that was referencing the symbol before the caret was moved 5 Saving the displayed contents o
58. tab selected Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Replace in Files tab selected Move Opens the Go to the Location dialog box to move the caret to the specified address Context menu Disassemble area and Address area Register to Watch1 Registers the selected character string or the word at the caret position to the Watch panel Watch1 as a watch expression the judgment of the word depends on current build tool At this time since it is registered as a variable name the symbol name that is displayed changes depending on the scope Register Action Event Opens the Action Events dialog box to set an action event to the address at the caret position Go to Here Executes the program from the address indicated by the current PC value to the address corresponding to the line at the caret position This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Build amp Download Set PC to Here Sets the address of the line at the current caret position to the current PC value This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Build amp Download Move Opens the Go to the Location dialog box to move the caret to the specified address Go to Symbol Moves the caret to the define position of the selected symbol Back to Address Moves the caret to the position address immediately before it is moved by Go to Symbol Note that this item becomes invalid when no sym
59. 0 Method to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable Hexadecimal number in the range 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF values Start address This item is displayed only when the file to download is a binary data format bin Specify the start address from which a specified file is downloaded Default 0 Method to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable Hexadecimal number in the range 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF values Remark Specification of whether or not to download object information or symbol information is accepted only when the type of file to download is a load module file c Confirming the order in which a download is executed A download is executed in the order in which files are displayed in the Download File List area To change the order use the Up or Down button to move any file up or down in the list d Clicking the OK button Settings you ve made in this dialog box are enabled with the specified file added as a download file The added file name and its download condition are displayed in the Download category on the Property panel s Download File Settings tab 3 Downloading multiple load module files To download multiple load module files follow the procedure described below as you fill in the Download Files dialog box Caution When debugging a program comprised of multiple load module files be careful that location addresses will not overlap a C
60. 00 ztENESAS Page 166 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Debug tool Type of event E1 Serial E1 JTAG Simulator E20 Serial E20 JTAG Action Printf event Same as for the number Same as for the number of of software breaks hardware breaks Action Interrupt event 0 256 Table 2 23 Maximum Number of Enabled Events RX200 Series Debug tool Type of event E1 Serial Simulator E20 Serial Software break 256 Hardware break execution related 4Note4 before Go Break event execution related after 4Note4 Go Break event access related Read oNote4 Write Read Write Combination break 442Note4 4 2Note4 Note5 Note6 Trace trace start trace end Point trace 4Note4 Timer result timer start timer end 4 2Note4 Note6 Action Printf event Same as for the number Same as for the number of of software breaks hardware breaks Action Interrupt event 0 256 Notes 1 There are 8 events for execution address and 4 events for data access which are shared in each function 2 Foran event combination up to 8 events can be set 3 E20 JTAG The trace function and the realtime RAM monitor function RRM function in part are usable exclusively of each other Therefore while the RRM function is in use the point trace cannot be used Also the access event is usable only when the RRM block has free space 4 There are 4 even
61. 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Debug Console HHH Data Input HHH a0 The element names of the array a in which data is stored are output onto the panel by the printf function in the main function When data is entered from the keyboard onto the panel the data is read in by the scanf function in the main function Debug Console HHH Data Input HHH 0 0 a i a 1 21468 a 2 9988 xxx The sorted data is output onto the panel by the printf function in the main function R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 176 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remark If you disable the local echo back function in Echo Back selected from the Debug Console panel s context menu the character strings you have entered will not be displayed local echo back will not be performed R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 177 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 20 About Input Value This section describes consideration to take when inputting values in each panel and dialog box 2 20 1 Input rule Following is the rules for input to each panel and dialog box 1 Character set Character sets that are allowed to input are as follows Table 2 26 List of Character Set Character Set Outline ASCII 1 byte alphabets numbers symbols Shift JIS 2 byte alphabet number symbol Hiragana Katakana Kanji and 1 byte Katakana EUC JP
62. 2 FUNCTIONS Word When an access in word size occurs the condition holds true Long word When an access in long word size occurs the condition holds true lt 3 gt Compare condition Specify a data comparison condition The comparison condition differs with each debug tool as follows E1 E20 Specified value When data compare conditions match the condition holds true Any other value When data compare conditions do not match the condition holds true Simulator Equal When data and specified value match the condition holds true Not equal When data and specified value do not match the condition holds true Inverse sign When the sign is inverted between the previously accessed data and the data accessed this time the condition holds true Note Difference When the difference between the previously accessed data and the data accessed this time exceeds a specified value the condition holds true Note Greater than gt When data is greater than a specified value the condition holds true Less than lt When data is smaller than a specified value the condition holds true Greater than or equal to gt When data is equal to or greater than a specified value the condition holds true Less than or equal to lt When data is equal to or smaller than a specified value the condition holds true Inside the range lt Values lt When data is within
63. 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Area condition Specify address comparison range condition This property is displayed only when Address Range is selected in the Compare condition property Default Inside the range lt values lt Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Inside the range Condition holds true for an access lt values lt within the range Outside the range Condition holds true for an access lt Values lt outside the range End Address Specify the end address The start address is the value displayed in the Address property This property is displayed only when Address areal is selected in the Compare condition property Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Address mask Specify a mask value in hexadecimal Notes This property is displayed only when Compare with address mask is selected in the Compare condition property Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Compare Specify compare condition This property is displayed only when Compare with address mask is selected in the Compare condition property Default Specified value Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Specified value True when matched with a
64. APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbar Obtains latest information from the debug tool and updates the display No data are reloaded for the I O registers protected against read However this button is disabled during program execution Resets the highlighting for a selected I O register which indicates that its value has changed as a result of program execution However this button is disabled during program execution Adds a new category folder Enter a category name directly in the text box While you can create any number of new categories note that a category cannot be created within another category However this button is disabled during program execution Deletes a selected range of character string If a blank category is in selected state the category is deleted I O registers cannot be deleted Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays the value of a selected item in hexadecimal default Displays the value of a selected item in signed decimal Displays the value of a selected item in unsigned decimal o E e g Displays the value of a selected item in octal Displays the value of a selected item in binary Displays the value of a selected item in ASCII code Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value of a selected item at the end of it with the equivalent
65. E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Single chip mode Register setting Single chip mode Endian Little endian data lt 1 gt Mode pins setting Specify the operating mode set by the mode pin of the microcontroller lt 2 gt Register setting Specify the operating mode to be set by the register The operating mode that can be specified depends on the type of the microcontroller lt 3 gt Endian Display the project endian Acquires endian information from the project and displays its value Can be selected only when the debug tool is disconnected External Flash In this category you can configure external flash The settings in this category are required when downloading to an external flash memory For more details regarding property setting see 5 Downloading files to external flash memory E1 E20 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 20 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Caution You cannot change the property in this category while connected to E1 2 Debug Tool Settings tab In the Debug Tool Settings tab you configure the basic settings of the debug tool for each one of the following categories a Memory b Access Memory While Running c Break d System e Trace f Timer a Memory You can configure the memory in this category Figure 2 16 Memory Category E Memory E Memory mappings 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
66. Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 D sseldorf Germany Tel 49 211 65030 Fax 49 211 6503 1327 Renesas Electronics China Co Ltd 7th Floor Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District Beijing 100083 P R China Tel 86 10 8235 1155 Fax 86 10 8235 7679 Renesas Electronics Shanghai Co Ltd Unit 204 205 AZIA Center No 1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd Pudong District Shanghai 200120 China Tel 86 21 5877 1818 Fax 86 21 6887 7858 7898 Renesas Electronics Hong Kong Limited Unit 1601 1613 16 F Tower 2 Grand Century Place 193 Prince Edward Road West Mongkok Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 852 2886 9318 Fax 852 2886 9022 9044 Renesas Electronics Taiwan Co Ltd 13F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei Taiwan Tel 886 2 8175 9600 Fax 886 2 8175 9670 Renesas Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 1 harbourFront Avenue 06 10 keppel Bay Tower Singapore 098632 Tel 65 6213 0200 Fax 65 6278 8001 Renesas Electronics Malaysia Sdn Bhd Unit 906 Block B Menara Amcorp Amcorp Trade Centre No 18 Jin Persiaran Barat 46050 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia Tel 60 3 7955 9390 Fax 60 3 7955 9510 Renesas Electronics Korea Co Ltd 11F Samik Lavied or Bldg 720 2 Yeoksam Dong Kangnam Ku Seoul 135 080 Korea Tel 82 2 558 3737 Fax 82 2 558 5141 2011 Renesas Electronics Corporation All rights reserved Colophon 1 1 CubeSuite V1 01 00 2rCENESAS Ren
67. Environment Settings Simulator Property Panel Property S AX Simulator Property E Internal ROM RAM El Endian Endian of CPU Little endian data E Clock System clock ICLK frequency MHz 50 E Peripheral Function Simulaton Peripheral function simulation module Peripheral clock rate Size of internal ROM KB ytes Displays the size of the internal ROM Download File Sett Hook Transaction Follow the steps below by selecting the corresponding tab on the Property panel 1 2 1 Connect Settings tab 2 Debug Tool Settings tab 3 4 3 Download File Settings tab 4 Hook Transaction Settings tab 1 Connect Settings tab In the Connect Settings tab you can configure the connection with the debug tool for each one of the following categories a Internal ROM RAM b Endian c Clock d Peripheral Function Simulation a Internal ROM RAM The size of internal ROM RAM of the selected microcontroller is displayed in this category Figure 2 42 Internal ROM RAM Category Simulator E Internal ROM RAM lt 1 gt Size of internal ROM KBytes The internal ROM size to simulate is displayed unit Kbytes You cannot change the value of this property R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 38 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 2 gt Size of internal RAM KBytes The internal RAM size to simulate is displayed unit Kbytes You cannot change the value of t
68. FUNCTIONS in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab has its specification automatically changed to Yes with the trace function enabled 2 Combining multiple events E1 E20 If there are two or more events set for the trace start event collection of trace data can be made to start when the trace start event satisfies the following combination conditions Also if there are two or more events set for the trace end event collection of trace data is finished when the condition for any one of trace end events is met Table 2 14 Combination Conditions for the Trace Start Event Combination condition Description Collection of trace data begins when any one of the trace start events set occurs i e its designated condition is met Collection of trace data begins when all of the trace start events set occur irrespective of time base Sequential Collection of trace data begins when the trace start events set occur in a specified order Also an event but only one of trace start events can be registered as a reset event R event When a registered event occurs the other trace start events that have had occurred up to that point of time are all cleared To edit a set trace event choose Event from the View menu select the trace event on the Events panel that is opened and then click Edit Condition on the context menu Do your editing in a dialog box that is opened by th
69. How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select File name Save Settings from the File menu Description of each area 1 Encode area Select the encoding to be set from the drop down list The items of the drop down list are displayed according to the following sequence Note that the same encoding and encoding which are not supported by the current OS will not be displayed Current encoding of the file default Default encoding of the current OS Most recently used encodings maximum 4 Popular encodings for current locale e g for United States locale it will be Western European Windows Unicode UTF 8 All other encodings supported by the OS in alphabetical order R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 336 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Newline code area Select the newline code to be set from the drop down list You can select any of items below Windows CR LF Macintosh CR Unix LF An active newline entry is selected by default 3 Reload the file with these settings Reloads the file with the selected encoding and newline code when the OK button is clicked Does not reload the file when the OK button is clicked default Function buttons Button Function Sets the selected encoding and newline code to the target file and closes this dialog box If Reload the file with these settings is selected sets the
70. Items The File menu used exclusively for the call stack panel is as follows The other items are shared However all of these items are disabled during program execution Save Call Stack Data Saves the contents of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv that has been saved previously see b Saving of call stack information If this item is selected for the first time after startup the same operation as Save Call Stack Data As would have been selected is performed Save Call Stack Data As Opens the Save As dialog box in order to save the contents of this panel to a specified text file txt or CSV file csv see b Saving of call stack information Edit Menu Call Stack Panel Only Items The Edit menu used exclusively for the call stack panel is as follows All other items are disabled Copy Copies the content of a selected line as character string to the clipboard Select All Puts the item into all selected state Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Find in Files tab selected Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Replace in Files tab selected R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 295 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Each item on the context menu are disabled during program execution Copy Copies the content of a selected line
71. Measurement Result Status Bar m BREAK gt oxfffF86dc GaRx E20 ITAG 7 1 351 s D S 5 Measurement result displayed in this area 2 Checking the event panel for confirmation When a program has stopped running the measurement result is displayed as a Run Break timer event on the Events panel that is opened by selecting Event from the View menu Figure 2 132 Example of a Run Break Timer Event Measurement Result Event Panel E1 E20 Events a eS aE Name Detail 9 Unconditional Trace p Run Break Timer Total 1351 300000 ns Figure 2 133 Example of a Run Break Timer Event Measurement Result Event Panel Simulator Events xojo 35 3 Detail Run Break Timer Total 103533550 ns Execution Cycle Count 10353355 Execution Instruction Count 6676928 5 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 142 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section E1 E20 By setting timer measurement events timer start event and timer end event it is possible to measure a program s execution time in any section in its execution process To use this function follow the procedure described below 1 Setting the timer start event and timer end event 2 Execute the program 3 Editing a timer measurement event 4 Deleting a timer start event or timer end event Cautions 1 Simulator Timer measurement events are not supported
72. Note Show parameters lt function gt lt parameter gt lt parameter value lt file Name gt lt line number gt Do not show module file names Do not show parameters lt function gt lt module file name gt lt file name gt lt line number gt Show module file names Do not show parameters lt function gt lt file name gt lt line number gt Do not show module file names Note Ifthe parameter value is a character string up to 20 characters are displayed Remark An array of parameters are passed as a pointer not as an array C language specifications Therefore if parameters are comprised of an array they are handled as pointer when displayed This area has the following features a Jump to the source line disassemble Selecting Jump to Source from the context menu will open the Editor panel with the caret moved to the source line from which the function at the current caret position is called The view will jump to the Editor panel if it is already open Similarly selecting Jump to Disassemble will open the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 with the caret moved to the address from which the function at the current caret position is called The view will jump to the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 if it is already open Remark Double clicking a line will also make you jump to the corresponding source line b Saving of call stack information Selecting Save Call Stack Data As
73. Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Resets the CPU program is not executed However this item is disabled when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting CPU Reset from the Debug menu Forcibly halts the currently executed program However this item is disabled when the program is already halted or disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Stop from the Debug menu Runs the program from the current PC position and when the condition for a set break event holds true stops the program under execution However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Go from the Debug menu Runs the program from the current PC position and continues running it ignoring the break and action events set However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Ignore break and go from the Debug menu Resets the CPU once and then starts running the program from the reset address However this item is disabled when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Restart from the Debug menu
74. R1 Set the first byte of R2 result of execution in R1 Return to the address where the function was called SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 2 Parameter block area R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 420 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX C INDEX APPENDIX C A Access width 321 Access related event 127 159 Action event 151 310 328 Action Events dialog box 328 Interrupt Event Setting tab 333 Printf event tab 330 Address range 321 After execution break 85 AND 93 163 Array 275 281 Auto variables 275 B Before execution break 83 Big endian 104 Binary data format 50 53 56 Break 23 34 Break event 85 92 168 Break event access related 87 166 167 Break event execution related 85 166 167 Break factor 83 93 Breakpoint 23 83 Built in event 125 142 157 307 Cc Call Stack panel 293 Call stack information 293 Channel number 144 308 Clock 17 28 39 Code 254 Code coverage measurement 148 Code coverage measurement result 235 Code outlining 234 Collecting an execution history 121 Clearing the trace memory 133 INDEX Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met 130 Collecting an execution history up to a halt 125 Displaying an execution history 131 Saving the displayed content of an execution hist
75. Sets a read access break event in a selected watch expression as the condition for a combination break event Set Write Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a write access break event in a selected watch expression as the condition for a combination break event Set R W Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a read write access break event in a selected watch expression as the condition for a combination break event Trace Output This item becomes valid only when the selected watch expression is a global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable or I O register multiple selections not allowed The following cascade menus are displayed to set the trace related event see 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section or 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met The corresponding Event mark is displayed at the top of the watch expression when an event is set Sets a Point Trace event to record the values in the trace memory when the selected watch expression is accessed for read see 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred Record Reading Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the values in the trace memory when the selected watch expression is accessed for write see 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred Record Writing Value
76. Specification of C C Language Function Used with Watch Expression Registration Scope Specification prog file func Load Module File NameNte 1 prog Source File NameNote 1 file Function NameNote 2 Search target Static function prog func prog global Global function file func current file Static func Notes 1 current current AlNote 2 If the load module name or file name includes a space or one of the following symbols be sure to enclose the name in double quotes Example c folder prog abs file c func L amp AA ei t a hisa 2 Static and global functions are searched for in that order from the scope of the current PC value Static functions outside the scope are not searched When you specify a function defined within a name space add the scope to the function e g Scope func If there are two or more functions that have the same name also specify the parameter type e g func int int Table A 7 Scope Specification of C C Language Variable Used with Watch Expression Registration Scope Specification prog file func var Load Module File NameNe 1 prog Source File NameNote 1 file Function NameNote 2 func Function NameNote 2 Search target Static variables in a static function 2 3 prog file var prog file global Static variables in a file prog var prog global
77. Specify an offset from the original address allocated at the time the load module was created PID offset Specify an offset to be set in the PID register selected at the time the load module was created Figure 2 77 Adding a Download File and Changing Conditions for Downloading Download Files Dialog Box Download Files Download file list i Application Debug Application abs p Coad module tile Download object Yes Yes Yes PIC Offset F 4000 PID Offset F 4000 Specify the PIC PID offset When the downloaded load module is made with the PIC PID function you can change the executed address by switching this item to Yes MWhen R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 73 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS When the load module is downloaded after the values of PIC offset and PID offset have been changed the allocation of addresses for the P section and external or static variables is changed as shown in the figure below The left half shows an example where 4000 is specified for PIC offset and PID offset in the Download Files dialog box while the right half shows an example where 0 is specified In the left half 4000 is added to the original address Figure 2 78 Example of Downloading after the Offset Values of PIC offset and PID offset Have been Changed f watchTest c f watchTest c const char g_acc 1 Af 122 const char
78. Trace Operation after trace memory is full Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Trace data type Branch External trace output CPU execution Trace memory size MByte 1 lt 1 gt Usage of trace function Specify whether to use it as Real time RAM Monitor RRM utilizing the trace function If you select Real time RAM Monitor part of the trace functions will be disabled For details on applicable restrictions see 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution This property can be changed only when the program is not running Caution E20 Serial E20 JTAG RX200 Series Real time RAM Monitor function is not supported As such the property value is displayed as Trace and becomes unchangeable lt 2 gt Operation after trace memory is full Select the trace acquisition mode from the following drop down list Overwrite trace memory and continue Continues overwriting the older trace data after the trace memory execution is full Stop trace Stops writing the trace data after the trace memory is full Stop Breaks after the trace memory is full Caution E20 JTAG RX600 Series If you have selected Real time RAM Monitor in Usage of trace function property the property value is displayed as Overwrite trace memory and continue execution and becomes unchangeable lt 3 gt Trace data type Select the type of data for which trace is to be acquired from the drop down list The type o
79. You cannot change the value of this property b Clock You can configure the clock in this category Caution You cannot change the property in this category while connected to E20 Figure 2 26 Clock Category HOCO E Clock Main clock source HOCO Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory No Figure 2 27 Clock Category EXTAL E Clock Main clock source EXTAL Main clock frequency MHz 12 5000 Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory No lt 1 gt Main clock source Select EXTAL frequency or internal HOCO as the main clock source EXTAL will be displayed for microcontrollers with no internal HOCO lt 2 gt Main clock frequency MHz Specify the main clock frequency before multiplier Specify EXTAL frequency by directly entering a number between 0 0001 and 99 9999 MHz The entered value will be truncated to 5 decimal places If the value is out of the specifiable range it will be rounded to 0 0001 when 0 or below or to 99 9999 when 100 or above R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 28 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS This property is displayed only when you have selected EXTAL in the Main clock source property lt 3 gt Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory Specify whether to allow a debugger to operate the clock while the internal flash memory is being rewritten When Yes is selected
80. a Point Trace event to record the access value as the trace data when the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable I O register is read accessed see 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred Record Writing Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the access value as the trace data when the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable I O register is write accessed see 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred Record R W Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the access value as the trace data when the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable I O register is read write accessed see 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred Record Start R W Value Sets a trace event that causes trace recording to start upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or I O register see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Record End R W Value Sets a trace event that causes trace recording to end upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static varia
81. a file the latest information will be retrieved from the debug tool and saved according to the display format on this panel Choose Save Trace Data As from the File menu and the Data Save dialog box shown below is opened In this dialog box follow the procedure described below to save the data Figure 2 127 Saving an Execution History Data Save Dialog Box Data Save Trace Data File Name C Testisample Trace Data File Type Text files txt Save Range Number 121 v 167 1 Specifying the File Name Specify a file name in which you want to save Enter it directly in the text box specifiable in up to 259 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Also you can select a file from the Select Data Save File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button 2 Specifying the File Type Select the type of file in which you want to save from the drop down list below The selectable file types are as follows Text files txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV formate R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 139 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Note The data is saved with entries separated by commas If the data contains commas each entry is surrounded by double quotes in order to avoid illegal formatting 3 Specifying the Save Range Number Specif
82. a hexadecimal number This property is displayed only when you ve specified Inside the range lt Values lt or Outside the range lt Values lt in the Compare condition property lt 7 gt Specify the data mask When you entered a comparison data value this property is displayed allowing you to specify whether or not a mask value for the data value be specified Remark Simulator This property is displayed when you ve specified one of the following items in the Compare condition property Equal Not equal Greater than gt Less than lt Greater than or equal to gt Less than or equal to lt Inside the range lt Values lt Outside the range lt Values lt lt 8 gt Mask value This property is displayed when you ve specified Yes in the Specify the data mask property Enter a data mask value in hexadecimal so that when a data access that matches the masked data and comparison condition occurs the condition holds true lt 9 gt Difference Simulator Specify comparison data with a hexadecimal number This property is displayed when you ve specified Difference in the Compare condition property lt 10 gt Sign Simulator Specify whether or not the data to compare has a sign This property is displayed when you ve specified one of the following items in the Compare condition property Difference Greater than gt Less than lt Greater than
83. access and perform the following operation from the context menu See 2 11 6 Displaying and changing watch expressions R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 130 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS However the watch expressions you can select are only global variables static variables in function static variables in file and I O registers Note that when you have performed this operation it is interrupted as if a point trace event has been set for the selected watch expression and it is managed on the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management for details Access Type Operation Read Select Record Reading Value from Trace Output Write Select Record Writing Value from Trace Output Read write Select Record R W Value from Trace Output Remark Only the watch expressions in current scope are selectable To use any watch expression outside the current scope for a point trace event select a watch expression that has its scope specified When you ve finished setting a point trace event execute the program see 2 9 Execute Programs When the condition for the point trace event you ve set is met during program execution information on that is collected as trace data For details on how to check trace data see 2 13 5 Displaying an execution history If you want to edit the point trace event you ve set choose Event from the View menu select the event name you want
84. allocation of a load module using the PIC PID function 2 Set conditions for downloading of the load module file Specify two offset values for the application load module PIC offset which is an offset from the original address and PID offset which is an offset to be set in the PID register selected at the time the load module was created 3 Download Download the master and the application load module file see 2 5 1 Execute downloading Debugging of the code and data in the ROM allocated to new addresses is now possible R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 72 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 1 Changing the allocation of a load module using the PIC PID function An application load module file can be added to the master through the Download files property under the Download category on the Download File Settings tab in the Property panel Figure 2 76 Download Category E Download E Download files 1 CPU Reset after download Yes Download files Click on the button to open the Download Files dialog box Click on the Add button in the Download File List area of the Download Files dialog box and set up information on the application load module in the Download file property area File Specify the application load module file to be downloaded Specify the PIC PID offset Select Yes PIC offset and PID offset will appear PIC offset
85. an action into programs 151 Insert an interrupt event 153 Insert printf 151 Set PC to Here 80 Set states of events 157 Setting up a trace operation 121 Setting up the hook process 169 Software break 83 166 167 168 306 307 Source display mode 132 300 Source level debugging 60 228 Specified routine 81 Specify the PIC PID offset 73 Standard input output 172 406 Standard library function 172 Statusbar 190 Step execution 80 Step in execution 80 189 Step over execution 81 189 Stop programs 83 Stop the program at the arbitrary position break event 85 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint 83 Stop the program manually 83 Stop the program with the access to variables 87 Structure 275 281 Subjects that can be registered as watch expressions 114 Supervisor mode 82 146 T Tag jump 64 234 316 Target range for the RRM function 99 Targets that can be registered as watch expressions 281 Text Edit dialog box 327 Timer end event 143 307 Timer measurement 141 166 167 306 307 356 Timer measurement event 143 Timer start event 143 307 Trace 122 167 168 306 309 Trace end 307 Trace end event 126 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 424 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX C INDEX Trace event 125 Trace memory 121
86. and assembler symbols CPU registers I O registers Note 1 Disassemble panel C C language variables and assembler symbols CPU registers I O registers CPU Register panel CPU registersNe 2 Local Variables panel C language variables ote 1 local variables IOR panel O registersNte 2 Notes 1 C89 C99 or C language variables 2 The scope specification is automatically added to the registered watch expression R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Oct 01 2011 Page 281 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE lt 2 gt Directly register in the Watch panel Click the button on the toolbar or select Add New Watch from the context menu in the desired watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 to display an entry box for a new watch expression in the bottom of this area Directly input a watch expression from the keyboard in the Watch area in the entry box then press the Enter key The input format of the watch expression is as follows Table A 5 Input Format of Watch Expression Watch Expression Value to be Displayed Name of C C language variable 1 Value of a C C language variable Watch expression Watch expression Element of an array Watch expression Member name te 2 Member of a structure union class member Watch expression gt Member namee 2 Member of a structure union class member that is pointed to Watch expression C
87. and encodes can be selected by the button on the toolbar or the context menu item In addition a display format adding the value in hexadecimal number constantly can also be selected as well The default display format of the values is automatically decided depending on the type of the watch expression Table A 10 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default Type of Watch Expression Display Format char signed char unsigned char ASCII code with hexadecimal number short signed short short int signed short int int signed signed int long signed long long int signed long int Signed decimal number with hexadecimal number unsigned short unsigned short int unsigned unsigned int unsigned long unsigned long int Unsigned decimal number with hexadecimal number float float Complex float _Imaginary Float value when size 4 bytes double long double double Complex long double _Complex double Imaginary long double _Imaginary Double when size 8 bytes Pointers to char signed char unsigned char Characters Encoding ASCII Pointers to other than char signed char unsigned char Hexadecimal value Arrays of char signed char unsigned char types Characters Encoding ASCII bit boolean boolean Unsigned decimal value followed by a hexadecimal value written in Enumeration type R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Enumeration constant value fo
88. and operator Expression represents constants CPU register name I O register name and symbols and those connected with operators An expression comes in two types an address expression and a watch expression The expression that requires the address of a symbol is referred to as an address expression and the one that requires the value of a symbol is referred to as a watch expression a An address expression and operators With an address expression the address of a symbol is used to perform operations Only when a CPU register name is written the value of the symbol is used to perform operations The basic input formats of address expressions are as follows Table 2 29 Basic Input Format of Address Expressions Expression Description Name of a C C language variableNte 1No2 Address of a C C language variable Note 3 Expression Expression Address of an array Note 4 Expression Member name Address of a structure union class member Note 4 Expression gt Member name Address of a structure union class member that is pointed to Watch expression Cast expression Address of the pointer to a member variable Watch expression gt Cast expression Address of the pointer to a member variable Name of a CPU register Value of the CPU register Name of an I O register Address of the I O register Note 5 Label name te 5 EQU symbol name and immediate value address Address of a label a value of
89. and the set interrupt event is managed in the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management 2 Execute the program Execute the program see 2 9 Execute Programs When the program is executed the interrupt request will occur immediately before the execution of the instruction at which the interrupt event has been set Once the interrupt request is accepted by the CPU interrupt exception will take place R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 154 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Cautions 1 Once the generated interrupt request is accepted and interrupt exception executed the interrupt request will be cleared 2 Ifan interrupt request is made by another event while the generated interrupt request is being reserved one with higher interrupt priority will be valid 3 Edit interrupt event You can edit an interrupt event which has already been set When editing click the target interrupt event in the Events panel and select Edit the conditions from the context menu This will open the Detailed Settings of Interrupt Events dialog box Simulator in which you can edit the items When finished click OK a Edit Number of passages Directly enter a value between 1 and 16383 The event will be encountered when the event conditions meeting the number of specified passages are satisfied b Edit Interrupt You can edit an interrupt vector and the priority order The procedure for editing is the sam
90. any clock setting outside the guaranteed range of microcontroller operation will be modified by E20 to be in accord with the specified limits for reprogramming internal flash memory c Connection with Emulator You can configure the connection between E20 and a host machine in this category Caution You cannot change the property in this category while connected to E20 Figure 2 28 Connection with Emulator Category E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E20 XX XXXKKKK lt 1 gt Emulator serial No Serial numbers of all connected E20 emulators are displayed in the drop down list Select the one to be connected to the target system The drop down list is updated every time it is used d Connection with Target Board You can configure the connection between E20 and the target board in this category Figure 2 29 Connection with Target Board Category E20 Serial E Connection with T arget Board FINE baud rate bps 2000000 Figure 2 30 Connection with Target Board Category E20 JTAG E Connection with T arget Board JTAG clock MHz 16 5 lt 1 gt Power target from the emulator MAX 200mA No is displayed as the property value E20 does not support power supply function lt 2 gt Communications method Displays the method of communication used by the E20 emulator for communicating with the microcontroller on the target system Specifying RX E20 Serial for a debug tool in the Project Tree pane
91. area This property displays only the number of memory areas Expanding Memory mapping property will display the following sub items Memory type Indicates the memory type of the corresponding area Each memory type corresponds to the following areas On chip ROM area Program ROM and data flash On chip RAM area Internal RAM R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 32 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS On chip ROM area Program ROM and data flash I O registers area Peripheral I O register Divided into areas with different endians for display External area CS7 CS6 CS0 External address space CS0 to CS7 are displayed separately Reserved area FCU RAM FCU firm user boot Other memory area Areas other than those listed above Start address Displays the start address of the corresponding area End address Displays the end address of the corresponding area Access width bits Displays the address width of the corresponding area When Memory type is an external area the access width can only be changed when the debug tool is disconnected Endian Displays the endians of the external area and the I O register area When Memory type is an external area the endian can only be changed when the debug tool is disconnected Caution Connecting to a debug tool see 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite will display details for each memory type lt 2 gt V
92. as character string s If there is no selection the entire line is copied Inserts insert mode or overwrites overwrite mode the characters that are copied on the clip board into the caret position When the contents of the clipboard are not recognized as characters the operation is invalid The mode selected for the current source file is displayed on the status bar see b Focus panel status information Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Quick Find tab selected Go To Opens the Go to Line dialog box to move the caret to the specified line Forward To Next Cursor Position Forwards to the position before operating Back To Last Cursor Position Back To Last Cursor Position Goes back to the position before operating Jump to Function Go to Here Executes the program from the address indicated by the current PC value to the address corresponding to the line at the caret positionNote 7 If the corresponding address of the line at the caret position does not exist the program is executed to the corresponding address of the lower valid line Note that this item becomes invalid during execution of a program Build amp Download Set PC to Here Sets the address of the line at the current caret position to the current PC valueN 1 Note that this item becomes invalid when no corresponding address exists in the line at caret or during exe
93. as character string to the clipboard Show Module File Name Adds a module file name to the line when it is displayed default Show Parameter Adds function call parameters to the line when it is displayed default Notation Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the form in which values are displayed AutoSelect Displays values on this panel in per variable predetermined notation default Hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal Decimal Displays values on this panel in decimal Octal Displays values on this panel in octal Binary Displays values on this panel in binary Encoding Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the encode in which values are displayed ASCII Displays string variables in ASCII code default Shift_JIS Displays string variables in Shift_JIS code EUC JP Displays string variables in EUC JP code UTF 8 Displays string variables in UTF 8 code UTF 16 Displays string variables in UTF 16 code Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 with the caret on it moved to the address from which the function indicated by a selected line is called Jump to Disassemble Jump to Source Opens the Editor panel with the caret on it moved to the source line from which the function indicated by a selected line is called Jump to Local Variable at This Time Opens t
94. be referenced to the project folder or select a file in the External flash memory dialog box E1 E20 that is opened by clicking the button which is disp layed at the right edge in the setup column of this property when it is selected R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 57 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS To delete registration of a USD file move the caret to the file name on the relevant File property and then click the Delete key For more information on USD files visit Renesas website and see the user s manual for the External Flash Memory Editor Figure 2 62 Opening the External flash memory Dialog Box E External Flash El External flash definition file 4 E 0 E WorkSpace USD ExFlashl USD E WorkSpace USD ExFlash1_USD C 1 2 3 Caution The endian information in USD files is not reflected on the Memory mappings property in the Memory category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab Therefore the endian in the external area to which they are downloaded should be changed to suit the endian information in USD files b Setting the CPU operation mode For files to be downloaded to external flash memory it is necessary to set the microcontroller s operation mode when connecting with the debug tool To do this change the Register setting property in the Operating Modes of CPU E1 E20 category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Sett
95. buttons How to open On the Hook Transaction Settings tab of the Property panel click the button displayed by selecting one of the property in the Hook Transaction Settings category Description of each area 1 Text area Input modify character strings in this area Function buttons Button Function OK Sets the input character strings to the caller panel dialog box and closes this dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 327 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Action Events dialog box You can set action events in this dialog box see 2 16 Set an Action into Programs This dialog box can be opened only when you are connected to the debug tool Caution Also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on action event settings e g limits on the number of enabled evenis Figure A 42 Action Events Dialog Box Action Events Printf event Interrupt Event Setting Output string Example S ample Variable expression Example aaa bbb ccc Address C Test Example for Output panel Sample aaa 10 bbb 20 ccc 30 Function buttons Cancel This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Editor panel move the caret to
96. byte or 2 byte I O registers differ in timing with which values are retrieved Therefore while a value from the same I O register is being displayed it is possible that the displayed value is different Remark The values are sorted in ascending order of numeric value by clicking the header part of this area This area has the following features R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 270 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Alteration of I O register values When changing I O register values select the target I O register value and then click it again to edit it directly from the keyboard Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode After editing an I O register value hit the Enter key or move the focus to other than the edit area The edited value is written into the debug tool s target memory For details on how to edit I O register values see 4 Changing the contents of O registers b Saving of I O register values Choosing Save IOR Data As from the File menu opens the Save As dialog box making it possible to save all content of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv For details on how to save I O register values see 6 Saving the displayed I O register contents 4 Type Byte Size area This area displays the type information of each I O register in the form shown below lt Type of I O register gt lt Access attribute gt lt All accessible siz
97. converting the count value to time Directly enter a number between 0 0001 and 999 999 MHz to specify the operating frequency When operating frequency is not specified a count value will be displayed 3 Download File Settings tab You can configure downloading to the debug tool in Download File Settings tab For the details of settings in each category see 2 5 1 Execute downloading 4 Hook Transaction Settings tab In the Hook Transaction Settings tab you can configure hook transaction for the debug tool See 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process for details on hook transaction and the settings in each category R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 25 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 3 E20 Configure the operating environment on the Property panel below when using E20 Note that the contents of the Property panel differ depending on the communication method FINE communications E20 Serial or JTAG communications E20 JTAG between E20 and the target system R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Figure 2 23 Property Panel E20 Serial Property Sl AX E20 Serial Property EH of internal ROM KBytes Size of internal RAM KBytes Size of DataFlash memory KBytes E Clock Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No Connection with T arget Board Power targ
98. currently selected microcontroller does not incorporate the data flash 0 is displayed You cannot change the value of this property b Clock You can configure the clock in this category Caution You cannot change the property in this category while connected to E1 Figure 2 9 Clock Category HOCO E Clock Main clock source HOCO Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory No Figure 2 10 Clock Category EXTAL E Clock Main clock source EXTAL Main clock frequency MHz 12 5000 Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory No lt 1 gt Main clock source Select EXTAL frequency or internal HOCO as the main clock source EXTAL will be displayed for microcontrollers with no internal HOCO lt 2 gt Main clock frequency MHz Specify the main clock frequency before multiplier Specify EXTAL frequency by directly entering a number between 0 0001 and 99 9999 MHz The entered value will be truncated to 5 decimal places If the value is out of the specifiable range it will be rounded to 0 0001 when 0 or below or to 99 9999 when 100 or above This property is displayed only when you have selected EXTAL in the Main clock source property R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 17 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 3 gt Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory Specify whether to allow a debugger to oper
99. data Specify the range of memory to save via the start and end addresses Ranges can be entered as base 16 numbers or as address expressions Note These are the numbers shown in the Number area of the Trace panel Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function Function buttons Button Function Save Saves the data to a file with the specified filename in the specified format Cancel Cancels the save and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 381 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Progress Status dialog box When CubeSuite is performing a process that takes time it displays the progress of the process This dialog box closes automatically when the process under execution is finished Figure A 66 Progress Status Dialog Box Progress Status Loading project 2 5 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL Function button 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function button How to open Automatically displayed when a message is generated while a time consuming process is underway Description of each area 1 Message display area Displays a message generated during a process not editable
100. depending on the specification of 1 Configure types movements of breakpoints to use E1 E20 by following the step below R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 84 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Operation Operation2 Hardware breakpoint Ctrl mouse click Select Break Settings gt gt Set Hardware Break from the context menu Software breakpoint Shift mouse click Select Break Settings gt gt Set Software Break from the context menu Caution Operation 1 is enabled only in the Disassemble panel 3 Edit a hardware breakpoint When editing a break point you have set first open the Evenis panel by selecting View menu gt gt Event After selecting the target hardware break point on the Event panel click Edit the conditions in the Context menu This will open a dialog box in which you can edit the selected hardware break point For details on editing in the dialog box see 1 Editing execution related events 4 Delete a breakpoint Click event marks displayed in the Editor panel Disassemble panel to delete set breakpoints the event mark will be erased You can also delete a break point on the Events panel which opens by selecting View menu gt gt Event After selecting the target breakpoint on the panel click x in the tool bar to delete it see 2 17 5 Deleting events for details 2 10 3 Stop the program at the arbitrary position break event E
101. displayed in decimal 16 bits you edit the displayed value 32767 by entering a space in the middle of it like 32 67 then numerals 3 and 2 change to spaces and the altered value becomes 67 4 When the same value is entered Even when you enter the same value as the current memory value the specified value is written into memory 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution The Memory panel and Watch panel come with a realtime display update function that permits you to update display of or even rewrite the contents of memory or watch expressions in real time By enabling this realtime display update function it is possible to display or change the values of memory or watch expressions even while the program is running not just when the program is halted Cautions 1 E20 JTAG RX600 Series The trace function and the realtime RAM monitor function RRM function in part are usable exclusively of each other Therefore before making the settings below you must finish the following settings on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel in order to specify the function to be used preferentially Trace category gt gt Usage of trace function properties gt gt Realtime RAM Monitor 2 E20 JTAG RX600 Series If a reset such as a pin reset or watchdog timer reset is issued while a user program is running the results of the real time RAM monitor cannot be guaranteed values displayed may be in
102. displays it in the default notation Include Hexadecimal Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value Value R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 267 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE IOR panel This panel displays the contents of I O registers and changes their values see Section 2 11 3 Displaying and changing the I O registers Note that this panel can only be opened when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Caution The I O registers that get the microcontroller actuated by a read operation are protected against reads so that no values are read from those registers Value marked with To obtain the contents of the I O registers protected against reads select Forcibly Load Values from the context menu Remark By double clicking a line delimiting each area on panel it is possible to change the relevant area to the smallest displayable width without omitting the content in it Figure A 29 IOR Panel Toolbar 4 2 I X Notation 0 4 TAE Value Type Byte Size Address A 0x0000 IOR Z 0x00088040 E 0x0000 IOR Z 0x00088042 Ox0000 IOR 2 0x00088044 0x0000 IOR 2 0x00088046 0x00 IOR 1 0x00088050 ADCSR ADIE 0x0 IOR lbits 0x00088050 6 ADCSR ADST 0x0 IOR lbits 0x00088050 5 ADCSR CH 0x0 IOR 4bits 0x00088050 0 ADCR 0x00 IOR 1 0x00088051 ADCR TRGS IOR 3bits Ox00088051 5 a
103. drop down list change Specifiable Yes One 64 bit measurement counter is used value No Two 32 bit measurement counters are used R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 219 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Operating Specify the operating clock frequency that is referenced when count values are converted into time frequency MHz Default Blank How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable 0 0001 to 999 999 in MHz value 7 Coverage Simulator The detailed information on coverage functions is displayed and its configuration can be changed Use coverage function Specify whether to use the coverage function Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes Use coverage functions value No Does not use coverage functions Reuse coverage result Specify whether to load save the coverage measurement result when connecting to or disconnecting from the debug tool This property appears only when the Use coverage function property is set to Yes Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes Loads saves the coverage measurement result value No Does not load save the coverage measurement result 8 Stream I O Simulator Use stream I O Specify whe
104. each area Function buttons How to open While focus is on the Disassemble panel choose Save Disassemble Data As from the File menu While focus is on the Memory panel choose Save Memory Data As from the File menu While focus is on the Trace panel choose Save Trace Data As from the File menu Choose Upload from the Debug menu Description of each area 1 File Name area Specify a file name under which you want to save the data Enter a name directly in the text box specifiable in up to 259 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries It is also possible to select a file from the Select Data Save File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button If you specify only a file name with no path information attached the project folder is assumed 2 File Type area Select the file format in which to save the data from the drop down list below The selectable file format is determined by the type of data you are saving a When saving the displayed content of a panel Text files txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV formatNote R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 380 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note The data is saved with entries separated by commas If the data contains commas each entry is surrounded by double quotes
105. each area in this panel is double clicked the width of the area changes to the shortest possible size that can display the contents of the area Figure A 31 Watch Panel Watch Toolbar 3 E EX Notation Watch Value Type Byte Size Address Memo E ADO ADDPR IOR 0x00 IOR 1 0x00088052 l Ox00000001 int i4 R6 REG 0x0000000E General Registersi4 0x00000007 General Registers 4 O0x00001700 General Registers 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu Watch panel dedicated items Edit menu Watch panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Watch gt gt Watch 4 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 279 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Watch area All the registered watch expressions are displayed in a list Clicking the title of the list in this area sorts the watch expressions in the list in alphabetical order Categories folders can be created to categorize the watch expressions and display them in the tree view see a Tree editing The meanings of the icons are as follows Indicates that the watch expression belonging to this category is displayed When you double click on the icon or click on the mark the category is closed and the watch expression is hidden Indicates that the w
106. expression Value of a pointer variable amp Variable expression Location address Type name Variable expression Value cast into a specified type Name of the CPU register Value of the CPU register IOR name IOR value Label name Note 3 EQU symbol name N and immediate value Notes 1 C89 C99 or C language variable Values of a label an EQU symbol and immediate address 2 When using a member variable of a base class specify the scope before the member name e g variable BaseClass member 3 Ifthe label name or EQU symbol name includes a be sure to enclose the name in Example Label Any imaginary number must be multiplied by an uppercase I e g 1 0 2 0 1 When you specify the CPU register name I add REG e g I REG to distinguish it from the keyword I Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 331 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Address area Specify the address at which to set the Printf event You can either type address expressions directly into the text boxes up to 1024 characters or select them from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items By default address of the presently specifie
107. file By enabling this function it is possible to edit source files and build the project at the same time When using this function we recommend that you save frequently after editing the source file R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 390 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Observe registered files changing Monitor the source files registered in the project for any changes and start a rapid build when the files are edited and saved by an external editor etc Do not monitor the source files registered in the project for any changes Do not start a rapid build when the files are edited and saved by an external editor etc default Remark This feature is enabled only when the Enable Rapid Build checkbox is checked Caution In case any nonexistent source file one grayed out in the project tree is registered in the project checking this box will not start the monitoring even when the said file is registered again by the Explorer etc To activate the monitoring mode you need to either reload the project file or check this box again after unchecking it and closing this dialog box 3 Enable Break Sound Beep when program execution is halted by a break event hardware or software break Do not beep when program execution is halted by a break event hardware or software break default 4 Observe downloaded load module files changing Monitor the load mo
108. for only the Watch panel Watch 1 b To register directly on watch panel In any Watch panel watch 1 through watch 4 click the toolbar button and the entry box shown below will be displayed in the Watch area Figure 2 114 Entry Box for Watch Expressions Watch Value Type Byte Size Address E R3 REG Ox00000000 General Registersi 4 a R4 REG Ox0000O0O0O0O General Registers 4 af Enter a watch expression directly in this area Enter a watch expression in the entry box directly from the keyboard and then hit the Enter key For the input forms of watch expressions entered this way see the tables listed below Table A 5 Input Format of Watch Expression Table A 7 Scope Specification of C C Language Variable Used with Watch Expression Registration Table A 8 Scope Specification of CPU Register with Watch Expression Registration Table A 9 Scope Specification of I O register with Watch Expression Registration Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 115 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c To register from other applications Select a C variable CPU register I O register or assembler symbol character string from an external editor or the like and then drag and drop it directly onto the Watch
109. from other panels Watch expressions can be registered from other panels of CubeSuite In one of other panels select the subject you want to register as a watch expression and drag and drop it directly onto any watch panel watch 1 through watch 4 Note that there is certain relationship between the panels that accept this operation and the subjects that can be registered as watch expressions For details see Table A 4 Relationship between Panels and Targets That Can be Registered as Watch Expressions R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 114 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 113 Example for Registering Watch Expressions from Other Panels Here the variable g_IntBuf on editor panel is Disassemble1 1 registered as a watch expression a ALBE BF view 9 P 33 while gap gt O After selecting the variable g_IntBuf on editor panel frrroest 6106 drag and drop it directly onto the watch panel ffff8661 2a94 g_CharBuf ck r PRSA c Ox00FF Watch k AN E Watch alue Type Byte Size Addr 0x00001 g_IntBuf Remark There is an alternative way to register watch expressions Select the subject you want to register as a watch expression or move the caret to one of the subject character strings the subject being automatically determined then select Register In Watch 1 from the context menu However this method is usable
110. function By setting up hook transaction it is possible to automatically change the I O register and CPU register values before or after downloading a load module or after resetting the CPU You can configure hook transaction in the Hook Transaction Settings category of the Hook Transaction Settings tab on the Property panel Remark You can increase the download speed by configuring the I O register in the Before download property Equally you can facilitate downloading to external RAM by the setting in this category Figure 2 149 Hook Transaction Settings Category E Hook Transaction Settings Before download Before download 0 After download After download 0 After GPU reset under breaking After CPU reset under breakine 0 Before running Before running 0 After breaking After breaking 0 Table 2 25 Properties of the Hook Transaction Settings Category Properties Timing Before download Performs a specified process immediately before load module files are downloaded After download Performs a specified process immediately after load module files are downloaded After CPU reset under breaking Performs a specified process immediately after the CPU is reset Before running Performs a specified process immediately before program execution starts After breaking Performs a specified process immediately after program execution breaks Each property in the Hook Transaction Settings category shows the
111. global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable l O register see 1 Seta break event access type to a variable I O register Set Combination Break E1 E20 Sets a break at the caret position s address or the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or I O register as the condition for a combination break event see 1 Set a beak event execution type Set Read Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a break event by a read access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or I O register as the condition for a combination break see 1 Set a break event access type to a variable I O register Set Write Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a break event by a write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or I O register as the condition for a combination break see 1 Set a break event access type to a variable I O register Set R W Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a break event by a read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or I O register as the condition for a combination break see 1 Set a break event access type to a variable I O registe
112. has been opened the detailed information on the debug tool is displayed by selecting the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node on the Project Tree panel Description of each area 1 Selected node area In this area the name of the selected debug tool on the Project Tree panel is displayed R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 196 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Detailed information display change area In this area the detailed information on the debug tool that is selected in the Project Tree panel is displayed by category in the list Also you can directly change its settings The H mark is indicates all the items in the category are expanded The mark indicates all the items are shrink You can expand shrink the items by clicking these marks or double clicking the category name Note that only the hexadecimal number is allowed in the text box if the mark is displayed in the property configuration area For details on the information how to setup in the category and property items contained in it see the section explaining the corresponding tab 3 Property description area In this area brief description of the categories and properties selected in the detailed information display change area is displayed 4 Tab selection area Categories for the display of the detailed information are changed when each tab is selected In this panel following tabs are containe
113. in the project are automatically determined te to be the download files However the files to be downloaded and the download conditions can be manually changed In this case see 2 5 2 An applied method of download Note To download the load module files created by an external build tool e g compilers and assemblers other than the build tools supplied with CubeSuite a debug only project needs to be created If you use a debug only project as the subject to debug add your download files to the download file node on project tree The files to be downloaded will be reflected in this property 2tENESAS Page 47 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS For details on how to use external build tools and details about debug only projects see the separate edition CubeSuite Start b CPU Reset after download Specify from the drop down list whether or not to reset the CPU after a download is completed To reset the CPU select Yes default c Erase flash ROM before download Specify from the drop down list whether or not to erase the flash ROM before a download is executed To erase the flash ROM select Yes By default No is selected d Automatic change method of event setting position If as debug work proceeds a program which has had changes added is downloaded again the position address at which a currently set event is set may happen to be in the middle of an instruction In
114. in which values are displayed 1 2 Jumping to the source line 3 Displaying local variables 4 Saving the displayed contents of call stack information 1 Changing the form in which values are displayed The form in which values on this panel are displayed can be freely changed using the toolbar buttons shown below However this feature is disabled during program execution R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 119 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays values on this panel in per variable predetermined notation default Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in decimal Displays values on this panel in octal Displays values on this panel in binary Shows the following buttons that change the encode in which string variables are displayed el Oct ed coding Asc Displays string variables on this panel in ASCII code default Displays string variables on this panel in Shift_JIS code Displays string variables on this panel in EUC JP code Displays string variables on this panel in UTF 8 code Displays string variables on this panel in UTF 16 code 2 Jumping to the source line Double clicking on a line will open the Editor panel with the caret moved to the function call source line indicated by the se
115. information Current PC 0x current PC value source name number of lines However this status is hidden when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Note If this information cannot be obtained it is substituted for by symbol name offset value Remark In execution message is displayed while the program is running When the real time display update function is enabled the PC position is updated and displayed at the set interval f Connection status with the debug tool Shows the current status of connection with the debug tool using the following icons and character strings Connection Status Displayed content Currently connected 5 Debug tool name Currently disconnected au Not connected g Run Break timer result Displays the results of measurements by the Run Break timer see Section 2 14 2 Measuring execution time from start to stop The display unit is determined by the measurement results However this status is hidden when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Status Displayed content No measurements mode Not measured Measurement in progress Measurement in progress When overflowed OVERFLOW h Debug tool status Displays the current status of each function of the debug tool using the following icons When a function is not in operation you can enable disable it by clicking the corresponding icon However this status is hidden when CubeSuite is disconnected fr
116. is divided into the following types 1 Step in function Step in execution 2 Step over function Step over execution 3 Execute until return is completed Return out execution Cautions 1 Break points break events and Printf events that have been set do not occur during step execution 2 E1 E20 Interrupts are not acknowledged during step execution Simulator You may jump to a interrupt handler during step execution 1 Step in function Step in execution When the function is called the program is stopped at the top of the called function Click the button on the debug toolbar to perform Step in execution Cautions 1 Step in execution cannot be performed for a function that has no debug information 2 If Step in execution is performed for the longjmp function program execution may not complete and may wait for a time out R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 80 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Step over function Step over execution In the case of a function call by a jump to subroutine instruction all the source lines instructions in the function are treated as one step and the program will be executed until reaching the position to which it returns from the function step execution will continue until the same nest is formed as when a jump to subroutine instruction has been executed Click the button on the debug toolbar to perform Step over execution In the case of ot
117. list Available values Signed Data is compared with the sign included Unsigned Data is compared with no sign included Notes 1 For Inverse sign and Difference since comparison is made with the previous data the condition never holds true after a reset and in the first determination of whether condition is true 2 The address value to be used as the condition is masked bit wise with a mask value for which 0 is specified Function buttons Buttons Functions OK Applies the detailed settings made in this dialog box to the access related events before closing the dialog box Cancel Nullifies settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 371 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Detailed Settings of Interrupt Events dialog box Simulator This dialog displays or changes detailed information on an interrupt event selected on the Events panel Figure A 60 Detailed Settings of Interrupt Events Dialog Box Simulator Toolbar F 4 CH E M ddress E iPass Count Pass count E Interrupt Interrupt vector Priority Address 2 4 Displays the address where the event is set Function buttons 4 i This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar Description of each category Function buttons How to
118. lt data lt Compare data2 Outside the range lt Values lt True when data is outside the range of specified value data lt Compare data1 Compare data2 lt data No conditions Compare data is not specified R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 RENESAS Page 369 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Compare data1 Specify compare data in hexadecimal This property is displayed when one of the following is specified in Compare condition property Equal Not equal Greater than gt Less than lt Greater than or equal to gt Less than or equal to lt Inside the range lt Values lt Outside the range lt Values lt Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Compare data2 Specify compare data in hexadecimal This property is displayed when one of the following is specified in Compare condition property Inside the range lt Values lt Outside the range lt Values lt Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Difference Specify compare data in hexadecimal This property is displayed when Difference is specified in Compare condition property Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the
119. managed in the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management for details Table 2 5 Event Marks of the Breakpoint Event Type Event Mark Software Break E1 E20 Hardware Break Figure 2 87 Breakpoint Setting Example Event area Indicates that a software Le chi Ide gt fri UUUUUST Z breakpoint has been set fy 4 O00003f ta lel E E 00O0003f8 c 0002 o00003fa Eem breakpoint has been set J Cautions 1 Since a breakpoint is set as a break event and managed as an event restrictions apply to the number of breakpoints that can be simultaneously set Also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on breakpoints e g limits on the number of valid events 2 Breakpoints cannot be set to lines with no address indication 3 E1 E20 Software breakpoints replace the instructions at the corresponding addresses They cannot be specified in the area other than the internal ROM area and internal RAM area Remarks 1 Event marks differ depending on the event state see 2 17 1 Changing states of setting Enabled Disabled When an event is set at a point for which another event is already set the event mark FS is displayed to indicate that more than one event is set at the point 2 Simulator The type of breakpoint that can be set is locked to hardware breakpoints 3 E1 E20 You can set hardware breakpoints software breakpoints without
120. menu Also it is possible to select a display form where hexadecimal display is always added The meaning of marks displayed as values of local variables and their colors are as follows The colors in which text and backgrounds are displayed depend on how the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box is set Example display default Description Text color Blue Local variable values that have been changed by the user Press Enter to write them to the target memory Background color Standard color Text color Brown Local variable values that have been changed due to program execution Note Background color Cream Executing the program again will reset the highlighting color Text color Gray Local variable values that could not be acquired Background color Standard color Note Applicable only to cases where the displayed variable names remained same from the program start point to the break point while their values were changed This area has the following features a Alteration of local variable and parameter values To change a local variable value and parameter value select the local variable value to be changed first and after clicking it again enter directly new values from the keyboard Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode The edited local variable values and parameter values are written into the debug tool s target memory by pressing the Enter key or moving t
121. method JTAG JTAG clock MHz 16 5 Input Mode of ID code Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal ID code F FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Work RAM start address es 1000 Work RAM size bytes 1024 7 fE Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Single chip mode Register setting Single chip mode Endian Little endian data 8 p E External Flash External flash definition file Internal ROM RAM Figure A 9 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab Simulator Property S AX Simulator Property 1 p Internal ROM RAM 1032 64 Little endian data System clock ICLK frequency MHz 50 9 gt E Peripheral Function Simulation Peripheral function simulation module Peripheral clock rate Size of internal ROM KB ytes Displays the size of the internal ROM Download File sett Hook Transaction 7 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 201 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each category 1 Internal ROM RAM Displays detailed information on internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM Kbytes Displays the int ernal ROM size of a selected microcontroller Default For products with internal ROM Internal ROM size of a selected microcontroller For RODROP DOWNIM less products 0 How to change Not changeable Size of internal RAM Kbytes Displays the int ernal RAM size of a selected microcont
122. methods of operation are described here Changing the display mode 1 2 Changing the display form 3 Moving to a specified address 4 5 N Moving to a symbol definition part Saving the displayed contents of disassembled results 1 Changing the display mode Disassembled results are displayed by default in the mixed display mode a mixed display of disassembled text and source text By clicking the toolbar button toggle you can choose to show or not show the source text R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 66 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 72 Example Display Where Source Text is Hidden Disassemblel H H Hh NM J J Fh H Fh Hh nin tm fe Fh Fh Fh Fh co J n Fh Fh Fh Fh co Le J wi z2zefd _tutorial 6e68 710008 b7204100000 ef 71 05670000 _main R6 R8 28H RO 0000100 R7 R1 _init efo6 05250100 7e21 RO R6 _rand 2 Changing the display form The form in which disassembled results are displayed can be changed freely by using the toolbar buttons shown below Shows the following buttons that change the display form Displays the offset values of labels If the address has no labels defined an offset value from the closest label is displayed Displays address values in the form symbol offset value default However if the address value has a symbol defined
123. number of valid events R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 85 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 88 Example of Setting a Break Event Execution type on a Line in the Disassemble Text E1 E20 Disassemble1 View gt for i 0 i lt 10 i Mov L 04H RS RO R6 66a8 ot 7 JE Register to Watch1 efi 054 J Register Action Event _rand 7e2 Y Goto Here Ri fag o Set PC to Here Ri R6 601 1H RS SAAN 211 gt coron Ctri G _tutorial 15H sort 28 Go to Symbol SL pa chane Break Settings Wh Set Hardware Break RARAS Trace Settings gt lh Set Software Break ty Edit Disassemble ah Set Read Combination Break to EM Edit Code A Set Write Combination Break to View gt wit Set R W Combination Break to Mixed Display T Break Option E4 Jump to Source Figure 2 89 Example of Setting a Break Event Execution type in the Event Panel E1 E20 Events Detail Comment 9 Unconditional Trace Run Break Timer Not measured wa Combination Break OR il 2 Edit a break event execution type When editing a break event execution type you have set first open the Events panel by selecting View menu gt gt Event After selecting after execution break displayed in the detailed information on the combined break in the Event panel click Edit Condition in the Context menu This will open a dia
124. of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE After you edit the value of the watch expression it is written to the target memory of the debug tool by pressing the Enter key or moving the focus to outside the edit region See 6 Changing the contents of watch expressions for detail on how to change values of watch expressions c Saving the contents of watch expressions By selecting the File menu gt gt Save Watch Data As the Save As dialog box can be opened and all the contents of this panel can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv See 8 Saving the displayed contents of watch expressions for details on the method for saving the contents of watch expressions 3 Type Byte Size area The type information of watch expressions with the following format is displayed Watch Expression Display Format Single CPU register lt Types of CPU register gt lt SizeN 1 gt Single I O register lt l O register type gt lt Access attribute gt lt Access type gt lt SizeNe 1 gt Access attribute R Read only W Write only R W Read Write only Access type 1 Bit accessible 8 Byte accessible 16 Half word accessible 32 Word accessible Unknown 2 Others lt Watch expression type that follow the C compiler s determinationN gt lt SizeN 1 gt Notes 1 The size of the watch expression is displayed in bytes However for bit I O reg
125. of each area 1 Preview area This window displays a form showing a preview of how and what is printed Toolbar Opens the Print dialog box provided by Windows to print the current Editor panel as shown by the print preview form ie Copies the selection into the clipboard Increases the size of the content Decreases the size of the content Displays the preview at 100 percent zoom default Fits the preview to the width of this window Displays the whole page Zz E E EE Displays facing pages R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 400 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Increase Zoom Increases the size of the content Decrease Zoom Decreases the size of the content R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 401 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save As dialog box Saves the file being edited under a new name or saves the content of any panel in a file with a specified name Figure A 77 Save As Dialog Box Save in sample A EG My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer v Dam My Network pionne Save Save as type C source file c K Function buttons Here the following items are explained How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open While focus is present on Editor p
126. of the program execution and stops the measurement with stop of the program execution This event cannot be deleted because of the built in event 2 this event is Enabled by default gt See 2 14 2 Measuring execution time from start to stop Starts stops collecting the trace data when the condition specified with Trace start and Trace end is met this event is displayed when a Start Tracing event or a Stop Tracing event is set gt See 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section Timer ResultNotes E1 E20 Starts stops measuring the execution time of a program when the condition specified with Timer start and Timer end is met this event is displayed when a Start Timer event or a Stop Timer event is set gt See 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section E1 E20 Point Trace Records the information as the trace data when accessing the specified variable or I O register during execution of a program gt See 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met Printf Executes printf command in software processing after temporary stopping a program in execution at an arbitrary position action event gt See 2 16 1 Insert printf Interrupt Simulator R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 This event generates an interrupt at any place during program execution action event gt See 2 16 2 Insert an interrupt event Simulator
127. on the mark the category is opened and the register name is displayed R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 262 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Indicates the name of the register When you double click on the icon or click on the or marks the name of the register part is displayed or hidden Indicates the name of the register part Category names and register names displayed are as follows number of marks before register names indicates the depth of the display level Table A 2 Register Names in General Registers Category RX Register Name Alias Bit Width Register Name Alias Bit Width 32 32 R8 32 R9 32 R10 32 R11 32 32 32 32 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 263 of 429 Oct 01 2011 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Table A 3 Register Names in System Registers Category RX Register Name Bit Width ISP FPSwNote 2 Register Name Bit Width USP FS INTB FX PC FU PSW FZ IPL FO PM FV U EX EU O EZ S EO Z EV C DN BPC CE BPSW CX FINTV CU CZ
128. on this panel in hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in decimal Displays values on this panel in octal Displays values on this panel in binary Displays array indexes on this panel in decimal default Displays array indexes on this panel in hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in Float Note that non 4 byte data and data with type information are displayed in default notation Displays values on this panel in Double Note that non 8 byte data and data with type information are displayed in default notation Ez Adds the hexadecimal equivalent in bracket at the end of the value Encoding Shows the following buttons that change the encode in which string variables are displayed Displays string variables in ASCII code default Displays string variables in Shift_JIS code Displays string variables in EUC JP code Displays string variables in UTF 8 code Displays string variables in UTF 16 code File menu Local Variable Panel Only Items The File menu items listed below are provided exclusively on the Local Variables panel Other menu items are shared with other panels However all of these items are disabled during program execution Save Local Variables Overwrites the last saved text file txt or CSV file csv with the contents of this panel see b Data Saving of local variable values If you se
129. operation as Save Memory Data As will be performed Save Memory Data As Opens the Data Save dialog box in order to save memory to a specified text file txt or CSV file csv see g Save memory values Edit menu Memory panel Only Items The Edit menu used exclusively for the memory panel is as follows All other items are disabled However all of these items are disabled during program execution Copies a selected range as character string to the clipboard Pastes the copied character string from the clipboard to the caret position To paste in the memory value area see e Copy and paste To paste in the character string area see b Copying and pasting Opens the Memory Search dialog box A search is performed within the Memory value area or the Character string area whichever has the caret in it Context Menu Register to Watch1 Registers the symbol at the caret position on the Watch panel Watch1 When symbols are registered as watch expressions they are registered as variable names Because of this displayed symbol names vary by scope However if the address corresponding to the memory value at the caret position has no symbols defined this menu is disabled see f Register watch expressions Opens the Memory Search dialog box A search is performed within the Memory value area or Character string area whichever has the caret in it However this men
130. operation listed below from the context menu after selecting an arbitrary variable or I O register in the source text disassembled text Note however that only global variables static variables inside functions and file internal static variables can be used By performing the following operation it is interpreted as if a Break event access type has been set at the target variable I O register and it is managed in the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management for details R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 87 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Access Type Operation E1 E20 Select Break Settings gt gt Set Read Combination Break to and then press the Enter key Simulator Select Break Settings gt gt Set Read Break to and then press the Enter key If you have specified a value in the text box in the menu break will occur only when the specified value is used for the reading On the other hand if no value is specified reading the selected variable by any value will cause the break to occur E1 E20 Select Break Settings gt gt Set Write Combination Break to and then press the Enter key Simulator Select Break Settings gt gt Set Write Break to and then press the Enter key If you have specified a value in the text box in the menu break will occur only when the specified value is used for the writing On the other hand if no value is specified wri
131. or trace end event you ve set right click the event mark in the event area and select Delete Event from the context menu that is displayed R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 129 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Also there is another way to delete a set event Choose Event from the View menu select the trace event you want to delete on the Events panel that is opened and then click the button in the toolbar See 2 17 5 Deleting events Caution If either a trace start or trace end event is deleted from the event marks on the event area all of the corresponding event marks are deleted 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met It is possible to collect an execution history of the program only when some conditions are met 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred In cases where a point trace event is set when and only when a specified access is made to any variable or I O register information on that is collected as trace data Follow the procedure described below to set a point trace event Cautions 1 Regarding settings of point trace events e g limitations on the number of valid events also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting 2 Simulator For string manipulating and multiply and accumulate instructions only the last data access is the subject to be checked for event Remarks 1 Accesses by DMAC Direct Memory A
132. padded with zeroes If the numeral entered for a variable is larger than the size of the variable its high order digits are masked For character arrays char type or unsigned char type if ASCII is selected for the display form it is possible to use character strings ASCII Shift_JIS EUC JP or Unicode FTF 8 UTF 16 to enter values Watch expressions can also be entered using ASCII characters When using ASCII characters to enter values Enter the letter A in the Value area of the variable ch gt gt The numeral 0x41 is written into the memory area to which the variable ch is mapped When using numerals to enter values Enter the numeral 0x41 in the Value area of the variable ch gt gt The numeral 0x41 is written into the memory area to which the variable ch is mapped When using character strings ASCII to enter values R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 117 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 7 8 Set the display form of the character array str to ASCII and enter the letters ABC in the Value area gt gt The numerals 0x41 0x42 0x43 and 0x00 are written into the memory area to which the array str is mapped Displaying and changing the contents of watch expressions during program execution The Memory panel and Watch panel come with a realtime display update function that permits you to update display of or even rewrite the contents of m
133. panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Search Forward Performs a search in the direction toward larger addresses within the range specified in the Search Range area and Address area The searched spot is placed in selected state on Memory panel However if an invalid value is specified or when the program is under execution a message is displayed and a search for memory value is not performed Also if the Memory panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Cancel Nullifies settings for a search of memory value and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 341 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Print Address Range Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to specify the address range to print the contents of the Disassemble panel Figure A 50 Print Address Range Settings Dialog Box Print Address Range Settings Select a specifying type of the printing addresses This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Disassemble panel select Print from the File menu Description of each area 1 Range specification area Select a range to prin
134. s are selected deletes them except when the expanded item of the watch expression is selected Select All If texts are in editing selects all the character strings If texts are not in editing selects all the watch expressions categories Rename Renames the selected watch expression category Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Find in Files tab selected Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Replace in Files tab selected R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 289 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Access Break This item becomes valid only when the selected watch expression is the global variable the static variable inside functions the file internal static variable or I O register multiple selections not allowed The following cascade menus are displayed to set the access break event see 1 Set a break event access type to a variable I O register Set Read Break to Simulator Sets a break event with read access condition to the selected watch expression Set Write Break to Simulator Sets a break event with write access condition to the selected watch expression Set R W Break to Simulator Sets a break event with read write access condition to the selected watch expression Set Read Combination Break to E1 E20
135. set is displayed Cautions 1 When both the trace start and trace end events have been set trace data is collected every time the start condition and end condition are met However only the trace data that were acquired immediately before the program stopped are actually displayed in the Trace panel 2 E20 JTAG RX600 Series Do not use the trace start and trace end events if you have enabled Real time RAM monitor in the Usage of trace function property under the Trace category Also delete any events using the Events panel that have been set Remarks 1 If either one of the trace start and trace end events set is Enabled the unconditional trace event checkbox on the Events panel is automatically deselected so that collection of trace data linked to the start of program execution is not performed The tracer is not actuated until the condition for the set trace start event becomes true 2 The trace end event if unnecessary may be left unset 3 The event mark varies with the set states of events see 2 17 1 Changing states of setting Enabled Disabled Also if a new event is set at a place where an event has already been set the event mark res is displayed indicating that multiple events have been set 4 Simulator If either one of the trace start and trace end events set is Enabled the Use trace function property R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 128 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2
136. shown as periods or Pointer type variable Variables that are pointed to Structure Union class All member of the structure union class Register Name of the bit bit string that constructs the register Example PSW register IPL register PM register U register register O register S register Z register C register c Registering new watch expression There are three ways as follows to register new watch expressions lt 1 gt Register from other panels Do either one of the following to register watch expressions in other panels Drag and drop the target character string in this area in the desired watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 Note that this operation is not valid in the Editor panel Select Register to Watch1 from the context menu after selecting the target character string or place the caret on either of the target character string the target is automatically determined Select the Edit menu gt gt Paste in this area in the desired watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 after selecting the Edit menu gt gt Copy for the target character string The relationship between panels that can use this operation and targets that can be registered as watch expressions is as follows Table A 4 Relationship between Panels and Targets That Can be Registered as Watch Expressions Panel Name Targets That can be Registered as Watch Expressions Note 1 Editor panel C C language variables
137. stopped automatically when the condition of the breakpoint break event is met 12 Check the result of the program execution Check the following information that the debug tool acquired by the program execution Displaying and Changing Memory Registers and Variables Display Function Call Information from the Stack Collecting an Execution HistoryN te Measuring the Execution TimeNte Measure Coverage Simulator Note These functions are implemented by setting events to the debug tool used See 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting when you use events Debug the program repeating steps 9 to 12 as required Note that if the program is modified during debugging steps 3 and 8 also should be repeated Remarks 1 Other than the above you can also check the result of the program execution by using the following functions Set an Action into Programs Setting Up the Hook Process Using the Debug Console 2 The acquired information can be saved to a file Saving the displayed contents of disassembled results Saving displayed memory contents Saving the displayed CPU register contents Saving the displayed I O register contents Saving the displayed contents of local variables Saving the displayed contents of watch expressions Saving the displayed contents of call stack information Saving the displayed content of an execution history 13 Executing an upload Save the program the memory con
138. stopped running Figure A 32 Call Stack Panel Call Stack Toolbar A Notation Encoding Depth Call Stack PowerON_Reset_PC J E wWorkSpace T utorial E1E20 R6004T utorial_Little 4 3 Here the following items are explained How to open Description of each area Toolbar File Menu Call Stack Panel Only Items Edit Menu Call Stack Panel Only Items Context menu How to open Choose Call Stack from the View menu Description of each area 1 Depth area Displays the depth of calls The callers of functions are assigned numbers in order starting from 1 with the line showing the current PC position assigned a 0 2 Call Stack area Displays the current source position and call stack information about the calls placed on the stack e g function caller position and parameters to each function The form in which information is displayed in this area differs depending on the status of which toolbar button sl or eal is selected and which item on context menu Show Parameter or Show Module File Name is selected as shown below R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 293 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Condition Display Format Show parameters lt function gt lt parameter gt lt parameter valueN gt lt module file name gt lt file name gt lt line Show module file names number gt default
139. such a case use this property to specify how the subject event should be handled Select one of choices from the drop down list below Move to the head of Resets the subject event at the beginning address of the instruction instruction Suspend event Leaves the subject event pending default However specification on this property applies to only the event set positions for which debug information is nonexistent For the event set positions that have debug information the event is always moved to the beginning of the source text line 2 Setting the Debug Information category Figure 2 58 Debug information Category E Debug nformaton Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset Yes Specified symbol _main a Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset Specify from the drop down list whether or not to run the program up to a specified symbol position after the CPU is reset or after a download is completed only when you specified Yes on the CPU Reset after download property To run the program up to a specified symbol position select Yes default Remark If while you specified Yes on the CPU Reset after download property you specify Yes on this property the Editor panel opens automatically after a download is completed with the source text at the position you specified on Specified symbol property displayed on it Also if you specify No here this panel opens with the reset address display
140. the caret position is moved to the address where the symbol at the caret position has been defined In addition when following on this operation you click on the button on the toolbar or select Back to Address from the context menu the caret position is returned to the instruction that has referenced a symbol before the caret was moved the address value of the instruction that has referenced a symbol is displayed in Address R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 255 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE f Jump to source line and memory By selecting Jump to Source from the context menu the Editor panel is opened with moving the caret to the source line corresponding to the address at the current caret position if the Editor panel is already opened jump to the panel In addition by similarly selecting Jump to Memory the Memory panel Memory1 is opened with moving the caret to the memory value corresponding to the address at the current caret position if the Memory panel Memory1 is already opened jump to the panel g Code coverage measurement result display Simulator When the coverage function is valid lines corresponding to the specified coverage measurement area are shown highlighted based on the code coverage measurement result that is acquired by executing the program See 2 15 Measure Coverage Simulator for details on the coverage measurement h Saving the contents of dis
141. the cause of the problem from the memory contents or stack information after the program has run out of control However analysis of the content of collected trace data makes it possible explore a process of malfunction until the program starts running wild providing an effective means for discovering potential bugs in the program Caution E20 JTAG RX600 Series Part of the trace functions and Real time RAM Monitor RRM functions can be used only ona mutually exclusive basis 2 13 1 Setting up a trace operation When the trace function begins trace data which has recorded in it an execution history of the currently executed program is collected in trace memory when program execution stops the trace function also automatically stops Before the trace function can be used it is necessary to make settings relating to the operation of a trace Note that the method on how to set differs with each debug tool used 1 For E1 2 For E20 3 For Simulator 1 For E1 Make settings in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab Figure 2 118 Trace Category E1 E Trace Operation after trace memory is full Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Trace data type Branch a Usage of trace function Only the trace function can be used Do not specify Real time RAM monitor for this property b Operation after trace memory is full Specify the operation to be performed when the trace me
142. the clip board into the caret position When the contents of the clipboard are not recognized as characters the operation is invalid The mode selected for the current source file is displayed on the status bar see b Focus panel status information Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Quick Find tab selected Go To Opens the Go to Line dialog box to move the caret to the specified line Jump to Function Jumps to the function that is selected or at the caret position regarding the selected characters and the words at the caret position as functions see 4 Jump to functions R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 238 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Tag Jump APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Jumps to the corresponding line and column in the corresponding file if the information of a file name a line number and a column number exists in the line at the caret position see c Tag jump Advanced Displays a cascading menu for performing an advanced operation for the Editor panel Increase Line Indent Increases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Decrease Line Indent Decreases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Uncomment Lines Removes the first set of line comment delimiters from the start of the current cursor line appropriate to the current language e g C This operation will only be available wh
143. the line where you wish to set an action event then select Register Action Event from the context menu On the Disassemble panel move the caret to the address where you wish to set a Printf event then select Register Action Event from the context menu On the Events panel select Edit the conditions from the context menu after selecting the action event Description of each area 1 Tab selection area R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 328 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE You can switch action events to be registered by the selection of a tab This dialog box has the following tabs Printf event tab Interrupt event setting tab Simulator Caution When you open this dialog box by selecting Edit the conditions from the context menu this area will be hidden 2 Event conditions settings area You can set detailed conditions for each action event in this area See the section of the corresponding tab for the details of the setting procedure Function buttons Button Function OK Ends the setting of the action event and sets the specified action event at a specified location Cancel Cancels the action event setup and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 329 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Printf event tab Thi
144. the name of the event the detailed information for the event and the comments added to the event are a pop up displayed When multiple events have been set in the applicable place information for each event up to a maximum of three events is listed and displayed Remark The detailed information about the set event is reflected in the Events panel 8 Characters area This area displays character strings of text files and source files and you can edit it This area has the following functions a Code outlining This allows you to expand and collapse source code blocks so that you can concentrate on the areas of code which you are currently modifying or debugging This is only available for only C and C source file types This is achieved by clicking the plus and minus symbols to the left of the Characters area Types of source code blocks that can be expanded or collapsed are Open and close braces and F Multi line comments and F Pre processor statements if elif else endif endif Caution This will be disabled for source files larger than 1MB b Characters editing Characters can be entered from the keyboard Various shortcut keys can be used to enhance the edit function c Tag jump If the information of a file name a line number and a column number exists in the line at the caret position selecting Tag Jump from the context menu opens the file in the Editor p
145. the parameter block in R3 Set the value of R2 1 byte file number in R1 Set the value of R1 in the location pointed to by R3 file number pointer Set the first byte of R2 result of execution in Rl Return to the address where the function was called Parameter block area R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 411 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS FCLOSE Closes a file Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Execution result Parameters Parameter Description Execution result output 0 Terminated normally 1 Error File number input Number that is returned when a file is opened Detailed Description Closes a file Example _fileclose MOV L PARM R2 Set the address of the parameter block in R2 MOV B R1 1h 5 R2 Set the value of R1 file number in R2 1 bytes OV L 01060000h R1 Set the function code of FCLOSE in R1 OV L SIM_IO R3 Set the address of the system call in R3 SR R3 System call OP OVL PARM R2 Set the address of the parameter block in R2 OV B R2 R1 Set the first byte of R2 result of execution in R1 Return to the address where the function was called SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL Parameter block area R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 412 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPEN
146. the point trace see 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met 2 For E20 Make settings in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab Figure 2 119 Trace Category E20 E Trace Usage of trace function Trace Operation after trace memory is full Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Trace data type Branch External trace output CPU execution Trace memory size MByte 1 a Usage of trace function Part of the trace functions and Real time RAM Monitor RRM functions can be used only on a mutually exclusive basis Therefore in this property specify which function you want to be used preferentially Here select Trace from the drop down list below Uses the trace function preferentially default Real time RAM monitor function cannot be used Real time RAM Uses the real time RAM monitor function RRM preferentially Note 1 monitor Trace function Use subject to limitations Note 2 Also trace related events are disabled Notes 1 E20 Serial The real time RAM monitor function is not supported Therefore do not specify Real time RAM monitor for this property value 2 E20 JTAG RX600 Series Part of the trace function cannot be used Following limitations apply R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 122 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Operation after trace memory is full Stop trace and Stop ca
147. timing with which a hook transaction is performed The numeral shown in bracket for each property value indicates the number of currently specified transactions No hook transactions are set by default Follow the procedure below to perform hook transaction on the desired property To specify the transaction select the desired property and click the button that appears on the right end of the column This will open the Text Edit dialog box in which you can specify the transaction Figure 2 150 Text Edit Dialog Box Opened E Hook Transachi Settings Before download Before download 0 After download After download 0 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 169 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 151 Configuring Hook Transaction Text Edit Dialog Box Text Edit In this dialog box enter the desired transaction directly from the keyboard You can use one of the following formats for specifying the desired transaction Format 1 Overwrites the O register contents with numeric values I O register name Numeric value Format 2 Overwrites the CPU register contents with numeric values CPU register name Numeric value Format 3 Executes a script file designated by Python script path absolute path or relative path using project folder as a base source Python script path Remarks 1 When specifying the transaction add at the top of the line to comment it out
148. to E20 2 Depending on the length or the method of FINE signal wiring on the target system it may not be possible to communicate using the selected FINE baud rate In such a case reducing the FINE baud rate may achieve successful communication e Flash You can configure the flash memory rewriting in this category Figure 2 31 Flash Category E Flash Input Mode of ID code Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal ID code Res FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Work RAM start address free 1000 lt 1 gt Input Mode of ID code Specify the mode in which to input the ID codes Caution This property cannot be changed while connected to E20 lt 2 gt ID code Specify the ID code to use when reading the code from the memory If you have selected Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal in the Input Mode of ID code property enter the ID code in a 32 digit hexadecimal number If you have selected Specify the ID code as an ASCII code within 16 characters enter the ID code using maximum 16 ASCII characters Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E20 2 Ifthe ID code entered in ASCII characters is shorter than 16 characters the unused space will be padded with 0 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 30 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS f 9 lt 3 gt Work RAM start address Specify the location address of the work RAM to be used by the debugger
149. to edit on the Evenis panel that is opened and then click Edit Condition on the context menu See 2 Editing access related events Also if you want to delete the point trace event you ve set choose Event from the View menu select the event name you want to delete on the Events panel that is opened and then click in the toolbar of this panel See 2 17 Event Management 2 13 5 Displaying an execution history To display the collected trace data use the Trace panel shown below Choose Trace from the View menu The trace data is displayed by default in a disassembled text and source text mixed mode By selecting the appropriate Display mode it is possible to display either of the two For details on how to read each area and about their functionality see the section where the Trace panel is described R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 131 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 122 Displaying Trace Data Trace Panel Toolbar 21 e ai Notation LT 3 88 E Number Time h min s ms ps ns Line Number Address Source Disassemble Address Data 302 7 resetprg cH 103 Change_PS w_PM_to_UserMode 4 Change PSW 302 7 Oxffff8031 49 ADD 0AH R1 302 8 resetprg c 103 Change_PS w_PM_to_UserMode i Change PSW 302 8 Oxffff8033 51 PUSH L R1 resetprg c 103 Change_PS W_PM_to_UserMode a Change PSW Oxffff8035 53 RTE 0x00001830 1A 4294934868 R 4294934555 0x
150. tool Information Note that this item appears only when the debug tool used supports the coverage function 5 Address area This area is valid only when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened This area shows the address corresponding to where the function is located in the memory space of the selected microcontroller The format of this area is fixed as hexadecimal number notation R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 231 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 6 The address width corresponds to the one in memory space of the specified microcontroller in the project Event area This area is valid only when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened Trace or timer events can be set at lines that have valid addresses In addition the Event mark corresponding to an event that has been currently set is displayed Hovering the mouse cursor over this area but not over a specific event mark displays the area title Event This area is provided with the following functions a Configuring events via the menu When you right click in this area the following menu below is displayed Set Timer Start Event Sets a Start Timer event to start measuring the execution time of the program when the E1 E20 line at caret is executed see 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section E1 E20 Set Timer End Event Sets a Stop Timer event t
151. trace event described later see 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section and 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met are used exclusively of each other Therefore if the trace event is Enabled the unconditional trace event is automatically Disabled When no trace event has been set trace data is collected even if the checkbox for the unconditional trace event is deselected i e Disabled 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section By setting a trace event it is possible to collect only a history of execution in a given section as trace data during program execution process This trace event consists of a trace start event and a trace end event To use this function follow the procedure described below Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Combining multiple events E1 E20 Executing the program Editing trace start and trace end events Deleting a trace start or trace end event Cautions 1 Regarding trace event settings e g limitations on the number of valid events also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting 2 The events that can be set as trace start and end events differ with each debug tool used E1 E20 execution related and access related events R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 125 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Simulator execution related events only 3 Simulat
152. up to 10 history entries The numeric value can be specified as a range of values In this case enter data in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank or labeled Input when range is specified the fixed numeric value specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search f Specifying the Number Specify a range of trace data to search by numbers displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel Specify start and end numbers in the left and right text boxes respectively By default 0 to last number are specified Enter a number in decimal notation directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries If the left side text box is blank the number 0 is assumed If the right side text box is blank the last number is assumed g Clicking the Search Backward or Search Forward bution When you click the Search Backward button a search is performed in the direction toward smaller numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel When you click the Search Forward button a search is performed in the direction toward larger numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 136 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Searching at the source level Search for trace data at the source level S
153. use Toolbar Deletes the selected event Note that it is not possible to delete the built in events Unconditional Trace event and Run Break Timer event Displays events related to the Hardware Break default Displays events related to the Software Break default Displays events related to the trace default Displays events related to the timer default E20 Simulator This button is disabled Displays events related to the action event Printf event Interrupt event default Displays events related to the built in event Unconditional Trace event Run Break Timer event default Opens the Editor panel and jumps to the source line corresponding to the address where the selected eventNote is being set R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 312 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 and jumps to the disassemble results corresponding to the address where the selected event Note is being set Opens the Memory panel Memory1 and jumps to the memory corresponding to the address where the selected eventNote is being set Note This button is valid for events other than trace events timer measurement events and built in events unconditional trace events Run Break Timer events Edit menu Events panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the Events p
154. using hot plug in E1 JTAG E20 JTAG However if already connected with the debug tool this item is disabled Disconnect from Debug Tool Terminates communication with the currently connected debug tool However this item is disabled when Build amp Download is under execution or when already disconnected from the debug tool Stop Forcibly halts the currently executed program However this item is disabled when the program is already halted or disconnected from the debug tool Runs the program from the current PC position and when the condition for a set break event holds true stops the program under execution However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool Ignore Break and Go R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Runs the program from the current PC position and continues running it ignoring the break and action events set However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool 2tENESAS Page 187 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note at a time updating the content of each panel Executes the program step by step For a function call the program stops at the beginning of a called program However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Downlo
155. variable 100 111 168 Local Variables panel 274 Lock bit 58 Lost 100 Low level interface routine 172 M Main area 232 Main window 185 Maximum number of enabled events 166 Measure Execution Time of the Program 141 Measuring the execution time 141 Measuring execution time from start to stop 141 Measuring execution time in a section 143 Range of measurable time 147 Setting the timer measurement operation 141 Memory access 22 33 41 Memory Initialize dialog box 338 Memory mapping 21 32 40 320 Memory Mapping dialog box 320 Memory panel 244 Memory Search dialog box 340 Memory settings 40 Memory type 320 Menubar 186 Methods to register watch expressions 114 Mixed display mode 132 300 Motorola S format 53 56 Motorola S type Hex format 50 Moving to a specified address 67 Moving to a specified line 62 Moving to a symbol definition part 68 N Newline code 336 Number of trace frames 125 0 Offset value 254 300 Open File dialog box 398 Open Log File dialog box 394 Operation mode 58 Option dialog box 383 General Build Debug category 390 General Font and Color category 385 OR 93 163 Output panel 315 Overlay section 49 75 P Pass count 159 360 167 168 306 307 Point trace event 130 242 Point trace Pointer type v
156. want a timer measurement to finish and then select Timer Settings on context menu and from it choose Set Timer End R W Value and then Set Timer Note 2 A timer end event is set for the watch expression on the Watch panel Notes 1 2 Microcontroller Timer start event timer end event cannot be set to lines with no address indication The asterisk in the menu Set Timer denotes a channel number as a number for a timer measurement section To set timer start and end events in one section be sure to select the same channel number Note that the selectable channel numbers vary with each microcontroller used and depend on how the Timer E1 E20 category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab is set as shown below Use 64bit counter Function property RX600 Series Specifiable from 2 sections 32 bit Set Timer 1 and Set Timer 2 Only 1 section 64 bit Set Timer 1 is specifiable RX200 Series Only 1 section 24 bit Set Timer 1 is specifiable This watch expression can only be a global variable static variable in function static variable in file and an IO register Measurement by the timer is possible even if either a timer start or timer stop event is set When only a timer start event is set measurement ends as soon as the program stops running When only a timer stop event is set measurement starts as soon as the program starts running When timer start and end ev
157. 0 ztENESAS Page 384 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Font and Color category In this category you can configure fonts and colors displayed on each panel Figure A 68 Option Dialog Box General Font and Color Category BI General Startup and Exit al Font and Color Display External Text Editor Setting place 1 EHE Font and Color Extemal Tools E Use detauit color Build Debug Warming Text Editor Error N Update Reserved word S Others Comment User Information String literal Control code Highlight Changed value Edit value Reset Selected Item Colors isplay example 2 ABCD abed 0123 Use default background color ont settings for text editor gt ine sets 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Select Options from the Tool menu Description of each area 1 Color setting area This area is where colors are set a Setting place area Select from the list a spot whose display color is to be specified The relationship between the items displayed in the list and the colors set for each by default is as follows DefaultNote AaBbCc Text color Standard display colors on all windows and panels Background White color R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 385 of 429 Oct 01
158. 00 Ox000s3ftff 16 KBytes bits Non map area 0x00084000 Oxooo0ssftfft 3 KBytes bits I O registers 0x00086000 0x00087fff 8 KBytes bits 2 4 I O registers 0x00088000 Ox0008dfff 24 KBytes bits Non map area Ox0008e000 Ox0008ftfff 8S KBytes I O registers area Ox00090000 Ox0o00o9fftfft 64 KBytes I O registers area Ox000a80000 Ox000bffftft 128 KBytes I O registers area Ox000c0000 Ox000ffftfft 256 KBytes Internal ROM area 0Ox00100000 OxO0101fff 8 KBytes lt bits bits bits bits bits Function buttons SSS onnonnnnnn nn o This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Debug Too Settings tab of the Property panel click the button displayed by selecting one of the values of the Memory mappings property in the Memory category Caution This dialog box cannot be opened during execution of a program Description of each area 1 Added memory mapping specification area Specify the information for a newly added memory mapping a Memory type Select the memory type for the memory mapping to be added from the following drop down list The item selected by default differs depending on the debug tool to use R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 320 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Emulation ROM area Adds emulation ROM area Uses simulator alternative ROM Emulation RAM a
159. 000 E Flash Input Mode of ID code Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal ID code Fes FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Work RAM start address Fes 1000 Work RAM size bytes 1024 E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Single chip mode Register setting Single chip mode Endian Little endian data B External Flash External flash definition file Size of internal ROM KBytes Size of the internal ROM Hook Transaction Settings R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 199 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 6 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab E1 JTAG Property AX E1UTAG Property of internal ROM KBytes of internal RAM KE e of DataFlash memory KByte Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the clack source on writing internal flash memory No 4 gt E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E1 XXXXXXXXX 5 gt fE Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator MAx 200m4 No Communications method ITAG JTAG clock MHz 16 5 6 gt E Flash Input Mode of ID code Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal ID code Res FRFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Work RAM start address Fes 1000 Work RAM size bytes 1024 7 gt a Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Single chip mode Register setting Single chip mode Endian Little endian data 8 P E ExternalFlash External flash
160. 00001834 0400001830 resetprg c 103 Change_PS W_PM_to_UserMode a Change PSW Osffff8038 56 NOP resetprg cH105 main Oxffff8039 57 BSR A _main 0x00001830 A 4294934584 0x00001834 1114112 _main Tutorial c 36 tutorial Oxffff855c 0 BSR W _tutorial l Il Il Il Il I l l Number area Line Number Address area Source Disassemble area Address area Data area Time h min s ms 1s ns area This section describes the following 1 Changing the display mode 2 Changing the form in which values are displayed 3 Getting linked to other panels 1 Changing the display mode By clicking one of the toolbar buttons shown below it is possible to change the display mode as suitable for the purpose of use However these buttons are disabled while the trace function is in operation Table 2 15 Trace Panel Display Modes Button Display Mode Display Contents Mixed display mode Instructions disassemble label names source text corresponding source lines and point trace results are displayed default Disassemble display mode Instructions disassemble label names and point trace results are displayed Source display mode Source text corresponding source lines are displayed However if any place that has no debug information is executed a notice lt No Debug Information gt is displayed R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 132 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 0
161. 011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu Editor panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the Editor panel other items are all invalid Cancels the previous operation and restores the characters and the caret position up to 100 times Cancels the previous Undo operation and restores the characters and the caret position Cuts the selected character string and copies it to the clipboard If there is no selection the entire line is cut Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s If there is no selection the entire line is copied Inserts insert mode or overwrites overwrite mode the characters that are copied on the clip board into the caret position When the contents of the clipboard are not recognized as characters the operation is invalid The mode selected for the current source file is displayed on the status bar see b Focus panel status information Deletes one character at the caret position When there is a selection area all the characters in the area are deleted Select All Selects all the characters from beginning to the end in the currently editing text file Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Quick Find tab selected Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Quick Replace tab selected Go To
162. 011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS By enabling the rapid build function it is possible to perform a build in parallel with the above operation To choose to enable or disable the rapid build function click Rapid Build on the Build menu This is a toggle switch which is by default enabled Caution For this function to be enabled when you use an external editor it is necessary to check the Observe registered files changing checkbox in the General Build Debug category of the Option dialog box Remarks 1 Itis recommended that after editing the source file you should always be sure to press the Ctrl S keys to save it each time 2 When you ve chosen to enable or disable the rapid build function your selection is applied to the entire project main project and sub projects 3 If while a rapid build is under execution the rapid build function is switched off disabled execution of the rapid build is aborted on the spot 2 6 4 Performing line assembly The instructions and instruction codes displayed on the Disassemble panel can be edited line assembled Following methods of operation are described here 1 Editing instructions 2 Editing instruction code 1 Editing instructions Edit the character string of the instruction directly from the keyboard a Switching to the edit mode Double click an instruction you want to edit or while the caret is moved to the subject instruction select Edit D
163. 011 RENESAS Page 389 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Build Debug category In this category you can configure settings related to build and debug Figure A 71 Option Dialog Box General Build Debug Category E g General Ae E Startup and Exit General Build Debug G Display 1 G Extemal Text Editor gt 7 Enable Rapid Build G Font and Color E Enternal Lodis If rapid build is made effective build is begun when edited file is saved y rapid build is made effective build is begun when edited source file is saved EH Build Debug As a result build is executed in parallel with edit When rapid build is made a Text Editor effective we recommend diligently saving a file by Ctrl S after the file is edited Update 2 E ati C Observe registered files changing 3 gt Enable Break Sound 4 gt Observe downloaded load module files changing p Iiaze Seinas Function buttons 4 Initialize All Settings Cancel Apply Help This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Select Options from the Tool menu Description of each area 1 Enable Rapid Build Enable the rapid build function N default Do not use the rapid build function Note This function automatically starts a build each time you save the edited source
164. 1 Opens the Memory panel Memory1 with the caret moved to the address indicated by the selected line ztENESAS Page 278 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Watch panel This panel is used to display the contents of the registered watch expressions and change their values see 2 11 6 Displaying and changing watch expressions Up to a maximum of four of these panels can be opened Each panel is identified by the names Watch Watch2 Watch3 and Watch4 on the titlebar and the watch expressions can be registered deleted moved individually Watch expressions can be registered in this panel as well as in the Editor panel Disassemble panel Memory panel CPU Register panel Local Variables panel or IOR panel When the panel is closed with registered watch expressions the panel closes but the information on the registered watch expressions is retained Therefore if the same panel is opened again it is opened with the watch expressions registered The display contents are automatically updated when the value of the watch expression changes after a program is executed when the execution is done in steps the display is updated after each step In addition by enabling the Real time display update function it is also possible to update the display contents in real time even while a program is being executed This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool Remark When the separator line of
165. 1 E20 The program in execution can be stopped at the arbitrary position by setting a break event execution type It is an after execution break as the program will break after executing instruction at the specified address This function is implemented using the debug tool resources This section describes the following operations 1 Seta beak event execution type 2 Edit a break event execution type 3 Delete a break event execution type 1 Set a beak event execution type Perform this operation in the Editor panel Disassemble panel in which the source text disassembly text is displayed After moving the caret to the target line Select Break Settings gt gt Set Combination Break A break event is set to the instruction at the start address corresponding to the clicked line When a break event execution type is set the event mark identical to that of hardware breakpoint appears and the disassembled text line will be highlighted see 2 Set a breakpoint When you have performed this operation it is interpreted as if a break event execution type has been set at the target address and it is managed in the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management for details It is registered as after execution in the detailed information on the combination break in the Events panel Caution When setting a break event execution type also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details e g limits on the
166. 1 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 123 Example of Source Display Mode Trace Panel El MJ Aa Notation iT n af ET Number Time h min s ms ps ns Line Number Address Source Disassemble Address 562 1 Tutorial c 61 p_sam gt s1 a 1 562 2 Tutorial cHE2 p_sam gt s2 a 2 562 3 Tutorial cHE3 p_sam gt s3 a 3 562 4 Tutorial cHE4 p_sam gt s4 a 4 562 5 Tutorial cHE5 p_sam gt s5 a 5 562 6 Tutorial cHB6 p_sam gt s6 a 6 562 7 Tutorial cHE p_sam gt s a 562 8 Tutorial c HE8 p_sam gt s8 a 8 562 9 Tutorial cHE9 p_sam gt s9 a 9 562 10 Tutorial cHES p_sam gt s9 a 9 583 Tutorial c 36 tutorial 588 Tutorial c 36 tutorial 590 Tutorial c 40 void tutorial void 590 1 Tutorial c 40 void tutorial void 590 2 Tutorial c 47 p_sam g Sample 590 3 Tutorial c 48 init p_sam 2 Changing the form in which values are displayed 3 2 13 6 The form in which values are displayed in the Line Number Address Address and Data areas can be freely changed by using the toolbar buttons shown below However these buttons are disabled during program execution Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed fe Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal default e Displays values on this panel in decimal Oct Displays values on this panel in octal Bin Displays values on this panel in binary Getting linked to other panels Wi
167. 11 6 Displaying and changing watch expressions 2 11 5 Displaying and changing local variables Use the Local Variables panel shown below to display the contents of local variables and change values Choose Local Variables from the View menu To display the content of your desired local variable select a scope in the scope area The local variable panel shows local variable names and function names It also shows parameters to functions as local variables For details on how to read each area and details about their functionality see the section where the Local Variables panel is described Caution During program execution nothing is displayed on this panel Each area on this panel are displayed at the time the program has stopped running Figure 2 110 Displaying the Contents of Local Variables Local Variables Panel Local Variables Toolbar Notationy He Encoding Scope area Value Type Byte Size Address Ox000016fc long 4 0x000016e0 Ta 7 int 4 0x000016e8 4 int 4 Rl REG 0 int 4 0x000016dc l int 4 R6 REG Name area Value area Type Byte Size area Addregs area Following methods of operation are described here 1 Changing the form in which values are displayed 2 Changing the contents of local variables 3 Saving the displayed contents of local variables R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 111 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTI
168. 124 Trace number 299 Trace panel 297 Trace Search dialog box 344 Trace start 307 Trace start event 126 Type of breakpoint 83 216 Types of events 168 U Unconditional trace 306 307 Unconditional trace event 125 157 Union 275 281 Upload 47 58 Uploadable file formats 59 Usage of PIC PID Function 72 USD file 57 V Verify 215 Ww Watch panel 279 Watchdog timer 98 Watch expression 113 279 Window reference 183 Work RAM 20 Z Zoom in or out on a view 236 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 425 of 429 Oct 01 2011 Revision Record Description Summary Oct 01 2011 __ First Edition issued CubeSuite V1 01 00 User s Manual RX Debug Publication Date Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Published by Renesas Electronics Corporation 2 CENESAS SALES OFFICES Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Refer to http www renesas com for the latest and detailed information Renesas Electronics America Inc 2880 Scott Boulevard Santa Clara CA 95050 2554 U S A Tel 1 408 588 6000 Fax 1 408 588 6130 Renesas Electronics Canada Limited 1101 Nicholson Road Newmarket Ontario L3Y 903 Canada Tel 1 905 898 5441 Fax 1 905 898 3220 Renesas Electronics Europe Limited Dukes Meadow Millboard Road Bourne End Buckinghamshire SL8 5FH U K Tel 44 1628 585 100 Fax 44 1628 585 900 Renesas
169. 2 Data information on access events that occurred during program execution are collected as trace data Notes 1 E20 Serial RX200 Series Trace data for Branch Data access cannot be collected Therefore this item is not displayed in the drop down list 2 E20 Serial RX200 Series To collect trace data for Data access it is necessary to set address conditions in a point trace For details about the point trace see 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met d External trace output E20 JTAG Specify the method on how the collected trace data should be output from the drop down list below R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 123 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CPU execution CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CPU execution given priority over trace output Trace information may be lost if output Trace output Trace output given priority over CPU execution CPU execution stops during trace output affecting real time performance Do not output Only the internal buffer of the microcomputer will be used with no output of trace information e Trace memory size MByte E20 JTAG Specify the size of memory used to retain trace data from the drop down list below 1 default 2 4 3 For Simulator 8 16 32 Make settings in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab Figure 2 120 Trace Category Sim
170. 2 The space can be substituted by a tab character You can enter up to 64 characters for one transaction and can specify up to 128 transactions for each property One line in the Text area in the Text Edit dialog box corresponds to one transaction When finished with specifying the transaction click OK to reflect it in the Property panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 170 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 152 Example of Hook Transaction Setting Text Edit Text CRC CRCDOR 0x0000 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 171 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 19 Using the Debug Console This section describes how to use the debug console for standard input output To perform some operation using a program s internal standard library functions such as the scanf function for reading the data entered from the keyboard or the printf function for outputting data use the Debug Console panel shown below Figure 2 153 Debug Console Panel Debug Console For details about each functionality of the debug console see the section in which the Debug Console panel is described Before standard input output based on the Debug Console panel can be used in a C C program there must be a low level interface routine in the program CubeSuite comes with sample project RX610_Tutorial_ DebugConsole for the E1 E20 which has the following file
171. 2 When the combination condition is Sequential break event access type for which address range condition is set can be specified only for the 1st position 3 For trace events the combination condition available for a trace end event is only OR 3 Object event condition display area a Display of the list The object events to be combined are shown in the list No The events in the list are numbered from top to bottom This item is displayed only when you have specified Sequential for the combination conditions For the condition to be satisfied events must be encountered in the order indicated by these numbers Event Detailed information on event conditions is displayed It is identical to the information displayed on the Evenis panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 353 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Buttons Buttons Functions Up Moves the event serial number upward in the target event list This button is enabled only when you have specified Sequential for the combination conditions Down Moves the event serial number downward in the target event list This button is enabled only when you have specified Sequential for the combination conditions R Event Moves the event selected in the target event list to the reset event list This button is enabled only when you have specified Sequential for the combination conditions 4 Reset ev
172. 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers Other break factors have occurred b Execution ignoring break related events Click the button on the debug toolbar When this operation is performed the program continues executing until either of the following occurs The button has been clicked see 2 10 1 Stop the program manually Other break factors have occurred Remark If you have started the execution with this operation the occurrence of Printf event will also be ignored c Execution to the caret position To start this operation move the caret to the line instruction at which you wish to stop the program in the Editor panel Disassemble panel then select Go to Here from the context menu When this operation is performed the program continues to be executed until either of the following occurs The PC has reached the address of the caret position The button has been clicked see 2 10 1 Stop the program manually Other break factors have occurred R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 79 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Caution When the corresponding address of the line at the caret position does not exist the program is executed to the corresponding address of the lower valid line if the corresponding address does not exist an error message will appear Remark If you have started the execution with this operation the occurrence of Printf even
173. 2 byte alphabet number symbol Hiragana Katakana Kanji and 1 byte Katakana UTF 8 2 byte alphabet number symbol Hiragana Katakana Kanji include Chinese characters and 1 byte Katakana UTF 16 Unicode 2 byte alphabet number symbol Hiragana Katakana Kanji include Chinese characters and 1 byte Katakana 2 Escape sequence Escape sequences that are allowed to input are as follows Table 2 27 Escape Sequence List Escape sequence Description null character Alert Backspace Horizontal tab New line Vertical tab Form feed Carriage return Double quotation mark Single quotation mark Question mark handled as a question mark if is entered Backslash R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 178 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Number Notations allowed when entering numbers are as follows Table 2 28 Notation List Notation Outline Binary number Start with Ob and continues with the numbers from 0 to 1 Case insensitive for alphabets Octal number Start with 0 and continues with the numbers from 0 to 7 Decimal number Start without 0 and continues with the numbers from 0 to 9 Hexadecimal number Start with Ox and continues with the numbers from 0 to 9 and alphabets a to f Case insensitive for alphabets In the input area with the mark prefix Ox is not needed 4 Expression
174. 2011 Warning CubeSuite V1 01 00 Example Display Text color Blue Background color Standard color APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description Display colors of warning messages on the Output panel as well as display colors for file names with warnings included on the Project Tree panel AaBbCc Text color Red Background color Light gray Display colors of error messages on the Output panel as well as display colors for file names with errors included on the Project Tree panel Reserved word AaBbCc Text color Brown Background color Standard color Display colors of reserved words on the Editor panel for compilers assemblers used Comment Text color Green Background color Standard color Display colors of comment parts for C source files to on the Editor panel String literal AaBbCc Text color Gray Background color Standard color Display colors of string literals on the Editor panel Control code AaBbCc Text color Blue green Background color Standard color Display colors of control characters on the Output panel Highlight Text color White Background color Reddish purple Display colors of highlighted spots in plug in products etc Changed value AaBbCc Text color Light brown Background color Cream Display colors on the Memory panel CPU Registe
175. 4 0x00001700 General Registers 4 Watch area Value area Type Byt Size area Address area Memo area Following methods of operation are described here Registering watch expressions 1 2 Putting the registered watch expressions in order 3 Editing the registered watch expressions 4 Removing watch expressions 5 Changing the form in which values are displayed 6 Changing the contents of watch expressions 7 Displaying and changing the contents of watch expressions during program execution 8 Saving the displayed contents of watch expressions 1 Registering watch expressions There are following three methods to register watch expressions By default no watch expressions are registered Cautions 1 Up to 128 watch expressions can be registered in one Watch panel If an attempt is made to register beyond the upper limit a message is displayed 2 Because of optimization by a compiler for blocks where variables or the subject to be operated on are not in use there may be no variable data in the stack and registers In this case those unused variables even when registered as watch expressions will have their displayed values marked with Remarks 1 The respective watch expressions registered in each watch panel watch 1 through watch 4 are managed individually and saved as user information for the project 2 Plural watch expressions with the same name can be registered a To register
176. 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Detailed Settings of Timer Measurement dialog box E1 E20 You can display and modify the detailed information on the timer event selected on the Events panel Note that you cannot edit the address value of the timer event in this dialog box If you need to edit the address value first delete the timer event and then create a new one For details on timer event setting see 2 14 Measuring the Execution Time Figure A 55 Detailed Settings of Timer Measurement Dialog Box Detail Toolbar 4 Measurement item Execution cycle Execution only once No Measurement Setting 2 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar Description of each category Function buttons How to open On the Events panel move the caret to the timer event you wish to set then select Edit Condition from the context menu R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 355 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Detailed information display change area In this area detailed information on the timer event selected in the Events panel is displayed by category in the list Also you can directly change its settings 2 Property description area In this area brief description of the categories and properties selected in the detailed information d
177. 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 4 Changing settings in the Property panel Simulator When the simulator is to be used the following settings must be made in the Stream I O Simulator category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel Figure 2 154 Stream I O Category eam i Use stream 1 0 function Stream 1 0 address a Use stream I O function If you intend to perform standard input output or file input output select Yes default selection No b Stream I O address If you have replaced the low level interface routines assembly language part with the sample code for the simulator enter 0 default 5 Executing a download Choose Build amp Download from the Debug menu on the Main window Then when connected with the debug tool perform a build and a download see 2 5 1 Execute downloading 6 Opening the Debug Console panel Open the Debug Console panel 7 Executing the program Execute the program see 2 9 Execute Programs 8 Performing data input output on debug console panel By executing the program perform data input output on the Debug Console panel This program reads 10 entries of data that have been entered from the keyboard onto the panel by the scanf function and then sorts the input data in ascending order It then outputs data onto the panel using the printf function R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 175 of 429 Oct
178. 6 bit width The value is converted according to the endian in the target memory area Displays memory values in 32 bit width The value is converted according to the endian in the target memory area 64 Displays memory values in 64 bit width The value is converted according to the endian in the target memory area Encoding Shows the following buttons that change the encode in which character strings are displayed However these buttons are disabled during program execution Displays character strings in ASCII code default Displays character strings in Shift_JIS code HEE Displays character strings in EUC JP code el Displays character strings in UTF 8 code El Displays character strings in UTF 16 code View Shows the following buttons that change the display form R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tEN ESAS Page 248 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Ea Opens the Scroll Range Settings dialog box to set the scroll range File menu Memory panel Only ltems The File menu used exclusively for the memory panel is as follows The other items are shared However all of these items are disabled during program execution Save Memory Data Saves memory contents to a text file txt or CSV file csv that has been saved previously see g Save memory values If this item is selected for the first time after startup the same
179. 7 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS GETC Accepts 1 byte from standard input Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Beginning address of 2 input buffer Parameters Beginning address of input buffer input Beginning address of the input buffer to which input data is written Detailed Description Accepts 1 byte from standard input Example 1210000h R1 Set the function code of GETC in R1 IO_BUF R2 Set the address of the input buffer in R2 PARM R3 Set the address of the parameter block in R3 R2 R3 Set the address of the input buffer in the parameter block R3 R2 Set the value of R3 address of the parameter block in R2 SIM_IO R3 Set the address of the system call in R3 R3 System call IO_BUF R2 Set the address of the input buffer in R2 R2 R1 Set the first byte of the input buffer acquired 1 byte character in R1 Return to the address where the function was called SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL Parameter block area SECTION BLKL Input output buffer R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 408 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS PUTC Outputs 1 byte to standard output Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1
180. 8 ffff6563 710008 28H RO p_sam amp g Sample 0000100 init p sam ef71 05670000 BSR for i O i lt 107 itt Ji 1 2 3 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 251 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 25 Disassemble Panel When Mixed Display Mode Is Not Selected Disassemble Toolbar fELLS55c fLLfLssst zefd _main _tutorial fLLLS561 6e66 R6 RS ffff8563 7100 8 28H RO f LLLS566 b7204100000 0000100 ffffS556c ef71 R7 R1 ffff8S56e 05670000 TELLGS74 ffff85576 05250100 ffff857a 7e21 jiii Toolbar E gt ffffe5se ffff855f _tutorial ffff8561 ffff8563 ffff8566 ffff856c ffff856e ffff8572 ff 8574 ffff8576 ffff557a Mi This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu Disassemble panel dedicated items Edit menu Disassemble panel dedicated items Context menu R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 252 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE How to open From the View menu select Disassemble gt gt Disassemble 1 4 Description of each area 1 Event area The lines for which events can be set are shown with the background color in white this mean that events cannot be set for those lines whose background color in gray In addition the Event mark corresponding to an
181. C n D 7 lt A 5 D CENESAS CubeSuite V1 01 00 Integrated Development Environment User s Manual RX Debug Target Device RX Family All information contained in these matenals including products and product specifications represents information on the product at the time of publication and is subject to change by Renesas Electronics Corp without notice Please review the latest information published by Renesas Electronics Corp through various means including the Renesas Electronics Corp website http Awww renesas com Renesas Electronics Wwww renesas com Rev 1 00 Oct 2011 8 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is grante
182. CO CV RM Notes 1 2 The bit width is 3 bits for the RX610 Group This area is provided with the following functions a Registering watch expression ACC FPSW register is not supported by the RX210 Group CPU registers categories can be registered in the Watch panel as watch expressions See 1 Remarks 1 Registering watch expressions for details on how to operate it When you have registered a watch expression with a category as the object all of the CPU registers belonging to that category are registered as watch expressions 2 2tENESAS A scope specification is automatically added to a registered watch expression Page 264 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Value area The values of each CPU register are displayed and changed The radix of a data value can be selected by the button on the toolbar or the context menu item In addition a display format adding the value in hexadecimal number constantly can also be selected as well The meanings of the colors of the CPU register values are as follows character colors and background colors depend on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Display Example Default Character color Blue Description The value of the CPU register that the user is changing Background color Standard color Press the Enter key to write to the
183. Ctrl g_IntBuf 33 ffffS86st GoTo PATE 34 Efff85f5 35 EEff8606 l Forward to Next Cursor Position 36 ffffs60a W Back to Last Cursor Position 37 EEff8624 38 EEff862c Y Goto Here 39 p EErFO634 Set PC to Here 41 frfTre 36 A Jump to Function Fiz 42 43 T Tag Jump Shift F12 e S Jump to Disassemble Advanced Break Settings k Set Hardware Break Trace Settings gt i g ny Set Read Break to 3 Clear Coverage Information ob g A Set Write Break o Oxb J Gil Set R W Break to my Break Option Figure 2 93 Example of Setting a Break Event Access type in the Event Panel Simulator v Detail Comment C Unconditional Trace 9 Run Break Timer Total 3940 ns Execution Cycle Count 394 Execution Instruction Count 76 48 Hardware Break0001 Write g_IntBuf Ox142c 0x142F Oxb b Set a break event access type to a registered watch expression You can set break events in the Watch panel Follow the operation listed below from the context menu after selecting the registered watch expression multiple selections not allowed R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 90 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Note however that only global variables static variables inside functions file internal static variables and I O register can be used By performing the following operation it is interpreted as if a Break event access type has been set at the target wat
184. CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Detailed Settings of Access Events dialog box This dialog box displays or changes detailed information on an access related event selected on the Events panel Note that the access related events refer to the following events on the Events panel Read write and read write in detailed information on combination break E1 E20 Read write and read write in detailed information on hardware break Simulator Read write and read write in detailed information on trace Read write and read write in detailed information on point trace Read write and read write in detailed information on timer result E1 E20 Figure A 58 Detailed Settings of Access Events Dialog Box E1 E20 Detail Toolbar 4 mlAddress Hex E M ddress Condition Compare condition Address area Area condition Inside the range lt Values lt End address Hes FFOO iData Condition Access type Read 1 Access size Long word Compare data p 55 Specify the data mask No Compare condition Specified value E Pass Count Pass count 1 End address 2 4 Specify the end address Start address is the value which is specified at Address property item Function buttons R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 362 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 59 Detailed Settings of Access Events Dialog Box Simula
185. DIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS FGETC Reads 1 byte of data from a file Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Execution result 42 Unused 4 Beginning address of 6 input buffer Parameters Parameter Description Execution result output 0 Terminated normally 1 EOF detected File number input Number that is returned when a file is opened Beginning address of input buffer input Beginning address of the buffer to which input data is written Detailed Description Reads 1 byte of data from a file Example _fcharget MOV R2 R5 Set the value of R2 file number in R5 MOV PARM R2 Set the address of the parameter block in R2 MOV R1 4h 5 R2 Set the value of R1 input buffer in R2 4 bytes MOV R5 1h 5 R2 Set the value of R5 in R2 1 bytes file number OV 01270000h R1 Set the function code of FGETC in R1 OV SIM_IO R3 Set the address of the system call in R3 SR R3 System call OP OV PARM R1 Set the address of the parameter block in R1 OV R1 R1 Set the first byte of R1 result of execution in R1 RTS Return to the address where the function was called SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 2 Parameter block area R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 413 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS FP
186. Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Routine to run immediately after execution stops E Trace Jsage of trace function Operation after trace memory is full Trace data type E Timer Operating frequency MHz 23 Yes No Yes 500 Hardware break No No Yes Yes Trace Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Branch 25 0000 Memory Connect Settings Debug Tool Settings Download File Settings Property l AX E1UTAG Property Hook Transaction Settings Figure A 12 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab E1 JTAG RX600 Series Memory mappings Verify on writing to memory Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution Update the display during execution Update interval ms E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Routine to run immediately after execution stops B Trace Usage of trace functio Opera
187. EFERENCE Interrupt event setting tab Simulator You can set an interrupt event in this tab see 2 16 2 Insert an interrupt event Simulator An interrupt event is a function with which you can generate an interrupt request at a specified point When an interrupt event is set an interrupt request will occur immediately before the execution of an instruction for which the event is set Once the interrupt request is accepted by the CPU interrupt exception will take place Figure A 45 Action Events Dialog Box Interrupt event setting Tab Action Events peee Printf event Interrupt Event Setting Interrupt Yector 1 m i Priority Gai m Function buttons F 3l Aa Ce Ce This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Editor panel move the caret to the line where you wish to set an interrupt event then select Register Action Event from the context menu On the Disassemble panel move the caret to the address where you wish to set an interrupt event then select Register Action Event from the context menu On the Events panel select Edit the conditions from the context menu after selecting the interrupt event Description of each area 1 Interrupt Vector area Specify the interrupt vector by directly entering a corresponding number between 0 and 255 R20UT0769EJ0100
188. EFERENCE Deletes a selected range of character string If a blank category is in selected state that item is deleted No I O registers can be deleted Select All Selects all character strings whose text is in edit mode If the text is in other than edit mode all I O registers and categories are placed in selected state Edits the name of a selected category Moves the focus to the text box in the search area Opens the Go to the Location dialog box to move the caret to a specified I O register Context Menu Registers the selected I O register or category to the Watch panel Watch1 Register to Watch1 Refresh Obtains latest information from the debug tool and updates the display No data are reloaded for the I O registers protected against read However this button is disabled during program execution Force Read Value Forcibly loads a value once for I O registers protected against read Move Opens the Go to the Location dialog box Create Category Adds a new category folder Enter a category name directly into the text box While you can create any number of new categories note that a category cannot be created within another category However this button is disabled during program execution Copies a selected range of character string to the clipboard If an I O register or category is in selected state that item is copied Note that the copied item can b
189. ENCE f Setting of various events Various events can be set to the selected watch expression by selecting Access Break or Trace Output from the context menu If an access event is set the mark of the watch expression is changed the event mark of a break event is displayed under the icon of the watch expression in layers When an event is set the detailed information about the set event is reflected in the Events panel Note that events are only set to the watch expressions that are global variables static variables inside functions or file internal static variables See the following for details on how to set events 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section E1 E20 g Jump to the address with memory definition By selecting Jump to Memory from the context menu the Memory panel Memory1 opens with moving the caret to the address in which the selected watch expression is defined if the Memory panel Memory1 is already opened jump to the panel Note that this operation is disabled when more than one watch expression is selected at the same time or the CPU register I O register is selected 2 Value area The value of the registered watch expression is displayed and changed if the watch expression is a function pointer the function name is displayed in this area Notations
190. End OR Start End 2 3 V Point Trace Detail Read Write g_CharBuf 021000 Name Detail Comment 8 Timer Result Total 1560 ns Start End 2 a Y Combination Break OR Name area Detailed Information area Comment area R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 156 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 143 Displaying the Set Events Events Panel Simulator Toolbar Name Comment Run Break Timer a M 4 Trace Detail Start Execution sort c 13 Oxffff8Sdd End Execution sort cH19 Oxffff85e9 Name Detail Comment B M Point Trace Detail Read w rite q_IntBuf 0x142c Name Detail Comment 3 Hardware Break0001 Before Execution sort cH15 Oxffff5e1 Name area Detailed Information area Comment area 2 17 1 Changing states of setting Enabled Disabled By checking or unchecking the checkbox of an event name concerned it is possible to change the set state of that event When the set state of an event is changed its Event mark is changed accordingly There are following types for the set states of events Figure 2 144 Event Name Checkbox 4 3 Hardware Break0001 A Check box Event mark Event name Table 2 21 Set States of Events Enabled When a specified condition is met the enabled event occurs The event can be disabled by unchecking its checkbox Disabled Even when a specified condition is met the dis
191. Enter an address expression for the address of the memory value to be displayed directly in the text box Input expressions in up to 1 024 characters each can be specified with their calculation result handled as a display start position However address expressions greater than the microcontroller s address space cannot be specified Remarks 1 By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function 2 In cases where the specified address expression represents a symbol and the size is known a range of memory from the start address to end address of that symbol is selected when displayed b Specify whether to evaluate address expression manually or automatically The Move when stop checkbox and the Move buttons are used to determine the timing with which the display start position is changed Move when Stop The address expression is automatically evaluated after the program has halted and the caret moves to the address derived from that calculation The address expression is not automatically evaluated after the program has halted In this case the address expression is evaluated by clicking the Move button Move button If the Move when Stop checkbox is not checked the address expression is evaluated by clicking this button and the caret moves to the address derived from that calculation 2 Address area T
192. FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Fes 1000 1024 Single chip mode Single chip mode Little endian data 4 Internal ROM RAM Follow the steps below by selecting the corresponding tab on the Property panel 2 3 4 Connect Settings tab Debug Tool Settings tab Download File Settings tab Hook Transaction Settings tab 1 2 3 4 1 Connect Settings tab In the Connect Settings tab you configure the connection with the debug tool for each one of the following categories Internal ROM RAM Clock c Connection with Emulator Connection with Target Board Flash f Operating Modes of CPU g External Flash R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 27 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a Internal ROM RAM The configuration of internal ROM RAM is displayed in this category Figure 2 25 Internal ROM RAM Category E Internal ROM RAM lt 1 gt Size of internal ROM KBytes The internal ROM size to emulate is displayed unit Kbytes You cannot change the value of this property lt 2 gt Size of internal RAM Bytes The internal RAM size to emulate is displayed unit bytes You cannot change the value of this property lt 3 gt Size of DataFlash memory KBytes The data flash memory size is displayed unit Kbytes If the currently selected microcontroller does not incorporate the data flash 0 is displayed
193. IC and PID areas If you specify PIC PID offsets in a load module file the result will be that the specified offsets do not agree with the debug function and the file cannot be debugged c Clicking the OK button Settings you ve made in this dialog box are enabled with the specified load module file added as a download file Only the symbol information included in the load module file becomes the subject to download 5 Downloading files to external flash memory E1 E20 The download files you ve specified in the Download Files dialog box can be downloaded to the flash memory connected to an external bus of the microcontroller used i e the external flash memory In this case follow the procedure described below a Setting up the properties panel In the External Flash E1 E20 category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab register an external flash definition file USD file External flash memory is recognized by registering a USD file in the External Flash E1 E20 category Up to four USD files can E Ex be registered Figure 2 61 External Flash Category ternal Flash 0 1 2 3 lt 1 gt External Flash Definition File Shows the maximum number of registrable USD files To register a USD file specify a USD file name in the File property that is expanded on display as a sub property Enter a file name directly if specified by a relative path it should
194. IX A WINDOW REFERENCE Property panel This panel is used to display and set the debug tool operation environment that is selected in the Project Tree panel Figure A 4 Property Panel When E20 JTAG Is Selected Property Sl AX E20TAG Property Main clock frequency MHz 12 5000 Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory No Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E20 SLS000012 E Connection with T arget Board JTAG clock MHz 16 5 B Flash Input Mode of ID code Specify the ID code as an ASCII code within 16 characters ID code Work RAM start address Fe 1000 Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Single chip mode Register setting On chip ROM enabled extended mode Endian Little endian data E External Flash External flash definition file 4 Register setting Select the operating mode which is selected by the register setting Connect Settings A Debug Tool Settings Download File Settings Hook Transaction Settings This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Edit menu Property panel dedicated items Context menu How to open On the Project Tree panel select the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node to use and then select Property from the View menu or the context menu On the Project Tree panel double click the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node to use Remark If this panel
195. LOW is displayed lt Combination condition for trace start gt Displays one of the following conditions OR AND Sequential lt Combination condition for trace end gt Displays OR condition lt Total number of trace start trace end event gt The total number of trace start events and trace end events is displayed lt Start End gt Shows whether the contents of the detailed information is start event or the stop event lt Trace start trace end detailed information gt Detailed information about trace start trace end event is displayed lt Pass Count gt Shows the measurement result of the pass count of the timer If a timer overflow occurs see 2 14 4 Range of measurable time or if the illegal value was acquired OVERFLOW is displayed lt Average gt R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Shows the measurement result of average execution of the timer The unit is either of ns us ms s min if however the unit is in min a value in s unit also appears ztENESAS Page 311 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Shows the measurement result of the maximum execution time of the timer The unit is either of ns us ms s min if however the unit is in min a value in s unit also appears Shows the measurement result of the minimum execution time of the timer The unit is either of ns us ms s min if however the unit is in min
196. Load module file abs 3 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Click the button in the File item in the Download file property area of the Download Files dialog box Description of each area 1 Look in area From the drop down list select the folder which contains the file you wish to download 2 File list area This area displays a list of files that match the conditions selected in the Look in and Files of type areas 3 File name area Specify the name of a file you wish to download R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 396 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Select the type of a file to download file type from the drop down list below Load module file abs Load module format default Hex file hex Hex format S Record file mot S Record format Binary data file bin Binary data format All files All file formats Function buttons Open Adds a specified file to the Download Files dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 397 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open File dialog box You can select files you want to open in this dialog box Figure A 75 Open File Dialog Box Open File G
197. NCTIONS APPENDIX C INDEX It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electricity logic circuits and microcontrollers Data significance Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Active low representation XXX overscore over pin or signal name Note Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Caution Information requiring particular attention Remark Supplementary information Numeric representation Decimal XXXX Hexadecimal OXXXXX Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions However preliminary versions are not marked as such Document Name Document No CubeSuite Start R20UT0727E Integrated Development Environment V850 Design R20UTO549E User s Manual R8C Design R20UT0550E RL78 Design R20UT0728E 78KOR Design R20UT0547E 78K0 Design R20UT0546E RX Coding R20UT0767E V850 Coding R20UT0553E Coding for CX Compiler R20UT0825E R8C Coding R20UT0576E RL78 78KOR Coding R20UT0729E 78K0 Coding R20UT0782E RX Build R20UT0768E V850 Build R20UT0557E Build for CX Compiler R20UT0826E R8C Build R20UT0575E RL78 78KOR Build R20UT0730E 78KO Build R20UT0783E RX Debug This manual V850 Debug R20UT0734E R8C Debug R20UT0770E RL78 Debug R20UT0733E 78KOR Debug R20UT0732E 78KO Debug R20UT0731E Analysis R20UT0735E Message R20UT0736E Caution The re
198. ONS 1 Changing the form in which values are displayed The form in which the data in the Value area are displayed can be freely changed using the toolbar buttons shown below Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays values on this panel in per variable predetermined notation default Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in decimal Displays values on this panel in octal Displays values on this panel in binary Displays array indexes on this panel in decimal default Z 2 2 o Displays array indexes on this panel in hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in Float Except for 4 byte data or when values have type information however they are displayed in predetermined notation Displays values on this panel in Double Except for 8 byte data or when values have type information however they are displayed in predetermined notation Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value at the end of it with the equivalent enclosed in parentheses Encoding Shows the following buttons that change the encode in which string variables are displayed Displays string variables in ASCII code default Displays string variables in Shift_JIS code Displays string variables in EUC JP code Displays string variables in UTF 8 code Displays string v
199. Opens the Editor panel and jumps to the source line corresponding to the address at the caret position in this panel Jump to Memory Opens the Memory panel Memory1 and jumps to the memory value corresponding to the address at the caret position in this panel Note The specifiable number of channels differs between the RX600 and RX200 Series as shown below RX600 Series 2 32 bits 2 or 1 64 bits 1 RX200 Series 1 24 bits 1 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 260 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Event area E1 E20 Hardware Break First The type of break that can be set by a one click operation of the mouse is set as a hardware breakpoint this is reflected in the setting of the First using type of breakpoint property in the Break E1 E20 category on the Property panel Software Break First The type of break that can be set by a one click operation of the mouse is set as a software breakpoint this is reflected in the setting of the First using type of breakpoint property in the Break E1 E20 category on the Property panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 261 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE CPU Register panel This panel is used to display the contents of the CPU register general purpose registers and control registers and change the CPU register values see 2 11 2 Displaying and chan
200. Ox prefixed hexadecimal numbers Size Displays size as a decimal number unit bytes Kbytes Access width Displays the access width unit bits N R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 321 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note Since access width is not supported in the simulator a fixed value 8 bit will be displayed The simulation execution time will not be affected by the access width value b Button Remove Deletes the memory mapping selected in this area The memory areas that can be deleted are the Emulation ROM area or the Emulation RAM area the microcontroller s internal memory mapping cannot be deleted Function buttons Button Function OK Sets the currently specified memory mapping to the debug tool and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels memory mapping changes and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 322 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Download Files dialog box This dialog box selects a file to download and sets download conditions see Section 2 5 Download and Upload The files specified in the project main project or sub project as the subject to build are automatically registered as the subject files to be downloaded not removable Figure A 40 Download Files Dialog Box Download Files Download file lis
201. Oxffff8566 Tutorial ets Source Disassemble _main tutorial 3 tutorial 0 BSR W _tutorial void tutorial void 0 PUSHM void tutorial void 2 ADD p_sam g Sample 5 MOV L finitin carl Address 0x00001024 0x00001 720 000001028 000001730 000001724 000001728 _tutorial 0x0000172c R6 R8 28H R0 R0 00001004H F R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 297 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 34 Trace Panel Simulator Trace Toolbar e Bh Notation CT 5 88 5 gt Number Time h min s ms ps ns Line Number Address Source Disassemble Address 108 OOhOOminOOs000ms003ps900ns 0x00001834 109 resetprg c 103 Change_PS W_PM_to_UserMode i 109 OOhOOminOOsO0Oms003ps91Ons Oxffff8038 56 NOP 110 resetprg c 105 main 110 OOhOOminO0sO0Oms003ps940ns Oxffff8039 57 BSR A _main 111 OOh00min00s000ms003ys940ns 0x00001 734 main 112 Tutorial c 36 tutorial 112 OOhOOminOOsOOOmsO03ps96Ons OxffFFB55c 0 BSR wW _tutorial 113 OOhOOminOOs000ms003ps960ns 0x00001730 _tutorial 114 Tutorial c 40 void tutorial void 114 OOhOOminOOsOOOmsO03ps990ns Oxffff8561 0 PUSHM 115 OOhOOminOOs000ms003ps990ns 0x00001 72c 116 OOhOOminOOs000ms003ps990ns 0x00001 728 117 OOhOOminO0s000ms003ps990ns 0x00001 724 118 Tutorial c 40 void tutorial void 118 OOhOOminOOsOOOmsO04ps000ns OfffF8563 2 ADD 28H R0 R0 119 Tutorial c 47 p_sam q Sample I
202. RO 99e0 OCH R6 RO 22a45b2 2 0B245H R2 03 03 03 03 2 Editing instruction code To edit instruction code follow the procedure described below a Switching to the edit mode Double click instruction code you want to edit or while the caret is moved to the subject instruction code select Edit Code on context menu and the subject you re going to edit is placed into the edit mode b Editing instruction code Edit the character string of instruction code directly from the keyboard c Writing into memory Press the Enter key when you ve finished editing and instruction code is written into memory However if this alteration results in an invalid instruction the character string you ve edited is displayed in red color and not written into memory When instruction code is written into memory the disassembled result is updated at the same time R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 71 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 7 Usage of PIC PID Function The PIC PID function enables the code and data in the ROM to be reallocated to desired addresses without re linkage even when the allocation addresses have been determined through previously completed linkage To use the PIC PID function a master program and an application program must be prepared In the PIC PID function a program whose code or data in the ROM has been converted into PIC or PID is called an application an
203. Record R W Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the values in the trace memory when the selected watch expression is accessed for read write see 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred Record Start R W Value Sets a trace event that causes trace recording to start upon read write access to a selected watch expression see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Record End R W Value Sets a trace event that causes trace recording to end upon read write access to a selected watch expression see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Trace Opens the Trace panel and displays the acquired trace data R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 290 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Timer Settings E1 E20 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This item is enabled only when the selected watch expression is a global variable a static variable in function a static variable in file or an I O register plural selections not accepted Displays the following cascaded menu to set timer related events see Section 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section E1 E20 After an event is set an event mark is displayed at the beginning of the watch expression concerned Set Timer Start R W Value Sets an event that causes the timer to start upon read write access to a selected watch expression see a How to set a timer start event
204. Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 333 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Priority area RX610 Group Specify the priority order by directly entering a number between 1 and 8 When 8 is specified the event is handled as a fast interrupt Non RX610 Group Specify the priority order by directly entering a number between 1 and 16 When 16 is specified the event is handled as a fast interrupt Function buttons Button Function Finishes configuring the interrupt event and sets it to the line address at the caret position in the Editor panel Disassemble panel OK Cancel Cancels the interrupt event setup and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 334 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Encoding dialog box This dialog box is used to select a file encoding Figure A 46 Encoding Dialog Box main c Encoding Available encodings 1146 IBM EBCDIC UK Euro 1147 IBM EBCDIC France Euro 1148 IBM EBCDIC International E uro 1 4 1149 IBM EBCDIC Icelandic Euro 1200 Unicode 1201 Unicode Big Endian 1250 Central European Windows 1251 Cyrillic Windows 1252 Western Europ This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the File menu open the O
205. Select this underlined memory value or while the caret is positioned at one of such memory values select Register to Watch1 from the context menu and the symbol name at the specified address is registered as a watch expression on the Watch panel Watch1 Caution Memory values with no underlines cannot be registered as watch expressions Save memory values Choosing Save Memory Data As from the File menu opens the Data Save dialog box allowing the contents of this panel to be saved to a text file txt or CSV file csv For details on how to save memory values see 7 Saving displayed memory contents 4 Character string area This area displays memory values converted into character code To specify character code click the appropriate toolbar button or select Encoding from the context menu This area has the following features a Edit character strings In the current version of the software character strings can be changed only when ASCII is specified for the character code R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 247 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Toolbar You can edit a character string directly from the keyboard by simply moving the caret to the character string you wish to change When a character string is edited the altered part of it changes in display color While in this state hit the Enter key and the changed value is written into the
206. Specifiable value Yes Object information is downloaded No Object information is not downloaded Download symbol information This item is displayed only when the files to download are in load module format Specify whether or not to download symbol information from a specified file Note 2 Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list Specifiable value Yes Downloads symbol information No Does not download symbol information Specify the PIC PID offset Specify whether to change the positions of PIC Position Independent Code and PID Position Independent Data areas of the load modules to download from those specified during the creation of load modules When Yes is selected PIC offset and PID offset will appear as sub items Default No How to change Select from the drop down list Specifiable value Yes PIC PID offset is specified 3 No PIC PID offset is not specified PIC Offset Input the offset values from the address specified at the time of load module creation For instance if you enter 1000 here when the start address of the program section is 0x1000 the corresponding section will be downloaded to 0x2000 Default 0 How to change Enter directly from the keyboard Specifiable value Hex number between 0x0 and OxFFFFFFFF R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01
207. Specifying the Fetch Address Specify a fetch address if needed as the search condition Enter an address expression directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The fetch address can also be specified as a range of addresses In this case enter address values in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank or labeled Input when range is specified the fixed address specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search Note that if any address value greater than the microcontroller s address space is specified the high order address value is masked when a search is performed Also no address values can be specified that are greater than the value representable by 32 bits b Specify Mnemonic Specify a character string of instruction if needed as the search condition The character string specified here is searched from within the Source Disassemble area of the Trace panel Enter an instruction directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case insensitive and partial matches are also allowed R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 135 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c d e Specifying the Access Address Specify an access address if needed as the search condition Enter an address value
208. UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 124 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS d Accumulate trace time Specify from the drop down list whether or not to use an accumulated display for trace time display Specify Yes to use an accumulated display for trace time display or No to use a difference display default e Trace memory size frames Specify from the drop down list the size of trace memory number of trace frames Note that a trace frame is a unit for the trace data and that fetch write and read operations each use one trace frame The drop down list shows the number of trace frames as follows 64K default 128K 256K 512K 1M 2 13 2 Collecting an execution history up to a halt The debug tool has a preinstalled function to collect an execution history of the program from when it starts running to when it stops Thanks to this when the program starts running collection of trace data begins automatically and it is finished at the same time the program stops For details on how to check the collected trace data see 2 13 5 Displaying an execution history Caution Simulator For data access by string manipulating and multiply and accumulate instructions only a history of the last access is collected Remark This function is actuated by an unconditional trace event one of the built in events that are set in the debug tool by default Note that this unconditional trace event and the
209. UTC Writes 1 byte of data to a file Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Execution result 42 Unused 4 Beginning address of 6 output buffer Parameters Parameter Description Execution result output 0 Terminated normally 1 Error File number input Number that is returned when a file is opened Beginning address of output buffer input Beginning address of the buffer that contains output data Detailed Description Writes 1 byte of data to a file R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 414 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS Example _fcharput MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV JSR NOP MOV MOV RTS SECTION BLKL SECTION BLKL R2 R5 PARM R2 IO_BUF R4 R4 4h 5 R2 R1 R4 R5 1h 5 R2 01280000h R1 SIM_IO R3 R3 PARM R1 RIL RI B DATA ALIGN 4 2 B_1 DATA 1 Set Set Set Set Set location pointed Set Set Set t he value of R2 file number in R5 he address of the parameter block in R2 he address of the output buffer in R4 he value of R4 output buffer in R2 4 bytes he value of R1 output character in the to by R4 output buffer he value of R5 in R2 1 bytes file number he function code of FPUTC in R1 he address of the sy
210. When multiple events have been set in the applicable place information for each event up to a maximum of three events is listed and displayed Remark The detailed information about the set event is reflected in the Events panel 7 Main area This area is valid only when the user is connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened Breakpoints can be set at lines that have valid addresses In addition the Event mark corresponding to a breakpoint that has been currently set is displayed The current PC mark gt that corresponds to the current PC position PC register value is displayed R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 232 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note that the current PC mark is only displayed if the current PC value corresponds to the source text line when the current PC position is modified or the state of the debug tool is changed from execution to stop Hovering the mouse cursor over this area but not over a specific event mark will display the area title Main This area is provided with the following functions a Setting deleting breakpoints By clicking where you want to set a breakpoint with mouse the breakpoints can be set easily The breakpoint is set to the instruction at the start address corresponding to the clicked line Once a breakpoint is set an Event mark is displayed at the line that is set In addition the detailed info
211. a data value can be selected by the button on the toolbar or the context menu item The display formats are as follows Type of Display Line Display Format Instruction disassemble results lt Address gt Source text lt File name gt lt Line number gt Label Point trace results Remark Since the following execution histories are not displayed the line numbers displayed are not consecutive numbers CPU register access Invalid fetch Source Disassemble area The collected trace data is displayed as follows The items displayed in this area differ depending on the selection of the display mode see a Display mode R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 299 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 35 Display Contents of the Source Disassemble Area Default Source Disassemble Change_PS W_PM_to_UserMode Source text 56 NOP maint Offset value gt 57 _ BSR A _main label gt tutorial 0 BSR w _tutorial _tutorial void tutorial yvoid 0 PUSHM RE R8 Instruction disassemble results Label The label is displayed when a label is defined for the address Offset value The offset value from the nearest label is displayed when a label is defined for the address Source text The corresponding source text is displayed when the Mixed display mode or Source display mode is selected Howev
212. a value in s unit also appears lt Total number of Displays the total number of cycles executed between Run Break as the result of cycles executed gt measurements made lt Total number of Displays the total number of instructions executed between Run Break as the result of instructions measurements made executed gt lt Set print event gt Shows the variable expression and the character strings specified in the Action Events dialog box lt nterrupt vector gt Displays the interrupt vector specified in the Action Events dialog box or Detailed Settings of Interrupt Events dialog box Simulator lt nterrupt priority gt Displays the priority level specified in the Action Events dialog box or Detailed Settings of Interrupt Events dialog box Simulator 2 Click this line to display the detailed information of the lower lines 3 Comment area The user can write comments for each event that has been set To input comments click on this area or select Edit Comment form the context menu after selecting the event in which you want to input comments and then input directly the desired text from the keyboard the edit mode is cancelled by pressing down the Esc key After editing the comments complete the editing by pressing the Enter key or moving the focus to outside the edit region Up to a maximum of 256 characters can be inputted for the comments and this is saved as the settings of the user during
213. able l O register see 1 Set a break event access type to a variable I O register Set R W Break to Simulator Sets a break event with read write access condition to the line at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable l O register see 1 Set a break event access type to a variable I O register Set Combination Break E1 E20 Sets a break at the caret position s address or the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or I O register as the condition for a combination break event see 1 Set a beak event execution type Set Read Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a break event by a read access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or I O register as the condition for a combination break see 1 Set a break event access type to a variable I O register Set Write Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a break event by a write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or I O register as the condition for a combination break see 1 Set a break event access type to a variable I O register Set R W Combination Break to E1 E20 Sets a break event by a read write access to the ca
214. able when the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Comment Lines Places line comment delimiters at the start of the current cursor line appropriate to the current language e g C This operation will only be available when the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Convert Tabs to Spaces Converts all tabs on the current cursor line into spaces R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 237 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Convert Spaces to Tabs Converts each set of consecutive space characters on the current line to tab characters but only for those sets of spaces that are at least equal to one tab size Tabify Selected Lines Tabifies the current line causing all spaces at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to tabs where possible Untabify Selected Lines Untabifies the current line causing all tabs at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to spaces Make Uppercase Converts all letters within the selection to uppercase Make Lowercase Converts all letters within the selection to lowercase Toggle Character Toggles the character cases uppercase lowercase of all letters within the selection Casing Capitalize Capitalizes the first character of every word within the selection Delete Horizontal Deletes an
215. abled event does not occur The event can be enabled by checking its checkbox Pending A specified condition cannot be set in the program to be debugged The checkbox of any event in this state cannot be manipulated Remarks 1 The Run Break timer event cannot be disabled or left pending 2 The state of an event can also be changed by enabling or disabling it from the menu that is displayed by right clicking its Event mark on the Editor panel or Disassemble panel 3 The enabled disabled settings of an unconditional trace event and other trace events are controlled exclusively of each other Therefore although the unconditional trace event one of the built in events R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 157 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS is enabled by default when either a trace start event or a trace end event is set it is automatically disabled at the same time in which case the trace start and trace end events are enabled together as one instance of a trace event Conversely when the set trace event is disabled the unconditional trace event is automatically re enabled 2 17 2 Displaying only a specific type of event By clicking one of the following toolbar buttons it is possible to display only a specific type of event Displays hardware break related events Displays software break related events Displays trace related events Displays timer related events
216. ack to Last Cursor Position 37 EEff8624 38 EEff862c p Go to Here 39 aa eereunes Set PC to Here Pa FErreese Jump to Function F12 43 Tag Jump Shift F12 2 O W Jump to Disassemble Advanced Break Settings gt 4 Set Hardware Break Trace Settings gt ll Set Software Break Timer Settings gt Set Combination Break Set Read Combination Break to a Set Write Combination Break to C gt Oxb J Set R W Combination Break to Break Option Figure 2 91 Example of Setting a Break Event Access type in the Event Panel E1 E20 Events x Name Detail Unconditional Trace Run Break Timer Not measured M 8 Combination Break OR Detail Write q_IntBuf 0x142c 0x1 42 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 CENESAS Page 89 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 92 Example of Setting a Break Event Access type on a Variable in the Source Text Simulator 22 23 z4 Reaister to Watchi From the context menu above the a f J Register Action Event variable g_IntBuf enter a value in E _ Break Settings gt gt Set Write Break 27 ffff85ec void s x Cut Ctrl 28 i to then press the Enter key 29 Sag COPY ctn Here the program will break when the 30 paste trl Fi 31 ag e value Oxb is written to the variable 32 ff85 1 AA Find
217. ad is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool Note Step Over Runs the program from the current PC position by executing one step at a time updating the content of each panel For a function call by a jump to subroutine instruction all of the source lines or instructions in that function are executed successively in one step until a place is reached at which control returns from the function step executed until there is as many nesting as would be when a jump to subroutine instruction is executed For other than a jump to subroutine instruction the same operation as Step In is selected is performed However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool Return Out Runs the program until control returns from the currently executed function until control returns to the calling function Note However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool CPU Reset Resets the CPU program is not executed However this item is disabled when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool Restart Resets the CPU once and then starts running the program from the reset address However this item is disabled when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool
218. age 214 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Verify on writing to Specify whether to perform a verify check when the memory value is initialized memory E1 E20 Default Yes How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes Executes the verify check value No Does not execute the verify check Notes 1 This refers to the type of memory mapped areas registered in a device file 2 The access width and the endian can only be changed when Memory type is an external area and the debug tool is disconnected Also the specifiable value differs with each selected microcontroller 3 The endian information differs in displayed contents and specifiable values depending on Memory Type External area E1 E20 Specify one of the following by selecting from the drop down list Same as MCU endian or different from MCU endian I O register area One of the following is displayed Little endian data or big endian data Emulation ROM area and emulation RAM area Simulator Specify one of the following Little endian data or big endian data Areas other than the above No endian information is displayed 2 Access Memory While Running The detailed information on memory accesses while executing a program real time display update function see 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution is displayed and its configuration can be change
219. age 98 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS a For Read Table 2 9 Subject Area of the Real Time Display Update Function Read by Pseudo RRM Function E1 Serial E1 JTAG E20 Serial E20 JTAG Internal ROM C D Entire range Internal RAM Data flash Target memory CPU register Not available I O register Table 2 10 Subject Area of the Real Time Display Update Function Read by RRM Function Internal ROM Internal RAM Data flash Target memory E20 JTAG RX600 Series Simulator A B D Automatic setting Entire range area Note Emulation memory Entire range CPU register I O register Not available Entire range Note E20 JTAG RX600 Series The subject area of the RRM function is limited to a maximum of 4 096 bytes 4 areas each containing maximum 1024 bytes Therefore CubeSuite automatically determines the subject of realtime display updates within the above limit according to the determination rules order of priority shown below Only the panel that is displayed in front of others immediately before program execution becomes the subject 1 Watch expressions displayed on Watch panel are set in order from the top If multiple Watch panels are open they are set in increasing order of panel number 2 Memory contents displayed on Memory panel are set in increasing order of address If multiple Memory panel are open they are set in increasing order of pane
220. age of display trace function property and also Yes is specified in the Update display during the execution E20 JTAG RX600 property Series Default Yes How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes Automatically sets the real time display update function value No Does not set the real time display update function 3 Break E1 E20 The detailed information on break functions is displayed and its configuration can be changed First using type of Specify the type of the breakpoint to use with priority when setting it at the source line or the breakpoint execution address with a one click operation of the mouse in the Editor panel Editor panel E1 E20 Default Hardware break How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Software break Sets software breakpoint with priority value Hardware break Sets hardware breakpoint with priority 4 System E1 E20 Displays detailed information on emulation system or changes settings made in it Debugging the Specify whether or not to debug a program that involves rewriting the internal program ROM e g a program re writing the program making use of ROM P E mode on chip PROGRAM ROM Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable Yes A program that involves rewriting
221. ailable until the program breaks following the completion of hot plug in connection 2 The realtime RAM monitor function RRM function will not be available until the program breaks following the completion of hot plug in connection Do not select Real time RAM monitor for the Usage of trace function property under the Trace category 3 Once the hot plug in connection is established all the events that have been set in the project as the user information excluding built in event will be deleted 4 When conducting hot plug in connection do not use a project for which software break point is set as it may result in unsuccessful connection Check that all the software break points are deleted in the Events panel of the active project before starting hot plug in connection see 2 17 5 Deleting events 5 The emulator stops the program temporarily for approximately 800us to check the ID code at hot plug in connection CPU clock 100 MHz JTAG clock 16 5 MHz 6 RX630 RX631 RX63N group Confirm that the Endian value of Endian Select Register MDEB MDES written on the microconiroller matches the Endian information of the project See the hardware manual of the microconiroller for the details of Endian Select Register R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 46 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 5 Download and Upload This section describes how to download the program to be debugged e g load mod
222. al function simulation modules on this panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 39 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 2 gt Peripheral clock rate Specify from the drop down list the peripheral to internal clock ratio that shows the number of internal clock that is equivalent to 1 peripheral clock The following clock rates are displayed in the drop down list 1 Default 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 64 Caution You cannot change this property while connected to the Simulator 2 Debug Tool Settings tab In the Debug Tool Settings tab you can configure the debug tool for each one of the following categories a a Memory b Access Memory While Running c Trace d Coverage e Stream input output f Execution mode g Instruction decode cache Memory You can configure the memory in this category Figure 2 46 Memory Category Simulator E Memory E Memory mappings 19 0 Internal RAM area 1 Non map area 2 20 registers area 3 Non map area 4 1 0 registers area 5 1 0 registers area 6 Non map area 7 20 registers area 8 20 registers area 9 1 0 registers area 10 Internal ROM area 11 Non map area 12 1 0 registers area 13 Non map area 14 20 registers area 15 Non map area 16 Internal ROM area 17 Non map area 18 Internal ROM area lt 1 gt Memory mappings Current memory mapping status is displayed for
223. al mistake Background color Light gray This area provides the following facilities a Tag jump Double click an output message or move the caret to a message and then hit the Enter key The Editor panel is opened displaying the relevant line number of the relevant file This facility permits you to jump to the relevant line in error of the source file from the error messages output for example at build time b Displaying help While the caret is present at the line showing a warning or an error message select Help on Messages on context menu or press the F1 key Help for a message on that line is displayed c Saving logs Choose Save Output tab name As from the File menu The Save As dialog box is opened allowing you to save the whole content displayed on the currently selected tab to a text file txt Messages on unselected tabs are not saved 2 Tab select area Select a tab showing the source from which a message is output The debug tool uses the following tabs Tab name Description All Messages Displays the messages output by all components supplied with CubeSuite e g design build and analysis tools including the debug tool This does not apply to the messages associated with execution of a rapid build Debug Tool Displays only the messages output by the debug tool out of those output by various components supplied with CubeSuite e g design build and analysis tools including
224. altered portion is displayed in a different color While in this state press the Enter key and the altered value will be written into the target memory Pressing the Esc key before you hit the Enter key cancels editing However the character strings that can be entered when changing memory contents are limited to only those that are handleable by the currently specified system of notation Also changes in the character string area are only possible when character encode in ASCII is specified You can edit memory values even when the program is in execution For details see 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution In the case shown below caution is required when editing the memory values Examples 1 When the maximum value of the displayed bit width is exceeded If while memory is displayed in decimal 8 bits you edit the displayed value 105 by entering 3 for 1 then the altered value becomes 127 which is the maximum value 2 When is entered in the middle of a numeric value If while memory is displayed in signed decimal 16 bits you edit the displayed value 32768 by entering in the middle of it like 32 68 then numerals 3 and 2 change to spaces and the altered value becomes 68 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 97 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 When a space character is entered in the middle of a numeric value If while memory is
225. an EQU symbol and an immediate Integer constant Address Notes 1 C89 C99 or C language variable 2 Ifthe register is assigned the value of a C variable an error results 3 The expression that is input as an index to an array is parsed as a watch expression 4 When using a member variable of a base class specify the scope before the member name e g variable BaseClass member R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 179 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 5 Ifthe label name or EQU symbol name includes a be sure to enclose the name in Example Label When you specify the CPU register name I add REG e g I REG to distinguish it from the keyword I that indicates an imaginary number From Table 2 29 Basic Input Format of Address Expressions the following address expressions with operator can be constructed Table 2 30 Construction of Address Expressions with Operators Expression Description Expression Specifies the order in which operations are performed Expression Inverts symbol Expression Logical negation Expression Bit inversion Expression ExpressionN Multiplication Expression ExpressionN Division Expression ExpressionN Remainder calculation Expression Expression Addition Expression ExpressionN Subtraction Expression amp ExpressionN Logical multiplicat
226. an address area can set only once 3 Simulator Address conditions cannot be specified lt 3 gt When Compare with address mask is specified E1 E20 A mask value can be set for the address value Enter an address mask value in hexadecimal notation in the Address mask property that is added in the Address Condition category When an access to the address that matches the masked address occurs the condition holds true Also in the Compare property that is added the same way it is possible to set Any other value for the address compare condition Caution When specifying a mask value be sure that the address value used as condition is masked bitwise wherein the mask value 0 is Don t Care Example To set an address condition of 0x1000 to 0x1FFF Address value 0x1000 Mask value 0xF000 b Editing data conditions lt 1 gt Access type Specify one of the following items for the access type Read When a read access occurs the condition holds true Write When a write access occurs the condition holds true Read Write When a read or write access occurs the condition holds true lt 2 gt Access size Specify one of the following items for the access size No conditions When an access in any size occurs the condition holds true Byte When an access in byte size occurs the condition holds true R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 160 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER
227. anel chose Save File Name As from the File menu While focus is present on CPU Register panel choose Save CPU Register Data As from the File menu While focus is present on Watch panel choose Save Watch Data As from the File menu While focus is present on IOR panel choose Save IOR Data As from the File menu While focus is present on Call Stack panel choose Save Call Stack Data As from the File menu While focus is present on Local Variables panel choose Save Local Variable Data As from the File menu While focus is present on Output panel choose Save Tab name As from the File menu Description of each area 1 Save in area Select the folder in which you want to save the file 2 File list area Displays a list of files that match the conditions selected in the Save In area and File Type area 3 File name area Specify a file name under which you want to save R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 402 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Save as type area a For the Editor panel Depending on the type of file being edited this area displays the following file types Text file txt Text format C source file c C language source file C source file cpp cp cc C source file Header file h hpp inc Header file Assemble file src Assembler source file Link orde
228. anel other items are all invalid Delete Deletes the selected event Note that it is not possible to delete the built in events Unconditional Trace event and Run Break Timer event Select All Selects all the events displayed on the panel Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Find in Files tab selected Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Replace in Files tab selected R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 313 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Context menu Enable Event APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Enables the selected event valid state Note that this item is invalid if the selected event is a valid state Disable Event Disables the selected event invalid state Note that this item is invalid if the selected event is an invalid state Delete Deletes the selected event Note that it is not possible to delete the built in events Unconditional Trace event and Run Break Timer event Select All Selects all the events of this panel View Select The following cascade menus are displayed to limit the event type to be displayed All of the items have been selected by default Hardware Break Displays events related to the Hardware Break Software Break Displays events related to the Software Break Timer Event Displays events rel
229. anel and jumps to the corresponding line and the corresponding column if the target file is already opened in the Editor panel you can jump to the panel See Table 2 4 Operation of Tag Jump for details on the operation of the tag jump d Current PC line display When the current PC position PC register value corresponds to the source text lines those lines are shown highlighted the highlighting color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 234 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE e Lines with breakpoints display Lines where the breakpoints are set are shown highlighted the highlighting color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened f Code coverage measurement result display Simulator When the coverage function is valid lines corresponding to the specified coverage measurement area are shown highlighted based on the code coverage measurement result that is acquired by executing the program the highlighting color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box See 2 15 Measure Coverage Simulato
230. anels displaying a file being registered in the project are closed 2 When a file is excluded from a project the Editor panel displaying the file is closed 3 A message is shown when the downloaded load module file is older than the source file to be opened This is due to the debug information not matching the source code being viewed Figure A 20 Editor Panel 1 4 f main c 88 void main void 2 89 i e 90 Start user code Do not edit cor 91 92 frrracdl IF NA 93 EEff86d4 TMP1 Start 94 Efff86d7 ki 96 97 EEff86e0 funci 98 EEff86e3 func2 99 100 End user code Do not edit comme R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 228 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 21 Editor Panel When Code Coverage Measurement Result Is Displayed 88 void main void 89 ei Start user code Do not edit cor W o T 92 fffre dl sp RB 93 EEff36d4 94 Efff86da7 95 ffffs da 4 50150 97 Efff86e0 funci 98 Efff86e3 func2 99 100 End user code Do not edit comme This section describes the following How to open Description of each area File menu Editor panel dedicated items Edit menu Editor panel dedicated items Window menu Editor panel dedicated items Context menu How to open Automatically opens after downloading the load module file with debug information
231. ange the notation of a data value are displayed aut Displays the value of the selected watch expression in the default notation see Table A 10 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default according the type of variable default B Displays the value of the selected item in hexadecimal number Displays the value of the selected item in signed decimal number Displays the value of the selected item in unsigned decimal number Displays the value of the selected item in octal number Bin Displays the value of the selected item in binary number Displays the value of the selected item in ASCII code DDoe D 5 Displays the value of the selected item in Float Note that this item becomes valid only when the selected watch expression value is 4 byte data Displays the value of the selected item in Double Note that this item becomes valid only when the selected watch expression value is 8 byte data Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value of the selected item except the item displayed in hexadecimal number R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 288 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File menu Watch panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Watch panel other items are common to all the panels Note that all these items are inval
232. ard Notation Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the form in which values are displayed AutoSelect Displays values on this panel in per variable predetermined notation default Hexadecimal Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal Decimal Displays values on this panel in decimal Octal Displays values on this panel in octal Binary Displays values on this panel in binary Decimal Notation for Array Index Displays array indexes on this panel is decimal default Hexadecimal Notation for Array Index Displays array indexes on this panel is hexadecimal Float Displays values on this panel in Float Note that non 4 byte data and data with type information are displayed in default notation Double Displays values on this panel in Double Note that non 8 byte data and data with type information are displayed in default notation Include Hexadecimal Value Adds the hexadecimal equivalent in bracket at the end of the value Encoding Shows the following cascaded menu to specify character code ASCII Displays string variables in ASCII code Shift_JIS Displays string variables in Shift_JIS code default EUC JP Displays string variables in EUC JP code UTF 8 Displays string variables in UTF 8 code UTF 16 Displays string variables in UTF 16 code Jump to Memory R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 201
233. area 1 Search Data area Specify the data to search Enter directly in the text box specifiable in up to 256 bytes or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries If the subject of search is in the Memory value area of the Memory panel the data needs to be entered in the same form numeral system and size as displayed in that area Also the subject of search is in the Character string area it is necessary to specify a character string as the data to search The specified character string before being searched is converted to data in appropriate encode form in which data are displayed in that area Note that if any memory value was selected immediately before this dialog box was opened then the selected value is displayed by default 2 Search Range area Select a range in which to search from the drop down list below Specify address range A search is conducted within the address range specified by Address area Memory mapping A search is conducted within the selected range of memory mapping This list item displays memory mappings individually except non mapped areas that are displayed in the Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator Display form lt Memory type gt lt Address range gt lt Size gt R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 340 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Address area This item is valid only when Specify Add
234. ariables 275 281 Pop up display of variables 235 Port Setting dialog box 375 Power down mode 168 Print Address Range Settings dialog box 342 Print Preview window 400 Printf 306 307 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 stENESAS Page 423 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX C INDEX Printf event 151 167 168 330 Priority section 75 76 Progress Status dialog box 382 Project Tree panel 193 Prolog of functions 275 Property panel 196 Connect Settings tab 199 Debug Tool Settings tab 209 Download File Settings tab 223 Hook Transaction Settings tab 226 Pseudo RRM 98 R Rapid build function 69 Realtime display update function 98 118 Real time RAM monitor 122 Realtime RAM monitor function 98 Register Action Event 151 153 Register variables 275 Registering a watch expression 279 Reset 98 141 Reset event 164 354 Reset microcontroller CPU 78 Return out execution 81 189 RRM Real time RAM Monitor 98 RRM function 167 Run Break time 141 Run Break Timer 306 307 Run Break Timer event 142 305 S Save As dialog box 402 Save Settings dialog box 336 Scope selection 111 Scroll Range Settings dialog box 376 Select Data Save File dialog box 404 Select Download File dialog box 396 Selecting blocks 236 Sequential 93 163 Set
235. ariables in UTF 16 code 2 Changing the contents of local variables The values of local variables and parameter values can be edited Select the value of the subject local variable or the value of parameters to it in the Value area and click on it again The selected value is placed in edit mode Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode Enter a value directly from the keyboard and then hit the Enter key The value you ve changed is written into the debug tool s target memory At this time CubeSuite checks the value to see if it fits to type If inappropriate the editing you ve done is ignored Caution This operation cannot be performed during program execution Remarks 1 Ifthe numeral entered for a variable is smaller than the size of the variable its high order digits are padded with zeroes 2 Ifthe numeral entered for a variable is larger than the size of the variable its high order digits are masked 3 For character arrays char type or unsigned char type if ASCII is selected for the display form it is possible to use character strings ASCII Shift_JIS EUC JP or Unicode UTF 8 UTF 16 to enter values R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 112 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 4 Local variables can also be entered using ASCII characters When using ASCII characters to enter values Enter the letter A in the Value area for the variable ch gt gt The numeral 0x41 i
236. as those that use data flash P E mode Caution You cannot change this property while connected to E1 Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Specify whether to execute a specified routine before executing the user program Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution Routine to run immediately before execution starts Specify the address to be executed immediately before the user program execution This property is displayed only when Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program property is set to Yes Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Specify whether to execute a specified routine after the user program break Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution Routine to run immediately after execution stops Specify the address to be executed immediately after the user program break This property is displayed only when Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops property is set to Yes Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution e Trace You can configure the trace function in this category Figure 2 20 Trace Category E Trace Operation after trace memory is full Overwrite trace memory and continue executi
237. assembled data The Data Save dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Disassemble Data As and the contents of this panel can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv See 5 Saving the displayed contents of disassembled results for details on the method for saving the contents of disassembled data Toolbar E Acquires the latest data from the debug tool and updates the contents of this panel E Sets to the mixed display mode and displays the correspondence between the disassembled data and the source text default BI Specifies the caret position so that it follows the current PC value es Moves the caret to the define position of the selected symbol B Moves the caret to the position address immediately before it is moved with the button View The following buttons to set the display contents in the disassemble area are displayed a Displays the offset value of the label The offset value from the nearest label is displayed when a label is defined for the address pil Displays the address value in the format symbol offset value default Note that when a symbol has been defined as the address value only the symbol is displayed E3 Opens the Scroll Range Settings dialog box to set the scroll range R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 256 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE File menu Disass
238. ast expression Value of the pointer to a member variable Watch expression gt Cast expression Value of the pointer to a member variable Watch Expression Value of a pointer variable amp Watch Expression Location address Type name Watch expression Value cast into a specified type Name of a CPU register Value of the CPU register I O register name I O register value Label name te 3 EQU symbol nameN te 3 and immediate value Values of a label an EQU symbol and immediate address Integer constant Integer constant value Floating constant Floating constant value Character constant Character constant value C89 C99 or C language variables 2 When using a member variable of a base class specify the scope before the member name e g variable BaseClass member 3 If the label name or EQU symbol name includes a be sure to enclose the name in Example Label Any imaginary number must be multiplied by an uppercase I e g 1 0 2 0 1 When you specify the CPU register name I add REG e g REG to distinguish it from the keyword I Watch expressions can be registered with specifying the scope The scope specifications with watch expression registration are as follows R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 282 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Table A 6 Scope
239. atch expression belonging to this category is hidden When you double click on the icon or click on the mark the category is opened and the watch expression is displayed Indicates that the watch expression is a variable The mark is shown at the top of each watch expression that represents an array pointer type variable structure union class or register Click the mark to Expand shrink display Indicates that the watch expression is a function Indicates that the watch expression is an immediate value Indicates that the watch expression is an expression Indicates that the watch expression is an I O register Indicates that the watch expression is a CPU register The mark is shown at the top of each watch expression that has the lower level register part of the register Click the mark to Expand shrink display This area is provided with the following functions a Tree editing Watch expressions can be categorized by folders and displayed in the tree view To create a category click the a button on the toolbar or select Create Category from the context menu after moving the caret to the position to create a category and then input a desired name from the keyboard To delete a category select the category then click the button on the toolbar or select Delete from the context menu To rename the created category select the category then do either one of the following Cli
240. ate the clock while the internal flash memory is being rewritten When Yes is selected any clock setting outside the guaranteed range of microcontroller operation will be modified by E1 to be in accord with the specified limits for reprogramming internal flash memory c Connection with Emulator You can configure the connection between E1 and the host machine in this category Caution You cannot change the property in this category while connected to E1 Figure 2 11 Connection with Emulator Category E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E1 XXXXXXXXX lt 1 gt Emulator serial No Serial numbers of all connected E1 emulators are displayed in the drop down list Select the one to be connected to the target system The drop down list is updated every time it is used d Connection with Target Board You can configure the connection between E1 and the target board in this category Figure 2 12 Connection with Target Board Category E1 Serial E Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator MAX 200m4 Yes FINE baud rate bps 2000000 Figure 2 13 Connection with Target Board Category E1 JTAG E Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator MAs 200mA4 No JTAG clock MHz 16 5 lt 1 gt Power target from the emulator MAX 200mA Specify whether to supply power to the target system from E1 Select Yes to supply power to the target system No is selected by default
241. ated to the timer Trace Event Displays events related to the trace Action Event Displays events related to the action event Printf event Built in Event Displays events related to the built in event Unconditional Trace event Run Break Timer event Timer Settings The following cascade menus are displayed to do the settings related to the timer However this item is valid only when a timer related event has been selected Init Timer Initializes the timer used by the selected event except for the Run Break Timer Nanosecond Displays the Timer Results of the selected event in nanosecond units Microsecond Displays the Timer Results of the selected event in microsecond units Millisecond Displays the Timer Results of the selected event in millisecond units Second Displays the Timer Results of the selected event in second units Minute Displays the Timer Results of the selected event in minute units Jump to Memory Opens the Memory panel Memory1 and jumps to the memory corresponding to the address where the selected eventNotet is being set Jump to Disassemble Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 and jumps to the disassemble results corresponding to the address where the selected eventNotet is being set Jump to Source Opens the Editor panel and jumps to the source line corresponding to the addre
242. ave their scope specification automatically given 3 Value area This area displays or changes I O register values The notation numeral representation in which values are displayed can be selected using the appropriate toolbar button or selecting from the context menu Also it is possible to select a display form that always adds hexadecimal equivalents to the ordinary display The meaning of marks displayed as I O register values and their colors are as follows The colors in which text and backgrounds are displayed depend on how the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box is set Example display default Description Text color Blue The value of the I O register that the user is changing press the Enter key to write to the target memory Background color Standard color Text color Brown The value of the I O register that has been changed because of the execution of a program To reset the highlighting select the button on the toolbar or Reset Color from the context menu Background color Cream Text color Gray Values of I O registers protected against read Note Background color Standard color Note This refers to the I O registers that get the microcontroller actuated by a read operation To read the value of read protected I O register select Force Read Value from the context menu Caution The 1 byte or 2 byte I O registers and the 1 bit I O registers mapped to those 1
243. bit counter x 1 channel Overflow detection available Simulator Depends on CPU clock frequency Depends on CPU clock frequency R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 147 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 15 Measure Coverage Simulator This section describes coverage measurements that are conducted using the coverage facility There are several kinds of coverage measurement methods Of these CubeSuite performs in areas designated below a code coverage measurement of fetch related operations on source lines and functions CO coverage and a data coverage measurement of access related operations on variables The areas in which CubeSuite performs coverage measurements are as follows Table 2 18 Subject Areas of Coverage Measurements Debug Tool Subject area Internal ROM RAM emulation ROM RAM Remark CO coverage refers to an instruction coverage rate statement coverage For example if all instructions statements in code are executed at least once then CO 100 2 15 1 Configure the coverage measurement To use the coverage facility it is necessary to make coverage measurement related settings in advance Make settings in the Coverage Simulator category on the Debug Too Settings tab on the Property panel Figure 2 136 Coverage Category Simulator E Coverage Use coverage function Yes Reuse coverage result No 1 Use coverage function Specify by a dr
244. bit width and ASCII code 00000000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 COO 0141444149414 109419191919 41 11 10 paiia 00000020 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 mu 00000030 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 3333333333333333 Remark If panel contents are saved over an existing file by selecting Save Memory Data on File menu the respective Memory panels Memory 4 are handled individually Also sa to the save range the previously specified address range is applied when data is saved R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 105 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 2 Displaying and changing the CPU registers Use the CPU Register panel below to display the contents of CPU registers general and control registers or change the register values Choose CPU Register from the View menu For details on how to read each area and details about their functionality see the section where the CPU Register panel is described Figure 2 106 Displaying the CPU Register Contents CPU Register Panel CPU Register Toolbar Notationy Hex iff control Registers ISP 0x00001838 E usp 0x000016d48 INTE Oxffff8154 E rce Oxffff8E44 HEJ Psw 0x00120004 E BPC 0x00000000 E BPSW 0x00000000 E FINTY 0x00000000 I I Register Name area Value area Following methods of operation are described here 1 Changing the
245. ble in file or I O register see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Show Trace Result Opens the Trace panel and displays the acquired trace data Trace Settings Opens the Property panel to set the trace function Timer Settings E1 E20 The following cascade menus are displayed to set the timer related event see 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section E1 E20 Note that events can be set only for lines for which events can be set see 6 Event area Start timer Sets a Start Timer event to start measuring the execution time of the program when the line at caret is executedNotet see a How to set a timer start event Stop timer Sets a Stop Timer event to stop measuring the execution time of the program when the line at caret is executed te 1 see b How to set a timer end event Set Timer Start R W Value Sets a timer start event that causes a measurement of the program s execution time to start upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or I O register see a How to set a timer start event Set Timer lt N gt Specify a channelNote 2 in which a timer start event is set Set Timer End R W Value R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Sets a timer end event that causes a measurement of the program s execution time to finish upo
246. bol name is displayed in the address R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 257 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Break Settings APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The following cascade menus are displayed to set the break related event Note that breakpoints can be set only for lines for which events can be set see 1 Event area Set Hardware Break Sets a breakpoint Hardware Break event to the address at the caret position see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint Set Software Break E1 E20 Sets a breakpoint Software Break event to the address at the caret position see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint Set Read Break to Simulator Sets a break event with read access condition to the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable I O register see 1 Seta break event access type to a variable I O register Set Write Break to Simulator Sets a break event with write access condition to the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable I O register see 1 Set a break event access type to a variable I O register Set R W Break to Simulator Sets a break event with read write access condition to the address at the caret or the selected variable
247. bug menu in the Main window where commands to control the execution of programs are included Caution Items in the debug toolbar and the Debug menu will be disabled once the connection with the debug tool is lost Figure 2 83 Debug Toolbar Figure 2 84 Debug Menu Debug Ay Download qa Build amp Download F6 egi Connect to Debug Too Upload Stop Shift F dt Disconnect from Debug Tool Shift F6 a G F5 lenore break and go FS S Step In F11 G Step Over F10 Return Out Shift F11 Ie CPU Reset Ctri F5 wy Restart 2 9 1 Reset microcontroller CPU To reset CPU click the button on the debug toolbar When CPU is reset the current PC value is set to the reset address Remark You can automatically overwrite the value of I O register CPU register with the specified values after CPU reset see 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process for details 2 9 2 Execute programs The following types of CubeSuite execution functions are provided Select any of the following operations according to the purpose of debugging See 2 10 Stop Programs Break for details on how to stop the program in execution 1 Execute after resetting microcontroller CPU 2 Execute from the current address R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 78 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Execute after changing PC value Remark You can automatically overwrite the value of I O r
248. button that appears at right by selecting each property you cannot specify the process directly on this panel Caution Up to 64 characters for one process and up to 128 processes for each property can be set one line in the Text area in the Text Edit dialog box is equivalent to one processing Before download Specify the process to proceed right before downloading Default Before download 0 is the current number of specified processes How to Specify with the Text Edit dialog box change Format Either one of the following O register name space Value Process Automatically overwrites the value of I O register with Value CPU register name space Value Process Automatically overwrites the value of CPU register with Value source Python script path Process Automatically executes a script file specified with Python script path R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 226 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 After download Specify the APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE process to proceed right after downloading Default After downloaa 0 is the current number of specified processes How to change Specify with the Text Edit dialog box Format Either one of the following I O register name space Value Process Automatically overwrites the value of I O register with Value CPU register name space Value Process Automatically overwrites
249. byte 0 Beginning address of 2 output buffer Parameters Beginning address of output buffer input Beginning address of the output buffer that contains output data Detailed Description Outputs 1 byte to standard output Example IO_BUF R2 Set the address of the output buffer in R2 R1 R2 Set the value of R1 output character in the output buffer 1220000h R1 Set the function code of PUTC in R1 PARM R3 Set the address of the parameter block in R3 R2 R3 Set the address of the output buffer in the output buffer R3 R2 Set the value of R3 address of the parameter block in R2 SIM_IO R3 Set the address of the system call in R3 R3 System call Return to the address where the function was called SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 1 Parameter block area SECTION B_1 DATA BLKL 1 Input output buffer R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 409 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS Opens a file Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Execution result File number 2 Open mode Unused 4 Beginning address of 6 file name Parameters Parameter Description Execution result output 0 Terminated normally 1 Error File number output Number that is used for access to files after the open process Op
250. ccess Controller and DTC Data Transfer Controller are not supported 2 Simulator If either one of the point trace events set is Enabled the Usage of trace function property in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab has its specification automatically changed to Yes with the trace function enabled a For access to a variable or I O register in the source text or disassembled text Perform this operation in the Editor panel Disassemble panel in which the source text disassembly text is displayed Select the variable or I O register as the subject to access and according to the access type you specify perform the following operation from the context menu However the variables you can select are only global variables static variables in function or static variables in file Note that when you have performed this operation it is interrupted as if a point trace event has been set for the selected variable or I O register and it is managed on the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management Access Type Operation Read Write Select Record Reading Value from Trace Settings Write Select Record Writing Value from Trace Settings Read write Select Record R W Value from Trace Settings Remark Only the variables in current scope are selectable b For access to a registered watch expression Perform this operation on the Watch panel Select the watch expression as the subject to
251. ch expression and it is managed in the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management for details Access Type Operation E1 E20 Select Access Break gt gt Set Read Combination Break to and then press the Enter key Simulator Select Access Break gt gt Set Read Break to and then press the Enter key If you have specified a value in the text box in the menu break will occur only when the specified value is used for the reading On the other hand if no value is specified reading the selected watch expression by any value will cause the break to occur E1 E20 Select Access Break gt gt Set WriteCombination Break to and then press the Enter key Simulator Select Access Break gt gt Set Write Break to and then press the Enter key If you have specified a value in the text box in the menu break will occur only when the specified value is used for the writing On the other hand if no value is specified writing the selected watch expression by any value will cause the break to occur Read Write E1 E20 Select Access Break gt gt Set R W Combination Break to and then press the Enter key Simulator Select Access Break gt gt Set R W Break to and then press the Enter key If you have specified a value in the text box in the menu break will occur only when the specified value is used for the reading writing On the other hand if no value is specified reading wr
252. cifiable Use Peripheral function simulation module is used value Not Peripheral function simulation module is not used Use Display Main item content Number of usable peripheral function simulation modules Sub items Peripheral function simulation module name Usage status of peripheral function simulation module R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 207 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Peripheral clock rate Specify the ratio of peripheral clock to internal clock how many internal clocks one peripheral clock is equivalent Default 1 How to change By selecting from the drop down list Specifiable value One of the following as selected from the drop down list 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 64 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 208 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Debug Tool Settings tab This tab is used to display the detailed information categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed 1 2 1 Memory 2 Access Memory While Running 3 Break E1 E20 4 System E1 E20 5 Trace 6 Timer E1 E20 7 Coverage Simulator 8 Stream O Simulator 9 Execution Mode Simulator 10 Instruction Decode Cache Simulator Figure A 10 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab E1 Serial RX600 Series
253. cifying the source line is selected The character string specified here is searched from within the Line Address area of the Trace panel Enter a character string included in the source line to search directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case insensitive and partial matches are also allowed Examples 1 main c 40 2 main c 3 main Function Name This item is enabled only when The execution part is retrieved specifying the function is selected Enter a variable name to search directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case sensitive and only perfect matches are allowed Variable Name This item is enabled only when The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable is selected Enter a variable name to search directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case sensitive and only perfect matches are allowed Kind This item is enabled only when The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable is selected Select the type of access Reference Substitution default Reference or Substitution from the drop down list Value This item is enabled only when The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable is selected Use a hexadecimal n
254. ck operation of the mouse is set as a software breakpoint this is reflected in the setting of the First using type of breakpoint property in the Break E1 E20 category from the Debug Tool Settings tab on the Property panel c Changing the status of breakpoints via the menu The events status can be changed from the following menu displayed by right clicking the event mark Enable Breakpoint Changes the selected breakpoint state to an Enabled state Event occurs when the specified condition is met When the event mark FS which indicates that multiple events have been set is selected all of the breakpoints that have been set are enabled Disable Breakpoint Changes the selected breakpoint state to a Disabled state Event does not occur when the specified condition is met When the event mark FS which indicates that multiple events have been set is selected all of the breakpoints that have been set are disabled R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 233 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Delete Breakpoint Deletes the selected breakpoint When the event mark ff which indicates that multiple events have been set is selected all of the breakpoints that have been set are deleted View Details in Event Panel Opens the Events panel to display the detailed information of the selected event d Pop up display By hovering the mouse cursor over the Event mark
255. ck the name again then directly rename the category name Select the Edit menu gt gt Rename then directly rename the category name Press the F2 key then directly rename the category name By directly dragging and dropping the registered watch expression in the created category each category is displayed in the categorized tree view Also the display order of the categories and the watch expressions upper or lower position can be changed easily by drag and drop operation Cautions 1 Categories cannot be created within categories 2 Up to 64 categories can be created in one watch panel if this restriction is violated a message appears Remark Drag and drop the watch expressions categories in other watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 to copy them R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 280 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Expand shrink display At the top of the watch expression represents arrays pointer type variables structures unions classes and registers with the name of the part mark is displayed Click the mark to expand the contents mark is changed to Watch Expression after the expansion Contents When Expanded All elements in the array Select Encoding gt gt ASCII from the context menu to display the value as a string up to 256 characters Note however that any characters that cannot be displayed in the encoding will be
256. clipboard Select All Selects all of the messages displayed on the currently selected tab Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Quick Find tab selected Replace Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Replace in Files tab selected Context menu Copy Copies a selected character string to the clipboard Select All Selects all of the messages displayed on the currently selected tab Clear Clears all of the messages displayed on the currently selected tab Tag Jump Opens the Editor panel with control jumping to the relevant line number in the file pertaining to the message at the caret position Stop Searching Halts the search currently under execution However this menu is disabled when no searches are being executed Help for Message Displays help for a message at the current caret position However this menu applies to only warning and error messages R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 317 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Debug Console panel This panel exchanges data between the console and program This is accomplished by executing a program which has standard library functions implemented in it Note that this panel can be opened only when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Figure A 38 Debug Console Panel Debug Console This section describes the following How to open Des
257. connect a target board too You can make a choice between FINE communications E1 Serial and JTAG communications E1 JTAG as the communication method to the target system see 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use See E1 User s Manual for details on the connection method Figure 2 1 Connection Example E1 Sesa n PS l Q r oe Dedicated probe go USB interface cable D or Host machine E1 CubeSuite Target system R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 12 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 E20 Connect a host machine and E20 If required connect a target board too You can make a choice between FINE communications E20 Serial and JTAG communications E20 JTAG as the communication method to the target system see 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use See E20 User s Manual for details on the connection method Figure 2 2 Connection Example E20 JTAG eq e a ji Dedicated probe A USB interface cable Host machine E20 CubeSuite Target System Figure 2 3 Connection Example E20 Serial fc y Ta e O gt Dedicated probe r ai t A USB interface cable Host machine D 38 pin to 14 pin Not E20 conversion adapter ote CubeSuite Target system Note Use a 38 pin to 14 pin conversion adapter attached to the E20 emulator if you have selected FINE E20 Serial as the method of communication with the target s
258. correct Remark The real time display update function is materialized by the debug tool s RRM Real time RAM Monitor pseudo RRM and DMM Dynamic Memory Modification functions The pseudo RRM function temporarily momentarily breaks program execution to perform reads writes by means of software emulation The subject area to and from which you can write and read using the realtime display update function varies depending on how the debug tool you use and the Property panel are set Referring to the set contents of respective properties in the Access Memory While Running and Trace categories on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel shown below make settings in Table 2 9 through Table 2 11 according to the purpose of use of the realtime display update function Usage of trace function Real time RAM monitor E20 JTAG RX600 Series Mark Properties in Access Memory While Setting Value Note Running Category Access by stopping execution by stopping execution No default RRM DMM functions enabled Enable the automatic update of realtime Yes default E20 JTAG RX600 Series display c Access by stopping execution Access by stopping execution stopping execution Pseudo RRM function enables epe display during Update display during the execution execution Yes defaut Yes defaut Display update interval ms Integer number between 100 and 65500 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS P
259. cription of each area Edit menu Debug Console panel only items Context menu How to open Select Debug Console from the View menu Description of each area 1 Input output area The standard library functions implemented in the program include for example the scanf function for reading the data entered from the keyboard and the printf function for outputting data Also by specifying a COM port on the panel it is possible to redirect standard input output of the program to the specified COM port To use this function the program must have the low level interface routines provided by the debug tool implemented in it see 2 19 Using the Debug Console Remark Simulator For details about the input output functions provided by the simulator see APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS Edit menu Debug Console panel only items The Edit menu items provided exclusively on the Debug Console panel are as follows The other items are shared Copy Copies a selected character string to the clipboard Paste Inserts the content of the clipboard into the caret position Select All Selects all of the character strings displayed on this panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 318 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Copy Copies a selected character string to the clipboard Paste Inserts the content of the clipboard into t
260. cs products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics How to Use This Manual This manual describes the role of the CubeSuite integrated development environment for developing applications and systems for RX family and provides an outline of its features CubeSuite is an integrated development environment IDE for RX family integrating the necessary tools for the development phase of software e g design implementation and debugging into a single platform By providing an integrated environment it is possible to perform all development using just this product without the need to use many different tools separately Readers Purpose Organization How to Read This Manual Conventions This manual is intended for users who wish to understand the functions of the CubeSuite and design software and hardware application systems This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions of the CubeSuite to use for reference in developing the hardware or software of systems using these devices This manual can be broadly divided into the following units CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX B_ INPUT OUTPUT FU
261. ction Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Execution result File number 2 Direction Unused 4 6 Offset Parameters Execution result output 0 Terminated normally 1 Error File number input Number that is returned when a file is opened Direction input 0 Offset in bytes from the beginning of a file 1 Offset in bytes from the current file pointer 2 Offset in bytes from the tail end of a file Offset input Number of bytes from the position specified by direction Detailed Description Moves the file pointer to a specified position R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 417 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS Example R2 R5 PARM R2 R5 4h 5 R2 R1 1h 5 R2 R3 2h 5 R2 010C0000h R1 SIM_IO R5 R5 PARM R1 RL RI SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 2 Set the value of R2 offset in R5 Set the address of the parameter block in R2 Set the value of R5 in R1 4 bytes offset Set the value of R1 offset file number in R1 1 bytes Set the value of R3 direction in R2 2 bytes direction Set the function code of FSEEK in R1 Set the address of the system call in R5 System call Set the address of the parameter block in R1 Set the first byte of R1 result of execution in Rl Return to the addr
262. ction is executed Stop BRK instruction is executed 10 gt amp Instruction Decode Cache Cache the results of decoding instructions and accelerate simulation Memory mappings For the addition and deletion of memory mapping select the button and make the desired change in the memory mapping dialog box The additions and deletions other than emulation ROM RAM area are not possible Connect Settings hic g 1g Download File Settings Hook Transaction Settings Description of each category 1 Memory The detailed information on memories is displayed and its configuration can be changed For details on memory types that are displayed see the Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator Memory mappings Current memory mapping status is displayed by the types of memory areaNote i Default Total number of the memory mapping types How to Simulator change Specify with the Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator The Memory Mapping dialog box is opened when clicking the button appears at right by selecting the mapping value you cannot change the mapping value on this panel Display Displays the memory mapping status by the types of memory area Contents The following detailed information is displayed by clicking the mark of each memory type Memory type Start address End address Access width bits E1 E20 Note 2 Note 3 Note 2 Endian R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS P
263. cute Programs When an instruction for which a timer start event or timer end event has been set is executed a timer measurement is started or finished After execution of the program has stopped the measurement result can be confirmed as a timer measurement event on the Events panel that is opened by choosing Event from the View menu as shown below Note that this timer measurement event is a particular type of event that is displayed on only the Events panel when either a timer start event or a timer end event has been set Figure 2 135 Example of the Result of Measurement by Timer Measurement Event Timer Start and End Events xoga g Name Detail Information Unconditional Trace A M 9 Timer Result Total 1500 ns Start End 2 Total Pass Count Average Max Min 1500 ns 1 1500 ns 1500 ns 1500 ns Detail Information Start Execution main c 104 Ox2f End Execution main c 113 0x301 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 145 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Editing a timer measurement event To edit detailed information on a timer measurement event that has had start and end events set use the Detailed Settings of Timer Measurement dialog box E1 E20 This dialog box is opened by selecting the event to be edited on the Events panel and then selecting Edit Condition on context menu a To edit a measurement item In the Detailed settings of Timer Measurement dialo
264. cution of a program Opens the Trace Search dialog box The following buttons to change the notation of a data value are displayed This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal number default Displays values on this panel in decimal number Displays values on this panel in octal number Displays values on this panel in binary number Links with the Editor panel Links with the Disassemble panel Sets to the Mixed display mode as the display mode default This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Sets to the Disassemble display mode as the display mode This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Sets to the Source display mode as the display mode This item becomes invalid during execution of a program File menu Trace panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Trace panel other items are common to all the panels Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Save Trace Data Overwrites the contents of this panel to the previously saved text file txt CSV file csv see e Saving trace data Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is write disabled the same operation is applied as the selection in Save Trace Data As Save Trace Data As Opens the Data Save dialog box to
265. cution of a program Build amp Download Jump to Function Jumps to the function that is selected or at the caret position regarding the selected characters and the words at the caret position as functions see 4 Jump to functions Tag Jump Jumps to the corresponding line and column in the corresponding file if the information of a file name a line number and a column number exists in the line at the caret position see c Tag jump Jump to Disassemble Opens the Disassemble panel and jumps to the address corresponding to the line at the caretNote 1 Note that this item becomes invalid when no corresponding address exists in the line at caret Advanced Displays a cascading menu for performing an advanced operation for the Editor panel Increase Line Indent Increases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Decrease Line Indent Decreases the indentation of the current cursor line by one tab Uncomment Lines Removes the first set of line comment delimiters from the start of the current cursor line appropriate to the current language e g C This operation will only be available when the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Comment Lines Places line comment delimiters at the start of the current cursor line appropriate to the current language e g C This operation will only be available whe
266. d Access by stopping For a memory area not accessible during program execution specify whether access to the area is execution permitted E1 E20 Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes Temporary stops execution and read write value No Does not access to the memory during program execution Update display during Specify whether to update the display in the Watch panel Memory panel during a program the execution execution Default Yes How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes Updates the display during program execution value No Does not update the display during program execution R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 215 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Display update Specify the interval in 100ms unit to update the contents in the Watch panel Memory panel display interval ms while executing a program This property appears only when the Update display during the execution property is set to Yes Default 500 How to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable Integer number between 100 and 65500 rounding up the fractions less than 100 value ms Enable the automatic Specify whether RRM area is automatically set update of realtime Note that this property is displayed only when Realtime RAM Monitor is specified in the Us
267. d True for all access sizes Byte The specified access size is a byte Word The specified access size is a word Long word The specified access size is a long word R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 368 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Compare condition APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify data compare condition This property is not displayed when No conditions is specified in the Access size property Default Equal Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Equal True when data matches specified value Not equal True when data does not match specified value Inverse sign True when the sign is inverted between the previously accessed data and the data accessed this tim e Note1 Difference True when the difference between the previously accessed data and the data accessed this time exceeds a specified value Notet Greater than gt True when data is greater than specified value Less than lt True when data is smaller than specified value Greater than or equal to gt True when data is equal to or greater than specified value Less than or equal to lt True when data is equal to or smaller than specified value Inside the range lt Values lt True when data is within the range of specified value Compare data1
268. d x Point trace x Timer result timer start timer end x Action Printf event Note1 Note2 A Action Interrupt event Possible Impossible during tracer timer execution Not supported Impossible Internal RAM area only Events cannot be set while the emulator is in a power down mode 3 Other precautions No events can be set to local variables Here is the method for doing it When debug information is available Possible if program execution is momentarily halted by selecting Go to Here from the context menu No events occur during single stepping including Return out as well as during program execution actuated If the program to be debugged is downloaded again and the position at which some existing event is set happens as a consequence of it to be in the middle of an instruction the relevant event needs to be reset The event set position always moves to the beginning of source text lines When no debug information is available The position depends on how the Automatic change method of event setting position property in the Download category on the Property panel s Download File Settings tab is set R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 168 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process This section describes how to set up hooks in the debug tool by using the hook transaction
269. d see the section explaining each tab for details on the display setting on the tab Connect Settings tab Debug Tool Settings tab Download File Settings tab Hook Transaction Settings tab Edit menu Property panel dedicated items Undo Undoes the latest property value editing being done Cut Deletes the selected character string s and copies them to the clipboard while editing the property value Copy Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the property value while editing the property value Delete Deletes the selected character string s while editing the property value Select All Selects all the character strings in the selected property while editing the property value Context menu While not editing the property value Reset to Default Restores the selected setting of the property item to default value Reset All to Default Restores all the selected settings of the property items on the tab to default value R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 197 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE While editing the property value Undoes the latest property value editing being done Cut Deletes the selected character string s and copies them to the clipboard while editing the property value Copy Copies the contents of the selected ran
270. d address Priority section Cautions 1 The contents of overlay section related settings are not saved in a project file After downloading the load module reset the section to be debugged 2 The information changed by an alteration of the Priority Section item is only debug information The debugger does not copy data of the subject section R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 225 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Hook Transaction Settings tab This tab is used to display the detailed information categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed For details on the hook transaction see 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process 1 Hook Transaction Settings Figure A 19 Property Panel Hook Transaction Settings Tab Property Sl AX E20 JTAG Property Before download Before download 0 After download After download 0 After CPU reset under breaking After CPU reset under breaking 0 Before running Before running Q After breaking After breaking 0 Hook Transaction Settings Connect Settings Debug Tool Settings 4 Download File Setti A Hook Transactio A Description of each category 1 Hook Transaction Settings The detailed information on the hook transaction is displayed and its configuration can be changed Note that the properties on this tab can be specified via the Text Edit dialog box which is opened by clicking the
271. d end address However searchable addresses are limited to the upper limit address of the program space OxFFFFFFFF Also no address values can be specified that are greater than the value representable in 32 bits Remarks 1 By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function 2 Ifthe start address text box is blank address 0x0 is assumed R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 102 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS d 3 Ifthe end address text box is blank the upper limit address of the microcontroller s address space is assumed Clicking the Search Backward and Search Forward buttons If you click the Search Backward button a search is conducted in the direction toward smaller addresses within the specified range and the searched spot shown on Memory panel is in a selected state If you click the Search Forward button a search is conducted in the direction toward larger addresses within the specified range and the searched spot shown on Memory panel is in a selected state 6 Collectively changing initializing memory contents Memory values can be changed collectively initialized Selecting Fill on context menu opens the Memory Initialize dialog box that permits you to change memory values in a specified address range collectively In this dialog box follow t
272. d from the drop down list value Single chip mode or user boot mode Register setting Specify the operation mode set by registers Default Single chip mode How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable One of the following as selected from the drop down list Note 1 value Single chip mode internal ROM enabled extension mode or internal ROM disabled extension mode Note 2 Endian Displays the project s endian Default Little endian data How to For the build amp debug tool change Not changeable For the debug tool only By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable One of the following as selected from the drop down list value Little endian data or big endian data Notes 1 The specifiable operation mode differs with each selected microcontroller 2 If a microcontroller with an MDE pin is selected be sure that the project s endian and the microcontroller s MDE pin state match If endians are different the project and microcontroller cannot be connected correctly R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 206 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 8 External Flash E1 E20 Displays detailed information on external flash or changes settings made in it External flash definition Specify an ex
273. d hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document but R
274. d location is displayed Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function Note that the output result format by the Printf event in the Output panel are as follows Figure A 44 Output Result Format of Printf Event Specified characters Variable expression 1 Value 1 Variable expression 2 Value 2 Variable expression 3 Value 3 Specified characters Characters specified with Output string Variable expression 1 10 Characters specified with Variable expression Value 1 10 Function buttons Value of variable corresponds to Variable expression 1 10 The value is displayed in a format that matches the variable type see Table A 10 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default will be displayed when the specified variable expression cannot be acquired The value is also displayed in hexadecimal in bracket If a hexadecimal value cannot be displayed will be shown instead Button Function OK Finishes configuring the Printf event and sets it at the caret position in the Editor panel Disassemble panel Cancel Cancels the Printf event setup and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 332 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW R
275. d of multiple registers the value of the subject variable cannot be displayed correctly Example 1 long long data 0x123456789abcdef0 A case where the variable data is mapped to the registers R7 and R8 Example 2 struct aaa char a short b long c char d R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 50 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS struct aaa sA S 0x4154 0x4E455452 D A case where the variable sA is mapped to the registers R7 and R8 If a variable is deleted as a result of optimization by the compiler the subject variable cannot be referred to in the debugger If a variable is temporarily mapped to a register as a result of optimization by the compiler the value of the variable may not be displayed correctly on the Watch panel etc To change the download files or set the download conditions applied at download time use the Download Files dialog box shown below The Download Files dialog box is opened by clicking the button that is displayed at the right edge in the column of the Download files property when you select it in the Download category on the Property panel s Download File Settings tab Figure 2 59 Opening the Download Files Dialog Box E Download Download files fi GPU Reset after download Yes Erase flash ROM before download No Automatic change method of event setting position Suspend event Figure 2 60 An Applied Method of Download Dow
276. d routine 81 Execute programs 78 Execute programs in steps 80 Execution only once 146 356 Execution related event 126 158 External flash memory 20 57 External flash memory dialog box 392 F Features 8 File input output 406 File monitor 235 G General Build Debug category 390 General Font and Color category 385 General purpose registers 106 262 Global variable 111 Go to Here 79 167 Go to Line dialog box 378 Go to the Location dialog box 379 H Hardware break 83 166 167 168 306 307 Hex format 50 53 56 Hook transaction 226 Hot plug in connection 45 Hot plug Adapter 45 l I O registers protected against read 270 ID code 19 Initialization data 103 338 Input format of watch expression 282 Input output functions 406 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 422 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX C INDEX FCLOSE 412 FEOF 416 FGETC 413 FOPEN 410 FPUTC 414 FSEEK 417 FTELL 419 GETC 408 PUTC 409 Instruction level debugging 60 Internal static variables 275 Interrupt event 153 167 168 306 307 372 IOR panel 268 J Jump to subroutine instruction 81 L Label 300 Label line 254 Line assembly 70 255 Little endian 104 Load module file 47 Load module format 50 Local
277. d specifying the source line The execution part is retrieved specifying the function The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable Search condition Source and Line Search range Number v This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Select the toolbar button on the Trace panel Choose Find from the context menu on the Trace panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 349 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Search object area Select the subject to search from the option buttons below The execution part is retrieved specifying Searches the specified source for an executed part default the source line Only Source and Line is valid as the search condition The execution part is retrieved specifying Searches the specified function for an executed part the function Only Function Name is valid as the search condition The execution part is retrieved specifying Searches the specified global variable for an accessed location the global variable Only Variable Name Kind and Value are valid as the search condition 2 Search condition area a b c d e Source and Line This item is enabled only when The execution part is retrieved spe
278. d the program necessary to execute an application is called the master This section describes debugging of an application program load module whose code or data in the ROM has been converted into PIC or PID and reallocated to different addresses PIC When the pic option is specified for compilation the PIC function is enabled and the code in the code area P section becomes PIC The PIC always uses PC relative mode to acquire branch destination addresses or function addresses so it can be reallocated to any desired addresses even after linkage PID When the pid option is specified for compilation the PID function is enabled and the data in ROM data areas C C_2 C_1 W W_2 W_1 and L sections becomes PID A program executes relative access to the PID by using the register PID register that indicates the start address of the PID The user can move the PID to any desired addresses by modifying the PID register value even after linkage Remarks 1 For details on the PIC PID function see chapter 7 Startup in CubeSuite for the RX Coding 2 For setting of the PIC PID function by the build tool see Chapter 2 Functions in CubeSuite for the RX Build To start debugging after changing the allocation of a load module whose code or data in the ROM has been converted into PIC or PID take the following steps 1 Add a download file Add the application load module file as a download file for the master see 2 7 1 Changing the
279. ddress compare condition Any other value True when not matched with address compare condition Notes 1 RX200 Series Compare conditions based on an address area are not supported 2 RX600 Series You can specify Address area as the compare condition only to one event 3 The address value to be used as the condition is masked bit wise with a mask value for which 0 is specified Example To set an address condition of 0x1000 to 0x1FFF Address value 0x1000 Mask value 0xF000 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 365 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c Data Condition Access type Specify the type of access Default Read Write Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Read The specified type of access is a read Write The specified type of access is a write Read Write The specified type of access is a read and a write Access size Specify the access size Default No conditions Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values No conditions No access size is specified True for all access sizes Byte The specified access size is a byte Word The specified access size is a word Long word The specified access size is a long word Compare data Specify compare data in hexadecimal Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the ke
280. de 2 2 2 5 ee Displays a selected item in Float However this is valid only when the selected watch expression consists of 4 byte data Displays a selected item in Double However this is valid only when the selected watch expression consists of 8 byte data Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value of a selected item at the end of the value with the equivalent enclosed in parentheses However this information is not added when values are displayed in hexadecimal 6 Changing the contents of watch expressions The values of watch expressions can be edited Double click the value of the watch expression in the Value area that you want to edit and the value you ve clicked is placed in edit mode Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode Edit the value directly from the keyboard and then hit the Enter key The value you ve changed is written into the debug tool s target memory However only the watch expressions that correspond one for one to C variables CPU registers I O registers or assembler symbols can have their values changed Nor can the values of read only I O registers be changed This operation can be taken place while the program is in execution See 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution for details on how to operate it Remarks 1 If the numeral entered for a variable is smaller than the size of the variable its high order digits are
281. definition file 4 Internal ROM RAM f internal ROM KBytes Size of internal RAM KBytes Size of DataFlash memory k Byte Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory No 4 P E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E20 XXXXXXXXX 5 gt Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator MAX 200m4 No Communications method FINE FINE baud rate bps 2000000 Input Mode of ID code Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal ID code Res FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Work RAM start address Fes 1000 Work RAM size bytes 1024 7 gt E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Single chip mode Register setting Single chip mode Endian Little endian data 8 p JE External Flash Extemal flash definition file 4 Internal ROM RAM Connect Settings De etti le Se Hook Transaction Settings ye R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 200 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 8 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab E20 JTAG Property l AX E20UTAG Property 1 gt E Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM KBytes of internal RAM KBytes e of DataFlash memory KBytes Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory No E20 XXXXXXXXX A 200 No Communications
282. details on editing in the dialog box see 3 Editing combination conditions of events E1 E20 Cautions 1 For the combined break settings also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting e g limits on the number of valid events 2 When the combination condition is Sequential break event access type can be specified for the 1st to the 3rd position 3 When the combination condition is Sequential break event access type for which address range condition is set can be specified only for the 1st position Figure 2 96 Example of Setting a Combination Break Sequential in the Event Panel E1 E20 Events a eS Name Detail Comment Unconditional Trace Run Break Timer Not measured M 8 Combination Break Detail After Execution sort c 13 Osffff8Sdd Write g_IntBuf 0x142c 0x142f Oxb Po Read g_CharBuf 01000 0x1000 0455 gt _ 4 After Execution sort c 18 Oxffffe5e7 e 2 10 6 Other break factors Other than the causes described above a program can be stopped by the following break factors You can check such break factors on the Status bar in the Main window Table 2 8 Other break factors Debug Tool to Use Break factors E1 Serial E1 JTAG Simulator E20 Serial E20 JTAG Note 1 Trace memory ful Temporary break occurred R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 93 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Debug Tool
283. dress 2 11 6 Displaying and changing watch expressions C variables CPU registers I O registers and assembler symbols can be registered as watch expressions in the Watch panel shown below That way it is possible to get their values from the debug tool at all times and thereby to keep watch on values Also the watch expressions permit display of values to be updated successively even while the program is under execution see section 7 Displaying and changing the contents of watch expressions during program execution The watch panel is opened by choosing Watch from the View menu and then selecting Watch 1 4 Up to four pieces of watch panels can be opened at a time Each panel is discriminated by the name Watch 1 Watch 2 Watch 3 and Watch 4 in the title bar The respective watch panels have their watch expressions registered and managed individually and saved as user information for the project For details on how to read each area and details about their functionality see the section where the Watch panel is described R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 113 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 112 Displaying the Contents of Watch Expression Watch panel Watch1 Toolbar Watch Value Type Byte Size Address Memo F ano ADDPR IOR 0x00 IOR 1 Ox00088052 l1 Ox00000001 int 4 R6 REG 0Ox00000006 General Registers 4 Ox00000007 General Registers
284. dress expression is changed because of such as a line assembly Remark Itis possible to move outside the scroll range by using the Page Up Page Down Up Down key a button at either end of the scroll bar or a menu item related to the jump function Figure A 62 Scroll Range Settings Dialog Box Scroll Range Settings 1 f Start address 2 J End addresss Function buttons 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Memory panel click the button on the toolbar On the Memory panel select the View menu gt gt Settings Scroll Range from the context menu On the Disassemble panel click the button on the toolbar On the Disassemble panel select the View menu gt gt Settings Scroll Range from the context menu Description of each area 1 Start address area Specify the start address of the range of scrolling You can either type an address expression directly into the text box up to 1024 characters or select it from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items Note that the setting of the scroll range is not performed if All is selected in the drop down list at this time the scroll range is not limited Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion functi
285. dule files downloaded to the debug tool for any changes and display a message when changes are detected to confirm whether to perform the download Do not monitor the load module files downloaded to the debug tool for any changes default 5 Buttons area Initialize Settings Restores all of the currently displayed items to their default state Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all the settings in this dialog box to their default state In the General External Tools category however newly registered contents are not deleted OK Applies changes and closes this dialog box Cancel Nullifies changes and closes this dialog box Apply Applies changes without closing this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 391 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE External flash memory dialog box E1 E20 In this dialog box you can select the external flash definition file USD file to be registered Figure A 72 External flash memory Dialog Box External flash memory Look in O Sample My Recent Documents E Desktop My Documents My Computer File name My Network Files of type J USD files usd Cancel _ Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function butto
286. e 5 Jump to a desired line tag jump Each item of the Debug menu and their functionality are as follows default Download Downloads a specified file to the debug tool currently selected in the active project If CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool at this time it is automatically connected to the debug tool before a download is executed However this item is disabled during program execution or when Build amp Download is under execution Build amp Download Builds a project and executes a download to the debug tool currently selected in the active project after the build is complete If CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool at this time it is automatically connected to the debug tool before a download is executed However if a build fails no download is executed Connect to Debug Tool Connects to the debug tool currently selected in the active project However if already connected with the debug tool this item is disabled Upload Opens the Data Save dialog box to save memory contents to a file However this item is disabled during program execution when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool Hot Plug in E1 JTAG E20 JTAG Hot plugs in to the debug tool currently selected in the active project in order to debug the target system currently under execution see Section 2 4 3 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite
287. e V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Timer Settings The following cascade menus are displayed to set the timer related event see 2 14 3 E1 E20 Measuring execution time in a section E1 E20 Note that events can be set only for lines for which events can be set see 1 Event area Start timer Sets a Start Timer event to start measuring the execution time of the program when an instruction of an address at the caret position is executed see a How to set a timer start event Stop timer Sets a Stop Timer event to stop measuring the execution time of the program when an instruction of an address at the caret position is executed see b How to set a timer end event Set Timer Start R W Value Sets a timer start event that causes a measurement of the program s execution time to start upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or I O register see a How to set a timer start event Set Timer lt N gt Specify a channe Note in which a timer start event is set Set Timer End R W Value Sets a timer end event that causes a measurement of the program s execution time to finish upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or I O register see b How to set a timer end event Set Timer lt N gt
288. e location where this event is set and the value of the variable expression specified in this dialog box is output to the Output panel 3 Check the output result The following figure shows how the value of the specified variable expression is output to the Debug Tool tab of the Output panel see Figure A 44 Output Result Format of Printf Event Figure 2 140 Example of Output Result of Printf Event Sample global_a 10 0xa Stopped by user operation J EOF Variable expression global_a Output string Sample The result of the specification above All Messages Debug Tool 4 Edit Printf event You can edit a Printf event which has already been set When editing click the target Printf event in the Events panel and select Edit the conditions from the context menu This will open the Action Events dialog box in which you can edit the items When finished click OK 2 16 2 Insert an interrupt event Simulator Setting an interrupt event as one of the action events allows you to generate an interrupt at a desired location while the program is running To use this function follow the steps below 1 Set an interrupt event 2 Execute the program 3 Edit interrupt event Caution Also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on action events e g limits on the number of enabled events 1 Set an interrupt event In the Editor panel Disassemble panel set an in
289. e Break0001 tto a b c Remark Itis possible to limit the event to be displayed by clicking the button on the toolbar see Toolbar a Check box The setting state of the event is displayed changed Note that the Event mark is changed depending on the setting state of the event Enabled Event occurs when the specified condition is met It is possible to set the event to an invalid state by removing the check Disabled Event does not occur when the specified condition is met It is possible to set the event to a valid state by removing the check Pending The conditions that have been specified cannot be set with the program of the debugging target It is not possible to operate the check box Remarks 1 Itis not possible to set the Run Break Timer event to an invalid suspended state 2 The setting of the Unconditional Trace event and the Trace event to valid or invalid state is exclusively controlled Therefore the Unconditional Trace event which is a built in event is valid state by default but if either a Start Tracing event Stop Tracing event is set it automatically becomes invalid state and the Trace event which is a event name that is collectively called with a Start Tracing event and a Stop Tracing event becomes valid state Conversely if the set Trace event is invalid state the Unconditional Trace event automatically becomes valid state R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 305
290. e Chapter 7 Startup in the separate edition CubeSuite RX Coding To implement I O function of the simulator first specify the I O address in the Stream I O address property within the Stream O Simulator category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab This can be done by entering address expressions in the range of 0 to last address of address space directly from the keyboard Figure B 1 Stream I O Category E Stream 0 Use stream 1 0 function Yes v Stream 1 0 address F 0 D Upon detecting Branch to subroutine instruction BSR JSR to a specified address while executing instructions of the program the simulator performs an input output process using the contents of the R1 and R2 registers as parameters R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 406 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS Therefore be sure that the following setting is made in the program before an input output process is performed Function code R1 register MSB 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte LSB Address of the parameter block R2 register For the content of the parameter block see the description of each input output function MSB LSB Po Reservation of areas for the parameter block and stream input output buffer To access each parameter in the parameter block make sure that an access is made in size of the relevant parameter R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 40
291. e Debug toolbar to cut off the communication with the connected debug tool After disconnecting from the debug tool the Status bar on the Main window changes as follows Figure 2 53 Statusbar Indicating the Disconnection from the Debug Tool m BREAK BGRXEL ITAG J Not measured v DISCONNECT This area is left blank DISCONNECT is displayed Caution The debug tool cannot be disconnected from CubeSuite while the program is running If you wish to disconnect the debug tool stop the program in advance Remark Disconnecting the debug tool will close all the panels and dialog boxes that can be displayed only during the connection R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 44 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 3 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite using hot plug in E1 JTAG E20 JTAG With hot plug in function you can connect the debug tool to the CubeSuite and debug the program while it is in execution Follow the steps below to establish hot plug in connection 1 Execute the program Execute the program which has been downloaded onto the microcontroller on the target system without connecting to the emulator 2 Specify the debug tool In the active project specify the debug tool which supports hot plug in connection E1 JTAG E20 JTAG Remark E1 Serial and E20 Serial do not support hot plug in connection 3 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite using hot plu
292. e Function panel of the analysis tool for the code coverage ratio of each function i e function coverage ratio For details on the code coverage ratio of functions see the separate edition CubeSuite Analysis 2 Data coverage rates Check the Data Coverage item in the Variable panel of the analysis tool for the data coverage ratio of each variable For details on the data coverage ratio of variables see the separate edition CubeSuite Analysis R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 stENESAS Page 150 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 16 Set an Action into Programs This section describes how to set the specified action into the program 2 16 1 Insert printf Setting the Printf event as one of action events allows you to output the value of the specified variable expression to the Output panel This can be done by executing a printf command after temporarily stopping the program at an arbitrary position To use this function follow the steps below Set a Printf event 1 2 Execute the program 3 Check the output result 4 Edit Printf event Cautions 1 Also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on action events e g limits on the number of enabled events 2 No action events occur during step execution E z or execution ignoring break related events 1 Set a Printf event Set a Printf event to the position where you want to ex
293. e Programs 78 2 9 1 Reset microcontroller CPU 78 2 9 2 Execute programs 78 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps 80 2 9 4 Execute a specified routine E1 E20 81 2 10 Stop Programs Break 83 2 10 1 Stop the program manually 83 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint 83 2 10 3 Stop the program at the arbitrary position break event E1 E20 85 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers 87 2 10 5 Set multiple break events in combination Combination break E1 E20 92 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 10 6 Other break factors 93 Displaying and Changing Memory Registers and Variables 95 2 11 1 Displaying and changing memory contents 95 2 11 2 Displaying and changing the CPU registers 106 2 11 3 Displaying and changing the I O registers 108 2 11 4 Displaying and changing global and static variables 111 2 11 5 Displaying and changing local variables 111 2 11 6 Displaying and changing watch expressions 113 Display Function Call Information from the Stack 119 2 12 1 Display call stack information 119 Collecting an Execution History 121 2 13 1 Setting up a trace operation 121 2 13 2 Collecting an execution history up to a halt 125 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section 125 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met
294. e RAM Monitor in Usage of trace function property the property value is displayed as 1 and becomes unchangeable f Timer You can configure the timer function in this category Figure 2 39 Timer Category RX600 Series E Timer Use 64bit counter No Operating frequency MH2z 25 0000 Figure 2 40 Timer Category RX200 Series El Timer Operating frequency MHz 25 0000 lt 1 gt Use 64bit counter RX600 series Specify whether to use two 32 bit counters or one 64 bit counter lt 2 gt Operating frequency MHz Specify the operating frequency to be used when converting the count value to time Directly enter a number between 0 0001 and 999 999 MHz to specify the operating frequency When operating frequency is not specified a count value will be displayed 3 Download File Settings tab You can configure downloading to the debug tool in Download File Settings tab For the details of settings in each category see 2 5 1 Execute downloading 4 Hook Transaction Settings tab In the Hook Transaction Settings tab you can configure hook transaction for the debug tool See 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process for details on hook transaction and the settings in each category R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 37 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 4 Simulator Configure the operating environment on the Property panel below when using Simulator Figure 2 41 Operating
295. e as that for Interrupt event setting tab Simulator in the Action Events dialog box see a Specify the Interrupt vector and b Specify the Priority order R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 155 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 17 Event Management An event refers to a specific state of the microcontroller in debugging like the address 0x1000 was fetched or data was written to the address 0x2000 CubeSuite uses this event as an action trigger of the debug function to break at a given place start or stop a trace operation or start or stop a timer measurement This section describes how to manage those events The events are managed collectively on the event panel shown below Choose Event from the View menu The Events panel permits you to check detailed information on the currently set events in list form as well as delete events switch the state of settings enabled or disabled display detailed information and change settings For details on how to read each area and about their functionality see the section in which the Events panel is described Figure 2 142 Displaying the Set Events Events Panel E1 E20 Events Toolbar ugadade Name Detail Comment C Unconditional Trace 9 Run Break Timer Not measured mi Hardware BreakO001 Before Execution sort c 36 Oxffff8616 N Software BreakOOO1 Before Execution sort c 38 Oxfffe62e 4 M SP Trace Start OR
296. e category to be removed and click the button in the toolbar or select Remove from the context menu Note however that only blank categories can be removed Also to edit a category name select the category name to edit and follow one of the following procedures Click the category name again and edit it directly from the keyboard R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 269 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Choose Change Name from the Edit menu and then edit the category name directly from the keyboard Press the F2 key and then edit the category name directly from the keyboard When a category is created drag and drop I O register names directly into the category That way I O register names can be displayed in tree form classified by category Similarly the order in which categories or I O register names are displayed one above or below another can be freely changed by a drag and drop operation Cautions 1 A category cannot be created within another category 2 I O registers cannot be added or removed b Registration of watch expressions I O registers or categories can be registered as watch expressions on the Watch panel For details on how to do it see 1 Registering watch expressions Remarks 1 If a watch expression is registered for a category all of the I O registers belonging to that category are registered as watch expressions 2 The registered watch expressions h
297. e contents of the data flash memory using the same access method as in other normal memory operations not including the simu lator Real time display updating function The values of memory registers and variables are automatically updated not only when the program is stopped but also in execution Saving restoring the debugging environment The debugging environment such as breakpoints event configuration information file download information dis play condition position of the panel etc can be saved R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 8 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the debugging process using CubeSuite as well as main debugging functions 2 1 Overview Following shows the basic sequence of program debugging using CubeSuite 1 Start CubeSuite Launch CubeSuite from the Start menu of Windows Remark For details on Start CubeSuite see CubeSuite Start 2 Set a project Create a new project or load the existing one Remark For details on Set a project see CubeSuite Start 3 Create a load module Once you are finished with the setting of the active project and the build execute the build to create a load module Remark For details on Create a load module with CC RX see CubeSuite Build 4 Confirm the connection to a host machine Connect the debug tool E1 E20 or Simulator to be used to a host machine
298. e of the selected item in UTF 8 code UTF 16 Displays the value of the selected item in UTF 16 code Size Notation The following cascade menus are displayed to specify the size notation Displays the value of the selected item as 8 bit data Displays the value of the selected item as 16 bit data Displays the value of the selected item as 32 bit data Displays the value of the selected item as 64 bit data Jump to Memory Opens the Memory panel Memory1 and jumps to the address which the selected watch expression is defined see g Jump to the address with memory definition Reset Color Resets highlighting of the selected watch expression whose value has been changed by executing a program This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Note The specifiable number of channels differs between the RX600 and RX200 Series as shown below RX600 Series 2 32 bits 2 or 1 64 bits 1 RX200 Series 1 24 bits 1 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 292 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Call Stack panel This panel displays call stack information for function calls see 2 12 1 Display call stack information This panel can only be opened when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Caution This panel is left blank while the program is in execution Each area on this panel are displayed at the time the program has
299. e pasted to the Watch panel Delete Deletes a selected range of character string If a blank category is in selected state that item is deleted No I O registers can be deleted Notation Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the form in which values are displayed Hexadecimal Displays the value of the selected item in hexadecimal default Signed Decimal Displays the value of the selected item in signed decimal Unsigned decimal Displays the value of the selected item in unsigned decimal Octal Displays the value of the selected item in octal Binary Displays the value of the selected item in binary ASCII Displays the value of the selected item in ASCII code Include Hexadecimal Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value of a selected item at the end of it with the Value equivalent enclosed in parentheses Reset Color Resets the highlighting for a selected I O register which indicates that its value has changed as a result of program execution R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 273 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Local Variables panel This panel displays the contents of local variables and changes their values see 2 11 5 Displaying and changing local variables Note that this panel can only be opened when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Cautions 1 Durin
300. e saved over an existing file by selecting Save Watch Data on File menu the respective watch panels watch 1 4 are handled individually R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 118 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 12 Display Function Call Information from the Stack This section describes how to display function call information from the stack The compiler bundled with CubeSuite CC RX places function call information on the stack in line with the ANSI standards By analyzing this function call information hereafter referred to as call stack information it is possible to know the depth of function calls the positions from which calls are made and parameters to those functions 2 12 1 Display call stack information Use the Call Stack panel shown below to display call stack information Select Call Stack from the View menu For details on the contents and function in each area see the section for the Call Stack panel Caution This panel is left blank while the program is in execution Each area on this panel are displayed at the time the program has stopped running Figure 2 116 Display Call Stack Information Call Stack Panel Call Stack E3 Toolbar f 2 Notation Encoding Depth Call Stack PowerON_Reset_PC J E wWorkSpace T utorial E1E20 R6004T utorial_Little Depth area Call Stack area This section describes the following Changing the form
301. e2 0x200 Format3 lt Generation condition gt lt File name Function name Variable name gt lt Variable address gt Example Read Write sub c func1 variabl3 0x300 Printf event Format lt Generation condition gt lt File name Line number gt lt Address gt lt Setting of Action event Printf event gt Example Before Execution main c 39 0x100 aaa bbb ccc After Execution sub c 100 0x200 Result of aaa aaa Interrupt event Format lt Generation condition gt lt File name line number gt lt Address gt interrupt Action event vector lt nterrupt vector gt Priority level lt nterrupt priority gt Simulator Example Before execution main c 39 0x100 Interrupt vector 1c Priority level 7 Notes 1 Following are the details on the display format lt Generation Displays one of the following conditions condition gt E1 E20 Execution Before Execution or After Execution Access Read Write Read Write Simulator Execution Execution Access Read Write Read Write R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 310 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 lt File name Line number gt APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Shows the source file name and the line number in the source file Display format is the same as the watch type scope specification expression When multiple load module files are downloaded lt Load module file name File name Line numbers is displayed For those eve
302. each area 1 Detailed information display change area This area displays in list form of the category the detailed information on an access related event that is selected on the Events panel allowing for its settings to be changed directly 2 Property description area This area displays a simple description of the category or property selected in the detailed information display change area Toolbar Displays categories in the detailed information display change area Hides categories in the detailed information display change area and rearranges only the property items in the ascending order Description of each category The properties that can be displayed and changed differ with the debug tool used 1 For E1 E20 2 For Simulator 1 For E1 E20 a Address Address Displays the address at which an access related event is set No address values can be specified here Default Depends on selected event modifying Not changeable b Address Condition Compare condition Specify address compare condition Default No specification Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values No conditions No address compare condition is specified Address areaNote1 Specify compare condition based on an Note2 address range Compare with Specify masked compare condition address mask R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 364 of 429 Oct 01
303. each type of memory area The memory mapping status cannot be changed on this panel When necessary you can add a memory mapping in the Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator This dialog box can be displayed by clicking on R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 40 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS the button which appears on the right end of the setting field after selecting Memory Mapping property See the section for the Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator for details on how to configure the parameters Figure 2 47 Opening the Memory Mapping Dialog Box a a aaa 19 cp 0 Internal RAM area 1 Non map area b Access Memory While Running You can configure the memory access while executing a program in this category The settings of this category are required when using the real time display update function See 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution for details on the real time display update function Figure 2 48 Access Memory While Running Category Simulator E Access Memory While Running Update display during the execution Yes Display update interval ms 500 lt 1 gt Update display during the execution Specify from the drop down list whether to update the display in the Watch panel Memory panel during a program execution Select Yes to update the display default lt 2 gt Display update interval ms This property is valid only whe
304. eak event access type to a variable IO register When editing a break event access type you have set first open the Events panel by selecting View menu gt gt Event After selecting the target break event access type in the Events panel click Edit Condition in the Context menu This will open a dialog box in which you can edit the selected break event For details on editing in the dialog box see 2 Editing access related events 3 Delete a break event access type to a variable IO register When deleting a break event access type you have set first open the Events panel by selecting View menu gt gt Event and then perform the following operations Note that event name differs depending on the debug tool to use a E1 E20 After selecting the combination break you wish to delete click x button on the toolbar in the above panel see 2 17 5 Deleting events Each break event access type can also be deleted by clicking on the event mark on the disassembled text Caution In the Events panel you cannot delete a break event access type selectively in the combination breaks All the break events including execution type displayed in the detailed information on the combination break will be deleted b Simulator After selecting the hardware break access type you wish to delete click x button on the toolbar in the above panel see 2 17 5 Deleting events 2 10 5 Set multiple break events
305. ecified symbol position If this operation above is not needed specify No with both of the CPU Reset after download and Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset property Executing a download Cli lf t ck the button in the Debug toolbar his operation is performed while CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool it is automatically connected to the debug tool before a download is executed Remark To download a file which has had changes added in the course of debug work again choose Build amp Download to Debug Tool from the Debug menu on the Main window which will help you build and download easily The load module files have been successfully download the Editor panel opens automatically with the source text of the downloaded files displayed on it Remark A process can be set that automatically rewrites I O register or CPU register values with specified values 2 5 2 before or after a download see Section 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process An applied method of download The files to download as well as the download conditions applied at download time can be changed CubeSuite permits files in the following formats to be downloaded R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 49 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Table 2 2 Downloadable File Formats File Format Extension Load module format abs Extension IAR N Usable exclusively for debug only pr
306. ecify how to perform the setting again if the file is downloaded again and the location address method of event set for the currently set event changes to midway in the instruction Note 2 setting position Default Suspend event How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Move to the head of Sets the event to the top address of the instruction value instruction Suspend event Disables the event suspended state Notes 1 Files specified as build targets in a main project or sub project cannot be deleted from the target files to download These files are automatically registered as download files by default See Table 2 2 Downloadable File Formats for downloadable file format 2 This property setting works only for the location setting of events without the debug information The location setting of events with the debug information is always moved to the beginning of the source text line 2 Debug Information The detailed information on debugging is displayed and its configuration can be changed Execute to the Specify whether to execute the program to the specified symbol position after CPU reset specified symbol after CPU Reset Default Yes How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes Executes the program to the specified symbol position after CPU reset value No Does not execute the program after CPU reset Specified symbol Speci
307. ect COM Port from the context menu Description of each area 1 COM Port area Select a COM port to which communication is redirected If there are no COM ports available on the host machine this drop down list is blank 2 Baudrate area Select a baud rate at which communication is performed with the redirected COM port The drop down list displays the following baud rates If System is selected the baud rate set by the device manager applies System 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 115200 Function buttons Button Function Connect Disconnect Connects to default or disconnects from a COM port When connected to a COM port the button is labeled Disconnect When disconnected from a COM port the button is labeled Connect Nullifies COM port settings and closes this dialog box Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 375 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Scroll Range Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the scroll range of the vertical scroll bar on the Memory panel Disassemble panel By setting the appropriate range it is possible to improve the operability of a mouse e g dragging because the size of the vertical scroll bar on the panel is changed suitably Caution After setting a scroll range via this dialog box the scroll range is not updated automatically even if the address evaluated by the ad
308. ected file one line down However this button is disabled when the file at the bottom of the list or a file specified as the subject to build in the project is selected Adds one blank item to the list with the item selected In the Download file property area specify the download conditions for the file to be added However this button is disabled when 20 or more files are already registered Removes a selected file from the list However the files specified as the subject to build in the project cannot be removed Remarks 1 Place the mouse cursor at a file name and the path information for the subject file is displayed in a popup box 2 The order in which files are listed can be changed by dragging any file name up or down in the list with the mouse However the files specified as the subject to build in the project cannot have their order in the list changed 2 Download file property area a Download file information This section displays download conditions or changes of settings made for a file selected in the Download File List area Also if a new download file is added using the Add button this section may be used to specify download conditions for the file added Specify a file to download Default File name However blank when newly added How to change Enter directly from the keyboard or specify in the Select Download File dialog box that is opened by clicking the buttonNo
309. ecute the printf command in the Editor panel Disassemble panel In the Editor panel Disassemble panel move the caret to the line address te at which you want to set a Printf event and then select Register Action Event from the context menu to open the following Action Events dialog box In this dialog box follow the steps below Note Printf events cannot be set to lines with no address indication R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 151 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 139 Set Printf Event Action Events Dialog Box Action Events Printf event Interrupt Event Setting Output string Example Sample Variable expression Example aaa bbb ccc Address C Test Example for Output panel Sample aaa 10 bbb 20 ccc 30 Cancel a Specify Output string Directly enter from the keyboard the characters to add when output to the Output panel Characters must be in one line spaces allowed b Specify Variable expression Specify the variable expression for the Printf event to take place Type a variable expression directly into the text box up to 1024 characters You can specify up to 10 variable expressions for a single Printf event by separating them with commas If this dialog box opens with a variable expression selected in the Editor panel Disassemble panel the selected variable expression appears as the default For the basic
310. ecution Yes Display update interval ms 500 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 22 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Access by stopping execution Specify from the drop down list whether to allow access to the memory area while executing a program Select Yes to allow access No is selected by default Update the display during execution Specify whether to update the display in the Watch panel Memory panel while executing a program Select Yes to update the display default Update interval ms This property is valid only when the Update the display during execution property is set to Yes Specify the interval in 100ms unit to update the contents in the Watch panel Memory panel display while executing a program Directly enter the Integer number between 100 and 65500 rounding up the fractions less than 100ms 500 is specified by default c Break You can configure the break function in this category Figure 2 18 Break Category E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used Hardware break lt 1 gt Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used Specify from the following drop down list the type of preferential breakpoint to be used with a single click of the mouse in the Editor panel Disassemble panel When setting a break point after the preferential break point type has been used up the other break point type will be aut
311. ed 2 IOR area This area displays I O register names in list form as classified by type of I O register as category folder The meaning of each displayed icon is as follows Indicates that names of I O registers in this category are currently displayed Double clicking this icon or clicking will close the category and hide the names of corresponding I O registers Note that categories are by default nonexistent If necessary create a new category and then Edit the tree Indicates that names of I O registers in this category are currently hidden Double clicking this icon or clicking will open the category and display the names of corresponding I O registers Note that categories are by default nonexistent If necessary create a new category and then Edit the tree Displays I O register names Remark By clicking the header part of this area it is possible to sort category names in order of character code The I O register names in each category are sorted in the same way This area has the following features a Edit the tree The tree form can be edited by classifying each I O register by any category folder To create a new category move the caret to the I O register name for which a category is to be created and click the gt button in the toolbar or select Create Category from the context menu Then enter any category name specifiable in up to 1 024 characters To remove a category select th
312. ed E1 E20 Example OR After execution main c 100 0x300 After execution funcA 0x10 0x100 Write sub c variable2 0x200 0x200 0x7 Read Write sub2 c variable3 0x300 0x303 0x8 Unconditional Trace Format Example Run Break Timer Format Total lt Total execution time gt Example Total 1000ms Total OVERFLOW Format2 Total lt Total execution time gt Execution Cycle Count lt Total execution cycle count gt Execution Instruction Count lt Total execution instruction count gt Simulator Example Total 3300ns Execution Cycle Count 330 Execution Instruction Count 200 Trace Format Start lt Combination condition for trace start gt End lt Combination Generation condition condition for trace end gt Total number of starts and ends lt Total number Execution related Access of trace start trace end eventNote2 related lt Start End gt lt Trace start trace end detailed information gt E1 E20 Example Start OR End OR Total of Start End 6 Start After Execution main c 100 0x300 Start After Execution funcA 0x100 0x300 Start Write variable1 0x100 0x101 0x10 End After Execution main c 200 0x100 End After Execution funcA 0x10 0x100 End Read main c variable1 0x100 0x101 0x5 Trace Format Start OR End OR T Total number of starts and ends lt Total number Generation condition of trace start trace end events gt Note2 Execution related Acce
313. ed I O register contents R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 108 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 2 Searching I O register You can search the name of I O register In the search area specify the name of I O register case insensitive in the text box You can either enter characters directly from the keyboard up to 512 characters or select from the input history items in the drop down list up to 10 items Click one of the following buttons Searches I O register names containing the character string specified in the text box in the backward direction and highlights the search result Searches I O register names containing the character string specified in the text box in the forward direction and highlights the search result Remarks 1 __ O register names which are categorized in folders and hidden are also searched They will be expanded and selected 2 After entering the search string pressing Enter key will perform the same function as clicking on the YJoutton and pressing Shift Enter will perform the same function as clicking on the P button Putting the I O registers in order The tree form of I O registers can be edited by classifying each register by a given category folder Cautions 1 No other categories can be created within a category 2 Nol O registers can be added or removed a To create a new category Move the caret to an I O register name
314. ed below Table A 1 Window Panel Dialog Box List Window Panel Dialog Box Name Description Main window Controls the program execution Various windows panels and dialogs can be opened from this window Project Tree panel Selects the debug tool to use Property panel Displays detailed information on the debug tool currently selected in the Project Tree panel and enables the settings of the tool to be changed Editor panel Enables text files to be viewed and edited and is used to execute source level debug Memory panel Displays and modifies memory values Disassemble panel Displays the results of memory value disassemble and is used to execute line assemble and instruction level debug CPU Register panel Displays the contents of CPU registers and modifies register values IOR panel Displays and modifies I O register values Local Variables panel Displays and modifies local variables Watch panel Displays and modifies registered watch expression values Call Stack panel Displays call stack information on function calls Trace panel Displays trace data acquired from the debug tool Events panel Displays detailed information on set events switches the events between enabled and disabled or deletes them Output panel Displays messages output from the build tool debug tool plug ins or the results of batch searches carried out using the Find a
315. ed by default f Execution mode You can configure the operation that is required in the event of simulation error or exception in this category Figure 2 50 Execution mode Category El Execution Mode lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt Select execution mode Stop Stop when undefined instruction exception occurs Yes Stop when privileged instruction exception occurs Yes Stop when access exception occurs Yes Stop when floating point exception occurs Yes Stop when interrupt occurs Yes Stop INT instruction is executed Yes Stop BRK instruction is executed Yes Select execution mode In this property you can select the execution mode from the following drop down list Stop Stops simulation default Continue Continues simulation Property items in the bottom section will be enabled Stop when undefined instruction exception is encountered This property is displayed only when you have selected Stop in Select execution mode property Specify from the drop down list whether to stop when undefined instruction exception is encountered Select Yes if you wish to stop at the occurrence of undefined instruction exception default Stop when privileged instruction exception is encountered This property is displayed only when you have selected Stop in Select execution mode property Specify from the drop down list whether to stop when privileged instruction exception is encountered Select Yes if you w
316. ed on it If the reset address has no source text mapped to it the relevant place is displayed on the Disassemble panel b Specified symbol This property is displayed only when you specified Yes on the Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset property R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 48 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 c Specify a position at which you want the program being run after the CPU is reset to be halted Enter an address expression directly in the range 0 to end address of address space to specify the position By default _main is specified However if the specified address expression cannot be converted into an address the program is not executed Remark Normally specify the following For assembler source Beginning label equivalent to the main function For C source Symbol given at the beginning of the main function name Specify the debugged overlay section Yes is displayed when overlay sections see 2 8 Setting Overlay Sections for details exist in the load module Otherwise No is displayed This entry cannot be changed d Overlay sections Address groups where overlay sections exist are displayed This property only appears when Yes is displayed on the Specify the debugged overlay section property Caution By default CPU reset automatically occurs after downloading the file and then the program is executed to the sp
317. egister CPU register with the specified values before executing the program see 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process for details 1 Execute after resetting microcontroller CPU You can reset the CPU and start the execution of the program from the reset address Click the button on the debug toolbar When this operation is performed the program continues to be executed until either of the following occurs The button has been clicked see 2 10 1 Stop the program manually The PC has reached a breakpoint see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint A break event condition has been met see 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables O registers Other break factors have occurred Remark This operation is the same as when the button is clicked after clicking the button 2 Execute from the current address Perform any of the following operations to start executing the program from the address at the current PC value a Normal execution Click the button on the debug toolbar When this operation is performed the program continues to be executed until either of the following occurs The button has been clicked see 2 10 1 Stop the program manually The PC has reached a breakpoint see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint A break event condition has been met see 2 10 3 Stop the program at the arbitrary position break event E1 E20 and
318. el However if an invalid value is specified a message is displayed and a search of trace data is not performed Also if the trace panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Search Forward Performs a search in the direction toward larger addresses within a specified range The searched spot is put in selected state on the Trace panel However if an invalid value is specified a message is displayed and a search of trace data is not performed Also if the trace panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Cancel Nullifies the setting for a search of trace data and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 348 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Source Level tab The acquired trace data is searched at the source level Caution If while the Trace pane is displayed in the Disassemble display mode a source level search is performed on this tab the subject data cannot be searched correctly To perform a source level search make sure the Trace panel is displayed in the Mixed display mode or Source display mode Figure A 53 Trace Search Dialog Box Source Level Tab Trace Search Instruction Level Search object The execution part is retrieve
319. elect Go To from the context menu Description of each area 1 Line number valid line range area valid line range shows the range of valid lines in the current file Directly enter a decimal value as the number of the line you want to move the caret to You can also enter a symbol in this area By default the number of the line where the caret is currently located in the Editor panel is displayed Function buttons Button Function OK Places the caret at the start of the specified source line Cancel Cancels the jump and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 378 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Go to the Location dialog box This dialog box is used to move the caret to a specified position Figure A 64 Go to the Location Dialog Box Go to the Location 1 Address Symbol Function buttons 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Go To On the Disassemble panel select Go To from the context menu On the IOR panel select Go To from the context menu Description of each area 1 Address Symbol or IOR area Specify the location to which the caret is jumped You can either type a location directly into the text box up to 1024 cha
320. elect the Source Level tab Figure 2 126 Search for Trace Data at Source Level Trace Search Instruction Level Source Level Search object The execution part is retrieved specifying the source line The execution part is retrieved specifying the function The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable Search condition Source and Line Search range Number a To specify a source line before performing a search default Select The execution part is retrieved specifying the source line in the Search object area then perform the following operation lt 1 gt Specifying the Source and Line The character string specified here is searched from within the Line Address area of the Trace panel Enter a character string included in the source line you want to search directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case insensitive and partial matches are also allowed Examples 1 main c 40 2 main c 3 main lt 2 gt Specifying the Number Specify a range of trace data to search by numbers displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel Specify start and end numbers in the left and right text boxes respectively By default 0 to ast number are specified Enter a number in decimal notation directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10
321. emble panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Disassemble panel other items are common to all the panels Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Save Disassemble Data Overwrites the contents of the disassembling to the previously saved text file txt CSV file csv see h Saving the contents of disassembled data Note that when the file has never been saved the same operation is applied as the selection in Save Disassemble Data As Save Disassemble Data Opens the Data Save dialog box to newly save the contents of the disassembling to the As specified text file txt CSV file csv see h Saving the contents of disassembled data Print Opens the Print Address Range Settings dialog box for printing the contents of this panel Edit menu Disassemble panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the Edit menu in the Disassemble panel other items are all invalid When a line is selected copies the contents of the selected line to the clipboard as a character string In the case of the edit mode copies the selected character string to the clipboard Rename Changes to the edit mode to edit the instruction code at the caret position see 2 6 4 Performing line assembly This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with its Find in Files
322. emory or watch expressions in real time By enabling this realtime display update function it is possible to display or change the values of memory or watch expressions even while the program is running not just when the program is halted For details on how to set see section 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution Saving the displayed contents of watch expressions By choosing Save Watch Data As from the File menu it is possible to open the Save As dialog box and then save the contents of watch expressions and values in whole to a text file txt or a CSV file csv When saving to a file CubeSuite reloads the values of watch expressions and saves the latest values thus obtained Note that if arrays pointer type variables structures unions or CPU registers only those that are assigned section names are displayed in expanded form the values of their expansion elements are also saved When not expanded they are marked with at the head with the values left blank However the I O registers protected against read are not reloaded To save the latest content select Force Read Value from the context menu before saving to a file Figure 2 115 Watch Data Output Image When Saved Watch expression Value Type Byte Size Address Memo Watch expression Value Type Byte Size Address Memo Category name Watch expression Value Type Byte Size Address Memo Remark If panel contents ar
323. en mode input 0x00 r 0x01 w 0x02 a 0x03 r 0x04 w 0x05 a 0x10 rb 0x11 wb 0x12 ab 0x13 r b 0x14 w b 0x15 a b The content of each mode is as follows r Opens for read w Opens a blank file for write a Opens for write from the end of a file r Opens for read and write w Reads a blank file and opens it for write a Opens additionally for read b Opens in binary mode Beginning address of file name input Beginning address of the area that contains the file name R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 410 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS Detailed Description When a file is opened by FOPEN a file number is returned This file number is used in subsequent operations to input or output to the file as well as to close the file Up to 256 files can be opened at a time Example _fileopen MOV R2 R5 MOV PARM R2 MOV R1 4h 5 R2 R5 2h 5 R2 01250000h R1 SIM_IO R5 R5 PARM R2 1h 5 R2 R1 R1 R3 R2 R1 SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 2 Set the value of R2 open mode in R5 Set the address of the parameter block in R2 Set the value of R1 first address of the filename in R2 4 bytes Set the value of R5 in R2 2 bytes open mode Set the function code of FOPEN in R1 Set the address of the system call in R5 System call Set the address of
324. en the Disassemble panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Disassemble1 Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 Disassemble2 Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble2 Disassemble3 Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble3 Disassemble4 Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble4 Opens the Events panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Debug Console Opens the Debug Console panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 186 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Show Current PC Location APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Displays the current PC position PC register value on the Editor panel However this item is disabled when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Back to Last Cursor Position Moves the caret back to where it was before it jumped to a defined place see 4 Jump to functions and 4 Moving to a symbol definition part Forward to Next Cursor Position Moves the caret back to where it was before Back to Last Cursor Position was executed Tag Jump b Debug If on Editor panel or Output panel there is file name or line column information on the line at which the caret exists this menu causes a jump to the relevant line column in the relevant file se
325. en the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Comment Lines Places line comment delimiters at the start of the current cursor line appropriate to the current language e g C This operation will only be available when the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Convert Tabs to Spaces Converts all tabs on the current cursor line into spaces Convert Spaces to Tabs Converts each set of consecutive space characters on the current line to tab characters but only for those sets of spaces that are at least equal to one tab size Tabify Selected Lines Tabifies the current line causing all spaces at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to tabs where possible Untabify Selected Lines Untabifies the current line causing all tabs at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to spaces Make Uppercase Converts all letters within the selection to uppercase Make Lowercase Converts all letters within the selection to lowercase Toggle Character Casing Toggles the character cases uppercase lowercase of all letters within the selection Capitalize Capitalizes the first character of every word within the selection Delete Horizontal Whitespace Deletes any excess white space either side of the cursor position leaving only one whitespace character remainin
326. enclosed in parentheses File menu IOR Panel Only Items The File menu used exclusively for the IOR panel is as follows The other items are shared However all of these items are disabled during program execution Save IOR Data Saves the content of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv that has been saved previously see b Saving of I O register values If this item is selected for the first time after startup the same operation as Save IOR Data As would have been selected is performed Save IOR Data As Opens the Save As dialog box in order to save the content of this panel to a specified text file txt or CSV file csv see b Saving of I O register values Edit menu IOR Panel Only Items The Edit menu used exclusively for the IOR panel is as follows All other items are disabled Cut Cuts a selected range of character string and moves it to the clipboard No I O registers and categories can be cut Copy Copies a selected range of character string to the clipboard If an I O register or category is in selected state that item is copied Note that the copied item can be pasted to the Watch panel Paste Pastes the content of the clipboard to the caret position when text is in editing mode I O registers and categories cannot be pasted R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 272 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW R
327. enesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers office e
328. ent button while reset events are registered the event selected in the subject event list and the registered reset events are exchanged for each other 2 If you change the combination condition from Sequential to OR or AND while reset events are registered events in the reset event list are excluded from the subject event If you want some of them the subject event clear registration of the reset event before you change the combination condition 3 Anevent for which the pass count has been specified cannot be registered as the reset event The pass count cannot be specified for an event that has been registered as the reset event 4 RX600 Series An event for which the address area has been specified cannot be registered as the reset event The address area cannot be specified for an event that has been registered as the reset event R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 164 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 147 Registering a Reset Event Sequential Combination Condition Break Combination Sequential Object event No Event 1 After Execution sort c 33 OxffffS65f Write g_IntBuf 0 142c 0x142f Oxb 2 After Execution sort cH36 OxtfffS60e 3 Read g_CharBuf 0x1000 0x1000 0x55 4 R Event Reset event Event Release Figure 2 148 Releasing Registration of a Reset Event Sequential Combination Condition Break
329. ent condition display cancel area a Display of the list Detailed conditions are displayed for the event which has been registered as a reset event When the reset event displayed in this list is encountered all the other event conditions which have been holding until then will be cleared Cautions 1 Only one reset event can be specified If you click R Event button with the reset event registered the event selected in the target event list and the registered reset event will replace each other 2 Ifyou have changed the combination conditions from Sequential to OR or AND with the reset event registered the event inside the reset event list cannot be included in the target event list In order to make it a target event you need to first cancel the reset event registration before making changes to the combination conditions 3 For events in which a reset event is registered you cannot specify a pass count condition b Button Cancel Moves the event inside the reset event list to the target event list This button is enabled only when you have specified Sequential for the combination conditions Function buttons Buttons Functions OK Applies the detailed settings specified in the dialog box to the combination break or to the trace and closes this dialog box Cancel Nullifies settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 354 of
330. ents are set the following event marks are displayed in the event area of the relevant line address or watch expression Also on the Evenis panel they are managed collectively as one instance of a timer measurement event By clicking the mark at a timer measurement event item it is possible to check information on the timer start and end events you ve set Table 2 16 Event Marks of the Timer Start and End Events Timer start ES Timer end s R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 144 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 134 Example of Timer Start and End Events Set Event area Indicates that a timer start ii Bt chi Id2 TORII LP QU0UUST 2 b oOff 2600 event is set P 74 QO0003F 6 a lel Indicates that a timer end VUUUU tpg te uN ae OO000038falte abfd event is set J 75 Caution RX600 Series The timer measurement will be suspended when the timer start event occurs twice even though the timer end event has not occurred Measurement will be resumed on the next occurrence of the time start event Remark The event mark differs depending on how an event is set see 2 17 1 Changing states of setting Enabled Disabled Also if a new event is set at a place where an event has already been set the event mark FS is displayed indicating that multiple events have been set 2 Execute the program Execute the program see 2 9 Exe
331. er e File name i D Function buttons My Network Save as type Log file log This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Debug Console panel select Log File from the context menu Description of each area 1 Save in area Select a folder in which to save a log file 2 List of files area This area displays a list of files that match the conditions selected in the Save in area and Save as type area 3 File name area Specify a file name under which data is saved 4 Save as type area This area displays the following types of files file types Log file log Text format default All file All the formats R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 394 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Save Saves a file under a specified file name Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 395 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Download File dialog box This dialog box selects a file to download Figure A 74 Select Download File Dialog Box Select Download File My Recent Documents My Documents 93 My Computer e File name gt ee Function buttons My Network Files of type J
332. er when a place where no debugging information is present is executed lt No Debug Information gt is displayed Instruction disassemble results The corresponding instructions are displayed as the result of disassembling when the Mixed display mode or Disassemble display mode is selectedNote The mnemonics are shown highlighted Note Ata frame for which not all the trace data was fetched LOST is displayed In this case the corresponding line is shown in error color the error color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box This area is provided with the following functions a Display mode It is possible to select the following three display modes by selection of a button on the toolbar or the context menu Display Mode Display Contents Mixed display mode Displays the instruction disassemble results labels source text corresponding source line default Disassemble display mode Displays the instruction disassemble results labels Source display mode Displays the source text corresponding source line and break causes However when a place where no debugging information is present is executed lt No Debug Information gt is displayed b Jumping to source line or disassemble By selecting Jump to Source from the context menu the Editor panel opens with moving the caret to the source line corresponding to the line at the curre
333. er string initialization data Written in image in bytes Little endian Big endian 1 01 01 012 00 12 00 12 00 012 345 00 12 00 45 03 00 00 12 03 45 000 12 000345 Function buttons 00 00 12 45 03 00 00 00 12 00 03 45 Button Function terminated Writes a pattern of specified initialization data into a specified address range of memory repeatedly If the end address is reached in the middle of this pattern the write process is Nullifies settings for memory value initialization and closes this dialog box Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 339 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Search dialog box This dialog box searches for memory values See 5 Searching for memory contents A search is performed in either the Memory value area or Character string area in which the caret on the Memory panel was present immediately before this dialog box is opened Figure A 49 Memory Search Dialog Box Memory Search 4 4 Search Data 2 T Search Range Specify address range 3 T Address 0x0 Ox fffffff Function buttons Here the following items are explained How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Choose Find from the context menu on Memory panel Description of each
334. er to update the display in the Watch panel Memory panel while executing a program Select Yes to update the display default lt 3 gt Update interval ms This property is valid only when the Update the display during execution property is set to Yes Specify the interval in 100ms unit to update the contents in the Watch panel Memory panel display while executing a program Directly enter the Integer number between 100 and 65500 rounding up the fractions less than 100ms 500 is specified by default lt 4 gt Enable the automatic update of realtime display Specify whether to set RRM area automatically This property is displayed only when you have selected Real time RAM Monitor in the Usage of trace function property If you have selected Trace there No is displayed instead Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution Break You can configure the break function in this category Figure 2 36 Break Category E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used Hardware break lt 1 gt Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used Specify from the following drop down list the type of preferential breakpoint to be used with a single click of the mouse in the Editor panel Disassemble panel When setting a break point after the preferential break point type has been used up the other break point type will be automatically selected See 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary posit
335. erify on writing to memory Specify whether to perform a verify check when the memory value is initialized from the drop down list Select Yes to perform verification after download or when values are changed in the Watch panel Memory panel b Access Memory While Running You can configure the memory access while executing a program in this category The settings of this category are required when using the real time display update function See 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution for details on the real time display update function Figure 2 34 Access Memory While Running Category E20 Serial E20 JTAG RX200 Series E Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution No Update display during the execution Yes Display update interval ms 500 Figure 2 35 Access Memory While Running Category E20 JTAG RX600 Series E Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution No Update the display during execution Yes Update interyal ms 500 Enable the automatic update of realtime display Yes R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 33 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c d lt 1 gt Access by stopping execution Specify from the drop down list whether to allow access to the memory area while executing a program Select Yes to allow access No is selected by default lt 2 gt Update the display during execution Specify wheth
336. es Choose Memory from the View menu and then Memory1 4 Up to four pieces of Memory panels can be opened at a time Each panel is discriminated by the name Memory1 Memory2 Memory 3 and Memory 4 in the title bar For details on how to read each area and details about their functionality see the section where the Memory panel is described Figure 2 97 Displaying Memory Contents Memory Toolbar 3 Notation Size Notation Encoding C Move when Stop 00000040 N00 00050 N00 00060 N00 00070 n00 00080 00000090 000 000a0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 I Address area Memory value area Character string area Display position specification area Remark Inthe Scroll Range Settings dialog box which opens by clicking on View gt gt button in the toolbar you can set the scroll range of the vertical scroll bar on this panel This section describes the following 1 Specifying the display position 2 Changing the display form of values 3 Changing memory contents 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution 5 Searching for memory contents 6 Collectively changing initializing memory contents 7 Saving displayed memory contents R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 95 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 Specifying the display position By specifying an address expression in the display position specif
337. es gt lt Size gt Access attribute One of the following is displayed as access attribute R Read only W Write only R W Read Write All accessible sizes Accessible sizes in bit units are enumerated in increasing order by separating each with a comma Size Shows the size of each I O register If displayable in byte units the size is shown in bytes if displayable in bit units the size is shown in bits with the respective units given Examples 1 Forthe IOR R W 1 8 1 byte case This refers to an I O register that is read writable accessible in 1 bit and 8 bits and 1 byte in size 2 For the IOR R W 1 1 bit case This refers to an I O register that is read writable accessible in 1 bit and 1 bit in size Remark The type information is sorted in order of character code by clicking the header part of this area 5 Address area This area displays the addresses to which the I O registers are mapped always shown in hexadecimal However the bit registers displayed here are given bit offset values as shown in the examples below Examples 1 For the OxFF40 case This register is mapped to OxFF40 2 For the OxFF40 4 case This is a bit register mapped to bit 4 of the address OxFF40 Remark The addresses are sorted in ascending order of numeric value by clicking the header part of this area R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 271 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00
338. esas Electronics Corporation R20UT0769EJ0100
339. ess than 16 characters 0s are added Work RAM start address Specify the location address of the work RAM used by the debugger Specified bytes of space from the specified work RAM location address are used by the debugger firmware Note Default Depends on the selected microcontroller How to change By entering directly from the keyboard However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable value R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Address value that matches the internal RAM area of the selected microcontroller 2tENESAS Page 205 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Work RAM size bytes Displays the size of the work RAM used by the debugger Default Depends on the selected microcontroller How to Not changeable change Note This area can also be used by the user program since the memory contents are swapped and restored However you cannot designate this area as the source or destination of DMA or DTC function transfer 7 Operating Modes of CPU E1 E20 Displays detailed information on the microcontroller s operation modes or changes settings made in it Mode pins setting Specify the operation mode set by mode pins Default Single chip mode How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Note 1 Specifiable One of the following as selecte
340. ess where the function was called Parameter block area R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 418 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS FTELL Obtains the current position of the file pointer Function Code R1 Register 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 amp xecution result 42 Unused 4 6 Offset Parameters Parameter Description Execution result output 0 Terminated normally 1 Error File number input Number that is returned when a file is opened Offset output Current position of the file pointer Number of bytes from the top of the file Detailed Description Obtains the current position of the file pointer R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 419 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS Example R2 R5 Set the value of R2 offset in R5 PARM R2 Set the address of the parameter block in R2 R1 1h 5 R2 Set the value of R1 file number in R2 1 bytes direction 010D0000h R1 Set the function code of FTELL in R1 SIM_IO R3 Set the address of the system call in R3 R3 System call PARM R2 Set the address of the parameter block in R2 4n 5 R2 R1 Set the value of R2 4 bytes new offset in Rl R1 R5 Set the value of R1 in the location pointed to by R5 offset pointer R2
341. et from the emulator MAx 200m4 Communications method FINE baud rate bps E Flash Input Mode of ID code ID code Work RAM start address Work RAM size bytes Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Register setting Endian E External Flash External flash definition file No E20 XXXXKXKKX No FINE 2000000 Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal Res FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Fe 1000 1024 Single chip mode Single chip mode Little endian data 4 Internal ROM RAM Connect Settings 2tENESAS _ Download File Settings look Transaction Settings E Page 26 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 24 Property Panel E20 JTAG Property Sl AX E20 TAG Property E Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM KBytes Size of internal RAM KByte Size of DataFlash memory KBytes E Clock Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory E Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator MAs 200m4 Communications method JTAG clock MHz B Flash Input Mode of ID code ID code Work RAM start address Work RAM size bytes E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Register setting Endian B External Flash External flash definition file No E20 XXXXXKXXX No ITAG 16 5 Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal e FF
342. event that has been currently set is displayed This area is provided with the following functions a b c Setting deleting breakpoints By clicking where you want to set a breakpoint with the mouse the breakpoint can be set easily The breakpoint is set to the instruction at the start address of the clicked line Once the breakpoint is set the Event mark is displayed at the line that is set In addition the detailed information about the set breakpoint is reflected in the Events panel When this operation is performed at a place where any one of the event marks is already being displayed that event is deleted and the setting of breakpoints cannot be done Note that the setting of events can be done only for those lines where the background color is shown in white See 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint for details on how to set the breakpoint Changes event status Event status can be changed from the following menu displayed by right clicking the event mark Enable Event Changes the selected event state to an Enabled state Event occurs when the specified condition is met When the event mark RS which indicates that multiple events have been set is selected all of the events that have been set are enabled Disable Event Changes the selected event state to a Disabled state Event does not occur when the specified condition is met When the event mark FS which indicates that multiple eve
343. ext box or there are no candidates of the symbol then the list of symbol names will not appear 2 Optimization by the compiler may convert the type of a function parameter to be different from that defined in the program e g func class Foo obj gt func class Foo obj If this is the case the symbol name completion provides the function names after optimization Remark See the explanation of the corresponding panel dialog box as to whether this function can be used or not when inputting a symbol name Figure 2 155 Symbol Name Completion Function Memory1 B Notation C Move when Stop su 0 1 5 60 21 FB 3F 42 6C 14 Bl ae TEI NY select the target symbol name from 66 05 FB K E3 35 60 this list displayed 60 40 EF 02 02 6E EF FB 2 20 3 Icons for invalid input In some of the dialogs provided by CubeSuite the icon will appear at a point where incorrect characters are entered as a warning sign Remark Placing the cursor over the icon will pop up the information that indicates the characters to be entered R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 182 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Appendix A provides detailed explanations of windows panels dialog boxes used for debugging with CubeSuite A 1 Description Windows panels dialog boxes for debugging are list
344. f the condition for measurement is not satisfied even once the results of measurement will not be displayed Execution count Exception and interrupt count Exception count Interrupt count 4 Deleting a timer start event or timer end event To delete a timer start event or timer end event you ve set right click the event mark in the event area and then select Delete Events on the context menu that is displayed R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 146 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Also there is another way to delete a set event Choose Event from the View menu select the relevant breakpoint on the ensuing Events panel and then click the X button in the toolbar see 2 17 5 Deleting events 2 14 4 Range of measurable time There is a finite range of measurable time for timer measurements by Run Break timer events see 2 14 2 Measuring execution time from start to stop or timer measurement events see 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section E1 E20 as shown below Table 2 17 Range of Measurable Time Debug tool Run Break timer event Timer measurement event E1 i 100 microsecond i E20 RX600 Series Approx 72 hours Depneds on CPU clock frequency 32 bit counter x 2 channels or 64 bit counter x 1 channel Overflow detection available E1 i 100 microsecond i E20 RX200 Series Approx 72 hours Depends on CPU clock frequency 24
345. f 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Example display default Text color Pink Background color Standard color APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description Memory values for which the Realtime display update function is enabled Text color Standard color Background color Palegreen Read Fetch Current access condition of the memory value when the Realtime display update function is enabled Text color Standard color Background color Orange Write Text color Standard color Background color Paleturquoise Read and Write Text color White Background color LightGray Lost Text color Gray Background color Standard color Memory values of not readable area Text color Gray Background color Standard color Areas not memory mapped or areas not rewritable e g IO register and I O protection areas or when acquisition of memory values failed Text color Standard color When areas other than the Realtime display update area are selected for display during program execution or when acquisition of memory values failed Background color Standard color Note Applicable only to the memory values in the address area that was displayed on the Memory panel immediately before the program execution As the comparison is made before and after the program execution highlighting will not be used if the value
346. f an invalid file format in cases where any data includes a comma each piece of data are enclosed in double quotes when they are output to a file c Specifying the Save Range Address Symbol Specify the start address and end addresses to set a range of memory to be saved in a file Directly enter hexadecimal value or address expressions in the respective text boxes or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Note that if a range is selected on panel this selected range is specified by default in the text boxes If no range is selected the currently displayed range on panel is specified Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function d Clicking the Save button Memory data is saved in specified form to a specified file Figure 2 105 Memory Data Output Image When Saved Saved to Text File txt Example for data displayed in hexadecimal 8 bit width and ASCII code 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c d e f 00000000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000010 11 11 1111111111111111 111111111111 00000020 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 uu 000000301 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 3333333333333333 Saved to CSV File csv Example for data displayed in hexadecimal 8
347. f data that can be selected differs depending on the series of the microcontroller Following data types are displayed in the drop down list RX600 series Branch Branch Data access Data access RX200 series Branch Data access Caution E20 JTAG RX600 Series If you have selected Real time RAM Monitor in Usage of trace function property the property value is displayed as Data access and becomes unchangeable lt 4 gt External trace output E20 JTAG From the following drop down list select the method in which to externally output the trace acquisition data R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 36 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS CPU execution CPU execution given priority over trace output Trace information may be lost if output Trace output Trace output given priority over CPU execution CPU execution stops during trace output affecting real time performance Do not output Only the internal buffer of the microcontroller will be used with no output of trace information Caution Caution If you have selected Real time RAM Monitor in Usage of trace function property Do not output cannot be selected from the drop down list lt 5 gt Trace memory size MByte E20 JTAG Specify the size of memory used to retain the trace data The following memory sizes are displayed in the drop down list 1 default 2 4 8 16 32 Caution If you have selected Real tim
348. f disassembled results The contents of disassembled results can be saved to a text file txt or CSV file csv When saving to a file CubeSuite gets latest information from the debug tool and saves it in the form in which data are displayed on this panel Choose Save Disassembled Data As from the File menu and the Data Save dialog box shown below is opened At this time if a range is selected on panel while you perform this operation it is possible to save only the selected range of disassembled data In this dialog box follow the procedure described below to save the displayed contents of disassembled results Figure 2 74 Saving Disassembled Result Data Save Dialog Box Data Save Disassemble Data File Name E WorkSpace Tutorial E 1E20 RX600 T utorial_LittleEndian Tutori v File Type Text files txt v Save Range Address Symbol _sorteOxde z a _sort 0x63 z a Specifying the File Name Specify a file name in which you want to save Enter it directly in the text box specifiable in up to 259 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Also you can select a file using the Select Data Save File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button b Specifying the File Type Select the type of file in which you want to save from the drop down list below The selectable file types are as follows Text files txt Text
349. f each other R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 217 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Usage of trace function Specify whether the trace function is used as realtime RAM monitor function RRM function E1 E20 Default Trace How to E1 Serial E1 JTAG E20 Serial change Not changeable E20 JTAG By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Trace Trace function is used preferentially value Realtime RAM monitor Realtime RAM monitor function RRM function is used preferentially Note 1 Use trace function Specify whether to use the trace function Simulator Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes Uses trace functions value No Does not use trace functions Clear trace memory Specify trace acquisition mode before running Default Yes Simulator How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes Clears the trace memory value No Does not clear the trace memory Operation after trace Specify the operation after the trace memory is full with the collected trace data memory is full Default Non stop and overwrite to trace memory How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when pr
350. f program break see Section 2 10 Stop Programs Break b Focus panel status information Displays status information on the currently focused panel e g information about caret position or overwrite insertion mode However this status is hidden for panels that do not have status information c Execution status Shows the current execution status of a program using the following icons and character strings However this status is hidden when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool Program status Displayed Content Under execution gt RUN Now halted m BREAK Step execution in progress Pi STEP d CPU status E1 JTAG E20 JTAG Displays the current CPU status of the debug tool If the CPU is in several different status at the same time each status is shown separated by amp However this status is hidden when CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug tool R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 190 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Debug Tool Displayed Content CPU Status E1 JTAG Reset Reset state E20 JTAG Pow Off Target not supplied with power Sleep Now in sleep mode Standby Now in standby mode e Current PC position Displays a hexadecimal value representing the current PC position Clicking this area moves the caret to the current PC position on the Editor panel Placing the cursor over this area will pop up the following
351. f various events Various events can be set to the addresses lines where the caret currently exists by selecting Bread Settings Trace Settings or Timer Settings from the context menu The corresponding Event mark is displayed in the Event area when an event is set In addition the detailed information about the set event is reflected in the Events panel Note however that the setting of events can be done only for those lines where the background color is shown in white in the event area See the following for details on how to set events 2 10 3 Stop the program at the arbitrary position break event E1 E20 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section E1 E20 Remark A breakpoint can be set or deleted easily in the Event area as well see a Setting deleting breakpoints Registering watch expression Variable names of C language CPU registers I O registers and assembler symbols can be registered in the Watch panel as watch expressions See 1 Registering watch expressions for details on how to operate it Moving to symbol definition place By clicking the button on the toolbar or selecting Go to Symbol from the context menu in a state where the caret has been moved to a instruction that has referenced a symbol
352. form in which values are displayed 1 2 Changing the CPU register contents 3 Displaying and changing the CPU register contents during program execution 4 Saving the displayed CPU register contents R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 106 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 1 2 3 4 Changing the form in which values are displayed The form in which the data in the Value area is displayed can be freely changed using the toolbar buttons shown below Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays the value of a selected item including low order item in predetermined notation default Displays the value of a selected item including low order item in hexadecimal Displays the value of a selected item including low order item in signed decimal Displays the value of a selected item including low order item in unsigned decimal Displays the value of a selected item including low order item in octal Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in binary gga Displays the character string of a selected item including low order item in ASCII code If the subject consists of 2 bytes or more characters consisting of 1 byte each are displayed one next to another E Displays the value of the selected item in Float Note that when the value is not 4 byte data displa
353. format default CSV Comma Separated csv CSV formatte R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 68 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Note Each piece of data are separated with a comma when saved To avoid the problem of an invalid file format in cases where any data includes a comma each piece of data are enclosed in double quotes when they are output to a file c Specifying the Save Range Address Symbol Specify the start address and end address to set a range of data to be saved in a file Directly enter hexadecimal values or address expressions in the respective text boxes or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Note that if a range is selected on panel this selected range is specified by default in the text boxes If no range is selected the currently displayed range on panel is specified Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function d Clicking the Save button Disassembled data is saved in specified format to a specified file Figure 2 75 Disassembled Data Output Image when Saved Label symbol name _ Label symbol line File name Line number C language source text _ Source text line Address Offset Code Result of Disassembling _ Disassembling line
354. fy the position at which the program is stop after CPU reset This property appears only when the Execute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset property is set to Yes Default _main How to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable Address expression from 0 to the end address of the address space value R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 224 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify the debugged If the downloaded load module has overlay sections in it select the section to debug overlay section Default When the load module has no overlay sections No When the load module has overlay sections Yes How to Not changeable change Overlay sections Displays address groups in which overlay sections are present From the overlay sections defined in each address group select the section to debug priority section Note that this property is displayed only when Yes is specified in the Specify the debugged overlay section property item Default None How to File Start address End address items change Not changeable Priority section item By selecting from the drop down list Display Clicking the mark on any address group number displays the following detailed content information The section name selected in the Priority Section item is the section to be debugged File Start address En
355. fying a routine to be executed You can specify a routine in the System E1 E20 category on the Debug Tool Settings tab in the Property panel When executing immediately before the program execution Select Yes in the Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program property and enter the start address in the The routine to run immediately before starting execution property that is displayed The specified routine will be executed immediately before the program execution When executing immediately after the break Select Yes in the Execute the specified routine immediately after halting of the user program property and enter the start address in the The routine to run immediately after halting execution property that is displayed The specified routine will be executed immediately after the stop of the program Figure 2 85 System category E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM No Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH No Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Yes Routine to run immediately before execution starts 1000 Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Yes Routine to run immediately after execution stops R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 81 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Cautions 1 In the The routine to run immediately before
356. g Drag and drop the target character string in this area in the desired watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 Select the Edit menu gt gt Paste in this area in the desired watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 after copying the target character string Cautions 1 Up to 128 watch expressions can be registered in one watch panel if this restriction is violated a message appears 2 Due to compiler optimization the data for the target variable may not be on the stack or in a register in blocks where that variable is not used In this case the target watch expression value is displayed as Remarks 1 Each watch expression registered in each watch panel Watch1 to Watch4 is managed in each panel and saved as the user information of the project 2 More than one watch expression with the same name can be registered d Editing watch expression To edit the registered watch expression double click the watch expression to be edited to change the watch expression to edit mode then directly edit from the keyboard press the Esc key to cancel the edit mode After editing the watch expression press the Enter key to complete the editing e Deleting watch expression To delete the registered watch expression select the watch expression s to be deleted then click the button on the toolbar or select Delete from the context menu R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 284 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFER
357. g If there the cursor is within a word or not surrounded by whitespace this operation will have no effect Trim Trailing Whitespace Deletes any trailing whitespace that appears after the last non whitespace character on the cursor line Delete Line Completely delete the current cursor line Duplicate Line Duplicates the cursor line inserting a copy of the line immediately after the cursor line Delete Blank Lines Deletes the line at the cursor if it is empty or contains only whitespace Characters area Line number area while connecting to the debug tool Register to Watch1 Registers a selected character string or a word at the caret position to the Watch panel Watch1 as a watch expression the judgment of the word depends on current build tool Note that this item becomes invalid when no corresponding address exists in the line at caret Register Action Event Opens the Action Events dialog box to set an action event to the corresponding address of the line at the caret position 1 Note that this item becomes invalid when no corresponding address exists in the line at caret R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Cuts the selected character string and copies it to the clipboard If there is no selection the entire line is cut ztENESAS Page 239 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard
358. g Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the access value as the trace data when the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable I O register is write accessed see 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred Record R W Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the access value as the trace data when the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable I O register is read write accessed see 1 When an access to a variable or I O register occurred Record Start R W Value Sets a trace event that causes trace recording to start upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or O register see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Record End R W Value Sets a trace event that causes trace recording to end upon read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or O register see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Show Trace Result Opens the Trace panel and displays the acquired trace data Trace Settings Opens the Property panel to set the trace function R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 259 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuit
359. g box a measurement item can be specified from the following Measurement item Function Execution cycle Note Measures the number of elapsed cycles ICLK in a specified section Execution cycle Supervisor mode Measures the number of elapsed cycles ICLK while operating in supervisor mode Exception and interrupt cycle Measures the number of cycles ICLK needed to process interrupts including exceptions Exception cycle Measures the number of cycles ICLK needed to process exceptions Interrupt cycle Measures the number of cycles ICLK needed to process interrupts Execution count Measures the number of instructions that have their execution completed Exception and interrupt count Measures the number of times interrupts including exceptions were accepted Exception count Measures the number of times exceptions occurred Interrupt count Note RX200 Series Measures the number of times interrupts were accepted Only Execution cycle is displayed for the measurement item b To edit an only once measurement When you specify Yes for this property the timer measurement is finished by measuring a specified section only once If you want to measure a total number of times a specified section has been passed be sure to specify No Remark RX600 Series While the measurement listed below is performed even if the start event and end event occur i
360. g in Select Hot Plug in from Debug menu to initiate the preparation for hot plug in connection 4 Connect to the target system Following message will appear once you are ready to start hot plug in connection Connect the emulator to the target system and click OK This will start the communication with the debug tool which is selected in the currently active project Figure 2 54 Message Indicating that Hot Plug in Connection Is Ready to be Started Question Q0 204001 p Hot Plug in is prepared ap Connect the debug target to a PC and click OK Caution E1 JTAG To establish hot plug in connection you need to connect the emulator to the target system via Hot plug Adapter ROEO000010ACBO00 which is optionally available R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 45 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 5 Hot plug in connection completed Once the connection to the debug tool is successfully completed the Status bar on the Main window will change as shown below For details on each item displayed on the Status bar see the section of the Main window Figure 2 55 Statusbar Indicating the Successful Hot plug in Connection to the Debug Tool l DISCONNECT RUN Running S RXELJITAG C Measuring This area shows information on the currently active debug tool RUN indicates that the program is running Cautions 1 Trace function and Real time display updating function will not be av
361. g program execution nothing is displayed on this panel Each area on this panel are displayed at the time the program has stopped running 2 Because of optimization by a compiler for blocks where variables or the subject to be operated on are not in use there may be no variable data in the stack and registers In this case no variables are displayed that are the subject to be operated on Remark By double clicking a line delimiting each area on panel it is possible to change the relevant area to the smallest displayable width without omitting the content in it Figure A 30 Local Variables panel Local Variables Toolbar E Notation H Encoding 1 4 Value Type Byte Size Address OxO000016fc long 4 0x000016e0 7 imt 4 0x000016e8 4 imt 4 Rl REG 0 int 4 O0x000016dc lint 4 R6 REG This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu Local Variable Panel Only Items Edit menu Local Variable Panel Only Items Context menu How to open Choose Local Variables from the View menu Description of each area 1 Scope area This area selects the scope of local variables to be displayed from the drop down list The selectable items are as follows R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 274 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Item Operation Current Displays local variab
362. g_acc 1 A const signed char g_acsc 2 123 const signed char g_acsc 2 const unsigned char g_acuc 3 M 124 const unsigned char g_acuc 3 M gt lt gt ees 2 2 a g_asc g acsc 276 g_asc g_acsc g auc g acuc vi 277 g auc g acuc v 5d watcht x RJ watchi x aP amp T Xl Notation B amp X Notation Value Type Byte Size Addre Memo Value Type Byte Size Addre 0x01 sigmed char 1 O 0x01 sigmed char 1 Oxfff 9100 Ji I R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 74 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 8 Setting Overlay Sections The optimizing linkage editor OptInk used by the CC RX provides the start option which allows two or more sections defined in a program to be allocated to a single address Sections that have been allocated in this way are called overlay sections This section describes how to set up the overlay section selection facility for overlay sections in a load module When the program is executed only one of the sections allocated to the same address in the load module is executed The debug tool provides the overlay section selection facility to select a particular overlay section to be debugged preferentially hereafter referred to as the priority section With the priority section selected before execution of the program debugging of that section is simple because debugging information of other sections is hidden
363. ge to the clipboard as character string s Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the property value while editing the property value Delete Deletes the selected character string s while editing the property value Select All Selects all the character strings in the selected property while editing the property value R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 198 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Connect Settings tab This tab is used to display the detailed information categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed Internal ROM RAM Endian Simulator Clock Connection with Emulator E1 E20 Connection with Target Board E1 E20 Flash E1 E20 Operating Modes of CPU E1 E20 External Flash E1 E20 Peripheral Function Simulation Simulator A N O ee ee a ee a ae Ne ees Nae ee Ne Re Ree Figure A 5 Property Panel Connect Settings Tab E1 Serial Property AX E1 Serial Property B Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM KBytes Size of internal RAM KBytes of DataFlash memory KByte B Clock Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memory No Connection with Emulator Emulator serial No E1 XXXXXXXXXK E Connection with T arget Board Power target from the emulator MAX 200m4 No Communications method FINE FINE baud rate bps 2000
364. ging the CPU registers This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool Remark When the separator line of each area in this panel is double clicked the width of the area changes to the shortest possible size that can display the contents of the area Figure A 28 CPU Register Panel CPU Register amp Toolbar E Notation Heg Register Name Reg n Jf Control Registers E ISP 0x00001838 E usp ox000016a8 INTE Oxfff F S8154 Ej pc Oxfff fSsedd HH rsu 0x00130004 E BPC 0x00000000 E BPSW Oxdo0000000 E FINTV Oxdo0000000 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu CPU Register panel dedicated items Edit menu CPU Register panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select CPU Register Description of each area 1 Register Name area The types of register are classified as categories folders and a list of the respective register names is displayed Note that neither category names nor register names can be edited and deleted The meanings of the icons are as follows Indicates that the register name belonging to this category is displayed When you double click on the icon or click on the mark the category is closed and the register name is hidden Indicates that the register name belonging to this category is hidden When you double click on the icon or click
365. hat this function is available only when the following conditions are satisfied for each specific build tool a When CC RX is used The target is a function variable or label in C language The focus is in the Editor panel b When an external build tool is used The target function 1 resides in an active project The focus is in the Editor panel A fileN te 2 with the symbol information is selected for Download files In case it is disconnected from the debug tool the above file is specified as the first file in Download files Notes 1 A jump to a static function cannot be made when the debug tool is disconnected 2 When the file is in the hex format setting for downloading the symbol information is required see 4 Performing source level debug with hex format Motorola S format or binary data format files at the source level R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 63 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Caution When multiple statements are described in a line a jump to an illegal location may be made Remark The judgement of words will depend on the build tool being used 5 Jump to a desired line tag jump If the information of a file name a line number and a column number exist in the line at the caret position you can open the file in another Editor panel and jump to the corresponding line and the corresponding column if the Editor panel is already open you can jump to t
366. he entered pass count The specifiable value for the pass count differs with each debug tool as follows E1 E20 1 to 256 Simulator 1 to 16 383 Cautions 1 E1 E20 The pass count can be specified by any value other than 1 for only one event among all events including access related events If a pass count of other than 1 is specified for two events an error results 2 E1 Serial RX200 Series E20 Serial RX200 Series No values other than 1 can be specified for the pass count 2 Editing access related events The address condition and data condition for access related events can be edited For details on how to edit the pass count see a Editing the pass count or the number of times passed To edit access related events use the Detailed Settings of Access Events dialog box that is displayed by performing the following operation on the Evenis panel Trace Move the caret to an access related event in a trace you want to edit and then select Edit Condition from the context menu Point Trace Move the caret to an access related event in a point trace you want to edit and then select Edit Condition from the context menu Combination break Move the caret to an access related event in a combination break you want to edit and then E1 E20 select Edit Condition from the context menu Timer Result Move the caret to an access related event in a timer result you want to edit and then select Ed
367. he Local Variables panel that displays local variables for the function indicated by a selected line R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 296 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Trace panel This panel is used to display trace data recording the execution history of the program see 2 13 Collecting an Execution History The trace data displays by mixing the disassembled text and source text by default but it is also possible to display either one of these by selecting the Display mode After the execution of the program is stopped the display position is automatically updated such that the latest trace data is displayed This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool Caution Remark Toolbar 4 E20 JTAG RX600 Series Part of the trace functions and Real time RAM Monitor RRM functions can be used only ona mutually exclusive basis When the separator line of each area in this panel is double clicked the width of the area changes to the shortest possible size that can display the contents of the area TZ v SR Notation 7 8 Eke 4 Number Line Number Address 572 573 574 574 575 576 577 578 579 579 580 561 581 581 1 581 1 581 2 581 2 Figure A 33 Trace Panel E1 E20 Time h min s ms us ns Tutorial c 36 Oxffff855t Tutorial c 36 Oxffff855c Tutorial c 40 Oxffff8561 Tutorial c 40 Oxffff8563 Tutorial c 47
368. he calculation results of the input address expressions are handled respectively as the start address and end address No address values can be specified that are greater than the microcontroller s address space Caution Note that an address range that covers areas with different endians cannot be specified Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function 2 Initialize data area Specify the initialization data to be written into memory To specify initialization data enter a hexadecimal value directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries To specify multiple pieces of initialization data specify a maximum of 16 pieces of up to 4 byte data 8 characters by separating each with a space Each piece of initialization data are interpreted as comprising 1 byte in units of 2 characters from the tail end of the character string If the data consists of an odd number of characters the first character in it is assumed to be comprising 1 byte R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 338 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note that if the data consists of 2 bytes or more it is converted before being written into the target memory to an appropriate byte sequence that suits the project s endian as shown below Input charact
369. he caret position Clear Clears the display of this panel Enable Disable Chooses to enable default or disable the debug console a toggle switch Note that when the debug console function is disabled the panel s background color changes to gray COM Port Opens the Port Setting dialog box to set a COM port on the host machine to which communication from the microcontroller is redirected Log File Opens the Open Log File dialog box to save the displayed content of this panel to a specified log file log Logging begins Logging Chooses to start default or stop logging a toggle switch However this item is disabled when no log files are specified Echo Back Chooses to enable default or disable local echoback a toggle switch If local echoback is disabled the input data is not output to this panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 319 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator This dialog box is used to set the memory mapping for each type of memory Figure A 39 Memory Mapping Dialog Box Memory Mapping Memory type Address range Emulation ROM area v HEX Access width Memory mapped list Memory type Address range Size Access width Internal RAM area Ox00000000 Ox0000ffff 64 KBytes bits Non map area 0x00010000 Ox0007ffff 448 KBytes bits I O registers 0x000800
370. he coverage information acquired including the color coding on each panel Table 2 19 Calculating Code Coverage Ratio for Source Lines and Disassemble Lines Panel Calculation method Editor panel Number of bytes executed in the address area corresponding to the source line Total number of bytes present in the address area corresponding to the source line Disassemble panel Number of bytes executed in the address area corresponding to the disassemble result line Total number of bytes present in the address area corresponding to the disassemble result line Table 2 20 Color coded Code Coverage Measurement Results Default Code Coverage Background Color 1 to 99 Source text disassemble results 0 not executed Source text disassemble results Remarks 1 The code coverage measurement result displayed on each panel is updated at every program break 2 The above color coding rule is determined according to the settings in General Font and Color category category in the Option dialog box 3 The above color coding rule does not apply to the lines that are outside the target area see Table 2 18 Subject Areas of Coverage Measurements 4 The Editor panel will not display the code coverage measurement result in cases where the source file currently displayed is updated after the update of the downloaded modules Figure 2 137 Example of Code Coverage Measurement Results Editor Panel
371. he event that an event that has been set once is deleted Event types that are displayed are as follows Table A 12 Event Type Event Type Description Hardware Break BreakNotet Breaks the program when the condition is met while the debug tool monitors the break condition all the time during program execution gt See 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint gt See 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers Software Break Note1 Break E1 E20 Breaks the program when the instruction which an address code to break is rewritten for the break instruction is executed gt See 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint Combination break E1 E20 When while the debug tool successively is checking plural break conditions during program execution the combination condition is met this event causes the program to break gt See 2 10 5 Set multiple break events in combination Combination break E1 E20 Unconditional Trace Automatically collects the trace data with start of a program execution and stops collecting the trace data with stop of the program execution This event cannot be deleted because of the built in eventNote2 Enabled by default gt See 2 13 2 Collecting an execution history up to a halt this event is Run Break Timer Automatically measures the execution time of a program with start
372. he focus to other than the edit area For details on how to change local variable and parameter values see 2 Changing the contents of local variables b Saving of local variable values Choosing Save Local Variables Data As from the File menu opens the Save As dialog box making it possible to save all content of this panel to a text file txt or CSV file csv For details on how to save local variable values see 3 Saving the displayed contents of local variables Type Byte Size area This area displays the type names of local variables They are displayed in forms conforming to C language description Arrays have the number of their elements added in and functions have their size in bytes added in when they are displayed Note that this area cannot be edited Address area This area displays the addresses of local variables If variables are assigned to registers the register names are displayed This area cannot be edited R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 276 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbar Each button in the toolbar are disabled during program execution E Obtains latest information from the debug tool and updates display Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays values on this panel in per variable predetermined notation default Displays values
373. he panel Select Tag Jump from the context menu after moving the caret to the line on the source text The tag jump is operated as follows Table 2 4 Operation of Tag Jump Example of Character String Operation C work src c Jumps to the top line of the file C work src c Tmp src c Jumps to the top line of the file Tmp src c C work src c 10 Jumps to the tenth line from the top of the file C work src c C work sub src c 10 Jumps to the tenth line from the top of the file C work sub src c C work sre c 10 5 Jumps to the fifth column of the tenth line from the top of the file C work src c Figure 2 70 Tag Jump 30 FRR RHR HHH 31 Include files 32 FOR RR KH HHH HREM HHH EMH RRRMHHREH 33 f 34 include CG macrodriver h 35 include CG syter Lh 36 include CG ad Gq 37 include CG til 38 Start user mr Register Action Event 9 co ase ye End user codi c Ctrl x 40 include CG us 41 Copy Ctrl C 42 43 ERK 44 Global defi A Find Ctrl F 45 HK HR RH H RH 46 7 Th GoTo Ctrl G 47 Start user cq 4a 48 define WAIT F a 49 w Back to Last Cursor Position 50 UINT Go to Here 51 52 Set PC to Here 3 4 Jump to Function R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 64 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Remarks 1 Jumps are case insensitive 2 The reference point of the path is the p
374. he procedure below to change memory values collectively a b Figure 2 103 Changing Memory Contents Collectively Memory Initialize Dialog Box Memory Initialize Start address symbol End address symbol w Unput the end address or sy lnitialize data Hex ihput the initial data in hexadecimal here The two or more data v Specifying the Start address symbol and End address symbol Specify the Start address symbol and End address symbol to set an address range in which you want memory contents to be initialized Directly enter address expressions in the respective text boxes specifiable in up to 1 024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The calculation results of the address expressions you ve entered are respectively handled as the start address and end address No address values can be specified that are greater than the address space of the microcontroller Caution Note that an address range that covers areas with different endians cannot be specified Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function Specifying the Initialize data Specify the initialization data to be written into memory Directly enter a hexadecimal value in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to
375. he trace panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Search Forward Performs a search in the direction toward larger addresses within a specified range The searched spot is put in selected state on the Trace panel However if an invalid value is specified a message is displayed and a search of trace data is not performed Also if the trace panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Cancel Nullifies the setting for a search of trace data and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 351 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Combination Condition dialog box E1 E20 You can change the information on the combination break or the combination condition of trace event selected on the Events panel Remark See 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on event setting Figure A 54 Combination Condition Dialog Box Combination Condition 1 f Break 2 Combination Sequential Object event No Event Up 1 After Execution sort c 13 Oxffff85dd 2 Read g_IntBuf Ox142c Ox1 42f 0x55 Reset event Event After Execution sort c 17 Oxffff85e5 This section describes the following How to open
376. hen Stop is specified in the Select execution mode property Default Yes How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value Yes Stops simulation No Does not stop simulation R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 221 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Stop when interrupt occurs Specify whethe APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE r or not to stop execution of the user program when an interrupt occurs This property is displayed only when Stop is specified in the Select execution mode property Default Yes How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes Stops simulation value No Does not stop simulation Stop INT instruction is executed Specify whethe r or not to stop execution of the user program when an NT instruction is executed This property is displayed only when Stop is specified in the Select execution mode property Default Yes How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes Stops simulation value No Does not stop simulation Stop BRK instruction is executed Specify whethe r or not to stop execution of the user program when a BRK instructio
377. her than a jump to subroutine instruction operation is the same as when the button is clicked Caution If Step over execution is performed for the longjmp function execution processing may not complete and may wait for a time out 3 Execute until return is completed Return out execution Step execute the program so that the program will stop when it returns from the current function to the caller function When the execution of source line instruction that require checking has been completed you can perform step execution using this instruction so that you can make the program return to the caller function without step executing the remaining instructions inside the function This instruction can be performed by clicking the button on the debug toolbar Cautions 1 If a program is returned out in the main function it will break inside the start up routine 2 Ifa program is returned out in a function that has called the longjmp function break may not occur 3 Executing return out from the recursive function may cause the program to run in a free run mode 2 9 4 Execute a specified routine E1 E20 You can execute a specified routine immediately before the start or stop of the program execution Setting an arbitrary routine allows you to control the target system in synchronization with the execution or stop of the program See 2 10 Stop Programs Break on how to stop a program in execution This section describes the procedure for speci
378. his area displays memory addresses always in hexadecimal The address width matches that of the microcontrollers memory space specified in the project This area cannot be edited 3 Memory value area This area displays or changes memory values for the program mapped to the microcontroller By default the display starts from the address 0 To specify the display notation and display width of memory values use the toolbar buttons or select Notation and Size Notation from the context menu By default memory values are displayed in hexadecimal notation and 8 bit width The following table describes the meaning of marks and colors used to represent memory values The colors in which text and backgrounds are displayed depend on how the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box is set Example display default Description Text color Blue Memory values that have been changed by the user Pressing the Enter key will write them into the target memory Background color Standard color 00 Text color Standard color Memory values at addresses for which symbols are defined Underlined Register watch expressions can be registered Background color Standard color o0 Text color Brown Memory values that have changed as a result of program execution Note Background color Cream Clicking the button in the toolbar resets the highlighting R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 245 o
379. his property b lt Endian You can configure endian in this category Figure 2 43 Endian Category Simulator E Endian Endian of CPU Little endian data lt 1 gt CPU Endian Specify the endian for the CPU By default the endian selected in the build tool property is displayed Caution You cannot change this property while connected to the Simulator c Clock You can configure clock in this category Figure 2 44 Clock Category Simulator E Clock System clock ICLK frequency MH2z 50 lt 1 gt System clock ICLK frequency MHz Specify the clock frequency for the CPU unit MHz Directly enter the value between 1 MHz and 1 000 MHz 100 is specified for the RX600 Series and 50 for the RX200 Series by default Caution You cannot change this property while connected to the Simulator d lt Peripheral Function Simulation You can configure simulation of peripheral functions in this category Figure 2 45 Peripheral Function Simulation Category El Peripheral Function Simulation El Peripheral function simulation module 2 0 CMT 1 ICU Peripheral clock rate 1 lt 1 gt Peripheral function simulation module It displays the name of available peripheral function simulation modules and lets you select from the drop down list whether to use each module being displayed Select Use when using the module Not Use is selected by default You cannot change the name of peripher
380. history entries If the left side text box is blank the number 0 is assumed If the right side text box is blank the last number is assumed R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 137 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 3 gt Clicking the Search Backward or Search Forward button When you click the Search Backward button a search is performed in the direction toward smaller numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel When you click the Search Forward button a search is performed in the direction toward larger numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel b To specify a function name before performing a search Select The execution part is retrieved specifying the function in the Search object area then perform the following operation lt 1 gt Specifying the Function Name Enter a function name you want to search directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case sensitive and only perfect matches are allowed lt 2 gt Specifying the Number Specify a range of trace data to search by numbers displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel Specify start and end numbers in the left and right text boxes respectively By default 0 to ast number are specified Enter a number in decimal notation directly in the text box or select an input histor
381. ication Read Write Read Write R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 347 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE e Data This item is enabled only when Access Address is specified Specify an accessed numeric value Enter a hexadecimal value directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The numeric value can be specified as a range of values In this case enter data in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank or labeled Input value when range is specified the fixed numeric value specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search 2 Search range area a Number Specify a range of trace data to search by numbers displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel Specify start and end numbers in the left and right text boxes respectively By default 0 to last number are specified Enter a number in decimal notation directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries If the left side text box is blank the number 0 is assumed If the right side text box is blank the ast number is assumed Function buttons Button Function Search Backward Performs a search in the direction toward smaller addresses within a specified range The searched spot is put in selected state on the Trace pan
382. ication area it is possible to specify the position at which CubeSuite starts displaying memory values CubeSuite starts displaying by default from the address 0 Figure 2 98 Display Position Specification Area Memory Panel C Move when Stop rove a Specifying an address expression Directly enter in the text box an address expression that designates the address of the memory value you want to be displayed An input expression of up to 1 024 characters can be specified the calculation result of which is handled as the address for the display start position However no address expressions can be specified that exceed the address space of the microcontroller Remarks 1 By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function 2 Ifthe specified address expression is the symbol and its size can be recognized everything from the start address to the end address of that symbol is displayed selected b Specifying whether the address expression is evaluated automatically or manually The timing with which the display start position will be changed is determined by selection of the Move When Halted checkbox and by the Move button Move When The address expression is automatically evaluated after the program has halted and the Halted caret moves to the address derived from that calculation The address expressi
383. id during execution of a program Save Watch Data Overwrites the contents of this panel to the previously saved text file txt CSV file csv see c Saving the contents of watch expressions Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is write disabled the same operation is applied as the selection in Save Watch Data As Save Watch Data As Opens the Save As dialog box to newly save the contents of this panel to the specified text file txt CSV file csv see c Saving the contents of watch expressions Edit menu Watch panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the Watch panel other items are all invalid Deletes the selected character string s and copies them to the clipboard If the watch expression s category s are selected deletes them except when the expanded item of the watch expression is selected Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s If the watch expression s category s are selected copies them to the clipboard except when the expanded item of the watch expression is selected If texts are in editing pastes the contents of the clipboard to the caret position If texts are not in editing and the watch expression s are copied in the clipboard registers them to the caret position Delete Deletes the selected character string s If the watch expression s category
384. ied variable or I O register is accessed for write i e to write data to it Read write Collection of trace data is started or finished when a specified variable or I O register is accessed for read or write i e to read or write data Remark Accesses by DMAC Direct Memory Access Controller and DTC Data Transfer Controller are not supported To set events for variables or I O registers in source text or disassembled text Perform this operation in the Editor panel Disassemble panel in which the source text disassembly text is displayed Select any variable or I O register in the source text or disassembled text and then select the desired operation from the context menu as described below However the variables you can select are only global variables static variables in function or static variables in file Note that when you have performed this operation it is interrupted as if a trace event access related has been set for the selected variable or I O register and it is managed on the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management Access type Operation Read write Trace start event Choose Record Start R W Value from Trace Settings and then hit the Enter key Trace end event Choose Record End R W Value from Trace Settings and then hit the Enter key If a value is specified in the text box of the menu at this time collection of trace data is started or finished only when a read wri
385. ile CubeSuite gets latest information from the debug tool R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 107 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 107 CPU Register Value Output Image When Saved Register name Value Category name Register name Value 2 11 3 Displaying and changing the I O registers Use the IOR panel shown below to display I O register contents or change values Choose IOR from the View menu For details on how to read each area and details about their functionality see the section where the IOR panel is described Figure 2 108 Displaying the I O Register Contents IOR Panel Toolbar Search area Value Type Byte Size Address 0x0000 IOR 2Z 0x00088040 0x0000 IOR 2 Ox00088042 ADDRC Ox0000 IOR 2Z 0x00088044 ADDRD 0x0000 IOR 2Z 0x00088046 ADCSR 0x00 IOR 1 0x00088050 ADCSR ADIE 0x0 IOR 1lbits 0x00088050 6 ADCSR ADST 0x0 IOR 1lbits 0x00088050 5 ADCSR CH 0x0 IOR 4bits 0x00088050 0 ADCR 0x00 IOR 1 0x00088051 ADCR TRGS 0x0 IOR 3bits 0x00088051 5 Dd IOR brea Value area Type Byte Size area Addreds area Following methods of operation are described here Searching I O register Putting the I O registers in order Changing the form in which values are displayed 4 Changing the contents of I O registers Displaying and changing I O register contents during program execution Saving the display
386. in combination Combination break E1 E20 By setting more than one execution type break event and access type break event in combination you can stop the program when the combination condition is satisfied by the set break event Only one combination break can be set Therefore when two or more break events have been set break event will be added consecutively to the detailed information of one combination break in the Events panel Combination conditions listed below can be specified for the combination break R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 92 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Table 2 7 Combination conditions for the combination break Combination Description conditions OR Break will occur when any one of the break event conditions is satisfied AND Break will occur when all the break event conditions are satisfied irrespective of the time line Sequential Break will occur when the break event conditions are satisfied in the specified sequence Only one break event in the combination breaks can be registered as a reset event R event When the registered break event is encountered all the other break event conditions which have been holding until then will be cleared When editing a combination break select the combination break in the Events panel and click Edit Condition in the Context menu This will open a dialog box in which you can edit the combination break For
387. in hexadecimal directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The access address can also be specified as a range of addresses In this case enter address values in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank or labeled Input when range is specified the fixed address specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search Note that if any address value greater than the microcontroller s address space is specified the high order address value is masked when a search is performed Also no address values can be specified that are greater than the value representable by 32 bits Specifying the Access Status This item is enabled only when Access Address is specified see Specifying the Access Address Select the type of access Read Write Read Write Vector Read and DMA from the drop down list If you do not limit the type of access select No specification Caution The types of access for which data can be collected on the Trace panel are only Read write Read and Write Therefore do not select Vector Read or DMA from the drop down list Specifying the Data This item is enabled only when Access Address is specified see Specifying the Access Address Specify an accessed numeric value Enter a hexadecimal value directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list
388. in order to avoid illegal formatting b When saving upload data For the selectable file format see Table 2 3 Uploadable File Formats 3 Save Range xxx area Specify the range of data to save You can either type ranges directly into the text boxes or select them from the input history via the drop down lists up to 10 items The method of specifying the ranges will differ as follows depending on the type of data to be saved Type of Data Description Disassemble panel Specify the range of addresses to save via the start and end addresses Ranges can be entered as base 16 numbers or as address expressions When a range is selected in the panel that range is specified by default When there is no selection then the range currently visible in the panel is specified Memory panel Specify the range of memory to save via the start and end addresses Ranges can be entered as base 16 numbers or as address expressions When a range is not selected in the panel then the range currently visible in the panel is specified Trace panel Specifying a range to save Specify the trace range to save via the start and end trace numbers Note Ranges can only be entered as base 10 numbers Saving all trace data From the drop down list to the left select All Trace Data The text box to the right is disabled All currently acquired trace data will be saved The range currently visible in the panel is specified by default Upload
389. information display change area and rearranges only property items in the ascending order Description of each category 1 Address Address Displays the address at which an execution related event is set No address values can be specified here Default Depends on selected event modifying Not changeable 2 Pass Count Pass count Specify a pass count in decimal The relevant event occurs when the event condition is met as many times as the entered pass count Default 1 Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values E1 E20 1 to 256 Simulator 1 to 16 383 Cautions 1 E1 E20 The pass count can be specified by any value other than 1 for only one event among all events including access related events If a pass count of other than 1 is specified for two events an error results 2 E1 Serial RX200 Series E20 Serial RX200 Series No values other than 1 can be specified for the pass count Function buttons R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 360 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Buttons Functions OK Applies detailed settings made in this dialog box to execution related events before closing the dialog box Cancel Nullifies settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 361 of 429 Oct 01 2011
390. information is pop up displayed Format lt Load module name gt lt Label name gt lt Offset value gt Address Example1 test1 out main 0x10 Example2 sub function 0x20 Source line number Format lt Load module name gt lt File name gt lt Line number gt test1 out main c 40 main c 100 Example1 Example2 Note lt Load module name gt is displayed only when multiple load modules have been downloaded to the debug tool 3 Disassemble area The results of disassembling are displayed next to the corresponding source text as follows Figure A 27 Display Contents of the Disassemble Area In the Case of the Mixed Display Mode void change long a Label line _change PC line for i O i lt 10 i Breakpoint line 5 eros MOV L RO R3 7 ef14 Mov L R1 R4 Source text line tmp i a i HOV L R4 R5 Disassemble results MOV L R5 R3 zs SUB 1H R2 Offset value Code Instruction Label line The label is displayed when a label is defined for the address and its corresponding line is shown highlighted in lightgreen PC line A line corresponding to an address of the current PC PC register value is shown highlighted te 1 Breakpoint line A line at which a breakpoint is set is shown highlightea 1 Source text line The source text corresponding to the code data is displayed te 2 Disasse
391. ings tab by selecting On chip ROM enabled extended mode or On chip ROM disabled extended mode from the pulldown list as shown below Figure 2 63 Specifying the CPU Operation Mode E Operating Modes of CPU Mode pins setting Single chip mode On chip ROM enabled extended mode v Endian Single chip mode On chip ROM enabled extended mode On chip ROM disabled extended mode c Executing a download Execute a download see 3 Executing a download Cautions 1 External flash memory cannot be rewritten on the Memory panel 2 To use a flash memory device that does not support the use of the Lock command specify that the lock bit be cleared when you generate USD files This specification helps you omit an unnecessary process to confirm the lock bit status 2 5 3 Executing an upload The memory content of the currently connected debug tool can be saved uploaded to any file To do an upload use the Data Save dialog box that is opened by choosing Upload from the Debug menu Follow the procedure described below to make the necessary setting in this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 58 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 64 Uploading Memory Contents Data Save Dialog Box Data Save Upload File Name Input file name here File Type Intel Hex format hex Save Range Address Symbol Input the start
392. input format that can be specified as variable expressions and the values output by Printf event see Table A 14 Relationship between Variable Expressions and Output Value Printf Event Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function c Specify Address Designate an address that specifies the Printf event By default the presently specified address is displayed When editing you can either type an address expression directly into the text box up to 1024 characters or select one from the input history from the drop down list up to 10 items Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 152 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS d Click the OK button Set the Printf event to the line at the caret position in the Editor panel Disassemble panel When the Printf event is set the oe mark is displayed in the event area on the Editor panel Disassemble panel and the set Printf event is managed in the Events panel see 2 17 Event Management 2 Execute the program Execute the program see 2 9 Execute Programs By executing the program the program momentarily stops immediately before executing the instruction at th
393. ion Specify whether or not to download symbol information from a specified file Note 1 Default Yes Method to change By selecting from drop down list Specifiable values Yes Downloads symbol information No Does not download symbol information Specify the PIC PID offset Specify whether or not to change the positions of PIC Position Independent Code and PID Position Independent Data areas of the load module to be downloaded from those at which they were when the load module was created When this item is changed to Yes PIC Offset and PID Offset are displayed in the sub item Default No Method to change By selecting from drop down list Specifiable values Specifies PIC PID offset 2 Yes No Does not specify PIC PID offset R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 RENESAS Page 55 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS PIC Offset Enter an offset value from an address that was in the load module when it was created For example if the program section s start address begins with the address 0x1000 enter 1000 for this item The subject section is downloaded to the address 0x2000 Default 0 Method to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable Hexadecimal number in the range 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF values PID Offset Notes 1 2 Remark Enter an offset value to be set in the PID register
394. ion breakpoint for details on breakpoints Software break Sets software breakpoint preferentially Hardware break Sets hardware breakpoint preferentially default System You can configure the emulation system in this category For more information regarding the execution of a specified routine before the execution and after the break of a program see 2 9 4 Execute a specified routine E1 E20 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 34 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 37 System Category E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM No Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH No Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Yes Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Yes lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt Routine to run immediately after execution stops Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM Specify whether to debug programs that rewrite internal program ROM area such as those that use ROM P E mode Caution You cannot change this property while connected to E20 Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH Specify whether to debug programs that rewrite internal data flash area such as those that use data flash P E mode Caution You cannot change this propert
395. ion The following cascade menus are displayed to specify the notation This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Hexadecimal number Displays values on this panel in hexadecimal number default Decimal Displays values on this panel in decimal number Octal Displays values on this panel in octal number Binary Displays values on this panel in binary number Window Connecting The following cascade menus are displayed to link with other panels Connect Source Window Links with the Editor panel Connect Disassemble Window Links with the Disassemble panel Opens the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 and jumps to the fetch address corresponding to the selected line in this panel Jump to Disassemble Jump to Source Opens the Editor panel and jumps to the source line corresponding to the selected line in this panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 303 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Events panel This panel is used to display the detailed information about the events that are set on the Editor panel Disassemble panel Watch panel On this panel you can change the setting state of the event between valid invalid and delete the event see 2 17 Event Management This panel appears only when connected to the debug tool Remarks 1 See 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting fo
396. ion by bits Expression ExpressionN Exclusive disjunction by bits Expression Expression Logical sum by bits Note Variables and functions can be combined by an operator only with variables functions and integer constants Example C variable name IOR name b Watch expression and operator With watch expression the value of a symbol is used to perform operations Only when the value does not exist the address of the symbol is used to perform operations Example main 1 The basic input formats of watch expressions are as follows Table 2 31 Basic Input Format of Watch Expressions Expression Description Name of a C C language variableNe 1 Value of a C C language variable Expression Expression Element of an array Note 2 Expression Member name Value of a structure union class member Note 2 Expression gt Member name Value of a structure union class member that is pointed to Watch expression Cast expression Value of the pointer to a member variable Watch expression gt Cast expression Value of the pointer to a member variable Expression Value of pointer variable amp Expression Location address Type name Watch expression Value cast into a specified type R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 RENESAS Page 180 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Expression Description Name of a CPU register Value of the CPU register
397. ion of the program the display is automatically updated During step execution the display is successively updated each time a step is executed Also if the Realtime display update function is enabled the display of values can be updated in real time even while the program is under execution Note that this panel can only be opened when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Remark You can set the scroll range of the vertical scroll bar of this panel in the Scroll Range Settings dialog box which opens by clicking the toolbar button Figure A 23 Memory Panel Memory1 Toolbar A P Notation Size Notation Encoding Viewr a 4 C Move when Stop m W f 1 P 8 0 2 0L 747 07 W2Z 0 5 amp 6 7 5 2272 2y 272 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar File menu Memory panel Only Items Edit menu Memory panel Only Items Context Menu How to open Choose Memory from the View menu and then select Memory 1 4 Description of each area 1 Display position specification area By specifying an address expression it is possible to specify the display start position of memory values Make the following specifications in order R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 244 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE a Specify address expressions
398. is operation For details on how to edit in a dialog box see 3 Editing combination conditions of events E1 E20 Cautions 1 When the combination conditions are sequential access related events can be specified at up to the third place in the sequence 2 When the combination conditions are sequential access related events that have had address range conditions set can be specified at only the first place in the sequence 3 The combination condition specifiable for a trace end condition is only OR 3 Executing the program Execute the program see 2 9 Execute Programs Collection of trace data is started or finished when the condition set for a trace start event or trace end event is met For details on how to check the collected trace data see 2 13 5 Displaying an execution history 4 Editing trace start and trace end events To edit a trace start or trace end event you ve set choose Event from the View menu select the event displayed in detailed information of trace on the Events panel that is opened and then click Edit Condition on the context menu Do your editing in a dialog box that is opened by this operation For details on how to edit in an execution related event dialog box see 1 Editing execution related events Also for details on how to edit in an access related event dialog box see 2 Editing access related events 5 Deleting a trace start or trace end event To delete a trace start
399. is possible to edit the condition for the number of times an execution related event has passed To edit execution related events use the Detailed Settings of Execution Events dialog box that is displayed by performing the following operation on the Events panel Hardware break Move the caret to a hardware break you want to edit and then select Edit Condition from the context menu R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 158 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Trace Move the caret to an execution related event in a trace you want to edit and then select Edit Condition from the context menu Combination break Move the caret to an execution related event in a combination break you want to edit and then E1 E20 select Edit Condition from the context menu Timer Result Move the caret to an execution related event in a timer result you want to edit and then select E1 E20 Edit Condition from the context menu Caution Address values of execution related events cannot be changed in the Detailed Settings of Execution Events dialog box To change address values delete the subject event and then set a new event a Editing the pass count or the number of times passed Enter a numeric value in decimal notation for the Pass Count property in the Pass Count category and then click the OK button The relevant event occurs when the event condition is satisfied as many times as t
400. isassemble on context menu and the subject you re going to edit is placed into the edit mode b Editing instructions Use keyboard to directly edit the instructions c Writing into memory Press the Enter key when you ve finished editing and the altered instruction is automatically line assembled and the resulting code is written into memory However if this alteration results in an invalid instruction the character string you ve edited is displayed in red color and not written into memory Note that if space is created in memory by overwriting the disassembled result being displayed on panel with another instruction bytes are automatically compensate for with nop instructions as in the example shown below Examples 1 When the ADD instruction on third line 6 byte instruction is overwritten with a BCLR instruction 4 byte instruction Before editing 5020 AND R2 UB RO 99e0 MOV W OCH R6 RO 700 b98a322a ADD 2A328AB9H RO R15 5327 AND R2 R7 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 70 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS After editing 5020 AND R2 UB RO 99e0 MOV W OCH R6 RO 22a45b2 BCLR 2 0B245H R2 03 NOP 03 NOP 2 When an MOV W instruction on second line 2 byte instruction is overwritten with a BCLR instruction 4 byte instruction Before editing 5020 R2 UB RO 99e0 OCH R6 RO 700 b98a322a 2A328AB9H R0 R15 5327 R2 R7 After editing 5020 R2 UB
401. ish to stop at the occurrence of privileged instruction exception default Stop when access exception is encountered This property is displayed only when an MPU module exists in Peripheral function simulation module property and you have selected Stop in Select execution mode property Specify from the drop down list whether to stop when access exception is encountered Select Yes if you wish to stop at the occurrence of access exception default R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 42 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 9 lt 5 gt lt 6 gt lt 7 gt lt 8 gt Stop when floating point exception is encountered RX600 Series This property is displayed only when you have selected Stop in Select execution mode property Specify from the drop down list whether to stop when floating point exception is encountered Select Yes if you wish to stop at the occurrence of floating point exception default Stop when interrupt is encountered This property is displayed only when you have selected Stop in Select execution mode property Specify from the drop down list whether to stop when interrupt is encountered Select Yes if you wish to stop at the occurrence of interrupt default Stop INT instruction is executed This property is displayed only when you have selected Stop in Select execution mode property Specify from the drop down list whether to stop when INT i
402. isplay change area is displayed Toolbar Displays categories in the detailed information display change area Hides categories in the detailed information display change area and rearranges only property items in the ascending order Description of each category 1 Measurement Setting You can display and modify the detailed settings on timer measurement Measurement item RX600 Series Measurement items are specified RX200 Series Execution cycle are displayed as measurement items Default Execution cycle Modifying Select from the drop down list Available values Must be selected from the followings in the drop down list RX600 Series Execution cycle Execution cycle Supervisor mode Exception and interrupt cycle Exception cycle Interrupt cycle Execution count Exception and interrupt count Exception count Interrupt count RX200 Series Execution cycle Execution only once Specifies whether to end the measurement after measuring the specified segment only once Default No Modifying Select from the drop down list Available values Yes Ends the measurement after measuring the specified segment only once No The measurement value is cumulated every time you pass through the specified segment R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 356 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Buttons Functions
403. isplay during execution Update interval ms Enable the automatic update of realtime display E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Routine to run immediately after execution stops E Trace Usage of trace function External trace output e memory size MByte B Timer Use 64bit counter Operating frequency MHz Hardware break No No Yes Yes Real time RAM monitor Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Data access CPU execution 1 No 25 0000 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 212 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 16 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab Simulator RX600 Series Property Sl AX Simulator Property 1 p a T 19 2 gt E Access Memory While Running Update display during the execution Yes Display update interyal ms 500 5 gt E Trace Use trace function No Clear trace memory before running Yes Operation after trace memory is full Non stop and overwrite to trace memory Accumulate trace time No Trace memory size frames B4k 7 gt E Coverage Use coverage functi
404. ister or C language bit field the size is displayed in bits and bits is added to the end of the number 2 Types to be treated are displayed when compiling the watch expression 3 The size of the watch expression is displayed in bytes In the case of double long double type type name is output in accordance with Precision of the double type and long double type in the CPU Category on the Common Options Tab in the CC RX Property panel The type name and size are output in float type when Handles in single precision is selected and in double type when Handles in double precision is selected 4 Address area The address that each watch expression is mapped is displayed hexadecimal number notation fixing If the watch expression is single CPU register or is unknown or is displayed instead Remark When the watch expression is the bit I O register the bit offset value is also displayed Example When the bit register is allocated to bit 4 of the address OxFF40 Display example 0xFF40 4 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 287 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 5 Memo area The user can write comments for the watch expressions categories Each comment for a watch expression category written in this area is saved individually as the user information of the project Therefore when any of the watch expression category is deleted the comment corresponding to it is also deleted
405. it E1 E20 Condition from the context menu Caution Address values of access related events cannot be changed in the Deiailed Settings of Access Events dialog box To change address values delete the subject event and then set a new event a Editing address conditions In the Compare Condition property in the Address Condition category specify a compare condition from the drop down list R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 159 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Depending on the specified compare condition the following address conditions can be set in combination with the address values displayed in the Address property in the Address category lt 1 gt When No conditions is specified The address value is made the condition When an access to the address value occurs the condition holds true lt 2 gt When Address area is specified E1 E20 The address value is made the start address Enter an end address value in the End Address property that is added in the Address Condition category When access to any place in the range of start and end addresses set occurs the condition holds true Also in the Area condition property that is added the same way it is possible to set outside of the address range for the address condition Cautions 1 RX200 Series Compare conditions based on an address area are not supported 2 RX600 Series Compare conditions based on
406. item including sub items in the default notation default Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in hexadecimal number Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in signed decimal number Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in unsigned decimal number Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in octal number Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in binary number Displays the character string of the selected item including sub items in ASCII code If the character size is 2 bytes and above it is displayed with the characters for each 1 byte arranged side by side Displays the value of the selected item in Float Note that when the value is not 4 byte data displays it in the default notation Displays the value of the selected item in Double Note that when the value is not 8 byte data displays it in the default notation Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value File menu CPU Register panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the CPU Register panel other items are common to all the panels Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Save CPU Register Data Overwrites the contents of this panel to the previously saved text file txt CSV file csv see
407. iting the selected watch expression by any value will cause the break to occur Remark A watch expression within the current scope can be specified To target a watch expression outside the current scope select a watch expression with a specified scope Figure 2 94 Example of Setting a Break Event Access type on a Watch Expression E1 E20 Watch1 a Z i X Notation Value A Size Address Memo a Timer Settings Periodic Updating From the context menu above the watch Rerah expression g_IntBuf enter a value in Access Break gt gt Set Write Combination Break to then Force Read Value press the Enter key Here the program will break when the value Oxb is written to the watch expression g_IntBuf R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 91 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 95 Example of Setting a Break Event Access type on a Watch Expression Simulator Watch ERR EP Ka X Notation Value Type Byte Size Address Memo Trace Outpo Periodic Updating gt Refresh From the context menu above the watch a Force Read Value expression g_IntBuf enter a value in Access Break gt gt Set Write Break to then press the W Add New Watch Enter key Here the program will break when the value Oxb is written to the watch expression g_IntBuf 2 Edit a br
408. ke settings related to external text editors General Font and Color category Make settings related to fonts and colors displayed on each panel General External Tools category Make settings with which external tools are started General Build Debug category Make settings related to build or debug General Text Editor category Make settings related to text editors R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 383 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE General Update category Make settings related to updates Others User Information category Make settings related to user information Remark For categories other than General Fonts and Colors and General Build Debug see the separate edition CubeSuite Start 2 Setting area This area is where various options for a selected category are set For details on how to set up each category see the section in which the relevant category is described Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings Restores all of the set items in this dialog box to their default state For the General External Tools category however newly registered contents are not deleted OK Applies changes and closes this dialog box Nullifies changes and closes this dialog box Applies changes without closing this dialog box Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 0
409. keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Specify the data mask Specify whether or not to specify a data mask This property is displayed when one of the following is specified in Compare condition property Equal Not equal Greater than gt Less than lt Greater than or equal to gt Less than or equal to lt Inside the range lt Values lt Outside the range lt Values lt Default No Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Yes A data mask is specified No No data mask is specified R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 RENESAS Page 370 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note2 Mask value Specify a mask value in hexadecimal This property is displayed when Yes is specified in Specify the data mask property Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Specify whether or not the data to be compared includes a sign This property is displayed when one of the following is specified in Compare condition property Difference Greater than gt Less than lt Greater than or equal to gt Less than or equal to lt Inside the range lt Values lt Outside the range lt Values lt Default Signed Modifying By selecting from the drop down
410. kground color Light blue Display colors on the Memory panel and Trace panel of spots that have been read and written Text color Standard color Background color Light gray Display colors on the Memory panel of spots whose values obtained from the debug tool are incorrect Coverage 100 Text color Standard color Background color Light green Display colors on the Editor panel and Disassemble panel of lines whose code coverage rates are 100 Coverage 1 99 AaBbCc Text color Standard color Background color Light pink Display colors on the Editor panel and Disassemble panel of lines whose code coverage rates are 1 to 99 Coverage 0 AaBbCc Text color Standard color Background color Light gray Display colors on the Editor panel and Disassemble panel of lines whose code coverage rates are 0 unexecuted Invalid Text color Gray Background color Standard color Display colors on the Memory panel of areas that are not memory mapped and of file names that are not actually present on the Project Tree panel Note The Default text and background colors depend on how Windows is set on the host machine used Here the default settings of Windows namely text color black and background color white are shown b Use default color The items selected in the Setting place area are displayed using the standard
411. l Figure 2 129 Timer Category RX600 Series E Timer Use 64bit counter No Operating frequency MHz 25 0000 Figure 2 130 Timer Category RX200 Series El Timer Operating frequency MHz 25 0000 1 Use 64bit counter RX600 Series Specify whether you want the measurement counter to be used in 32 bits x 2 or in 64 bits x 1 When you select Yes a 64 bit measurement counter can be used in which case however measurements can be taken in only one section Caution RX200 Series This property is not displayed because its measurement counter is 24 bits x 1 only 2 Operating frequency MHz Specify the counter s operating frequency that is referenced when converting count values into time Enter a numeric value directly in the range 0 0001 to 999 999 in MHz units to specify it If no operating frequency is specified count values are displayed Cautions 1 The result of timer measurement event is calculated based on the operating frequency and count values entered in this Property panel Therefore using a program that switches operating frequencies while the program is running will result in incorrect measurement result 2 Timer measurement proceeds even if the microcontroller is reset However the results may not be correct because the clock settings for measurement have been initialized 2 14 2 Measuring execution time from start to stop The debug tool has a preinstalled function to measure a program s execution time from
412. l No Select the serial No of the emulator to be connected N te Default Serial No of the connected emulator How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable Depends on the emulator used value R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 203 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note When E1 JTAG or E1 Serial is selected in the debug tool used serial Nos of E1 emulator are enumerated Similarly when E20 Serial or E20 JTAG is selected serial Nos of E20 emulator are enumerated 5 Connection with Target Board E1 E20 The detailed information on the connection to the target board is displayed and its configuration can be changed Power target from the emulator MAX 200mA Specify whether to supply power to the target system from E1 The E20 does not support the power supply function Therefore the displayed property value is No Default No How to change For E1 By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool For E20 Not changeable Specifiable value Yes Supplies power to the target system No Does not supply power to the target system Supply voltage E1 Specify the power voltage supplied to the target system This property appears only when the Power target from the emulat
413. l directly via the keyboard up to 1024 characters R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 330 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note that the output string can only be one line spaces allowed 2 Variable expression area Specify the variable expression s for the Printf event Type a variable expression directly into the text box up to 1024 characters You can specify up to 10 variable expressions for a single Printf event by separating them with commas If this dialog box is opened with a variable expression selected in the Editor panel Disassemble panel the selected variable expression appears as the default The basic input format that can be specified as variable expressions and the values output by Printf event are as follows Table A 14 Relationship between Variable Expressions and Output Value Printf Event Variable Expression Output Value Name of a C C language variable Nt 1 Value of a C C language variable Variable expression Variable expression Element of an array Variable expression Member name Note 2 Value of a structure union class member Variable expression gt Member name Noe 2 Value of a structure union class member that pointer to Variable expression Cast expression Value of the pointer to a member variable Variable expression gt Cast expression Value of the pointer to a member variable Variable
414. l number Note that if the subject area includes a read prohibited area display of that area is not updated R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 99 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b For write Table 2 11 Subject Area of the Real Time Display Update Function Write by DMM Function E1 Serial E1 JTAG E20 Serial Simulator E20 JTAG Internal ROM Notavailable available Entire range Data flash Not available CPU register Impossible Caution Local variables are not the subject of the real time display update function Remark For details on how to rewrite values on Memory panel and Watch panel see 3 Changing memory contents and 6 Changing the contents of watch expressions The memory values watch expressions updated by the pseudo RRM function are highlighted in pink on the Memory panel whereas those updated by the RRM function are highlighted as follows in accordance with the access status The font and background colors depend on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Read or fetch 00 00 00 00 fe 00000000 aauae S EA Note The watch expression value will be displayed as in the event of Lost on the Watch panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 100 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 99 Example of Memory Display by the Pseudo RRM Function Memory Panel E1
415. l will display FINE in this property and specifying RX E20 JTAG will display JTAG You cannot change the value of this property For the details of debug tool selection see 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 29 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 3 gt JTAG clock MHz From the drop down list select the baud rate JTAG clock to be used by the E20 emulator for communicating with the microcontroller on the target system This property is displayed only when JTAG is selected in the Communications method property The following baud rate is displayed in the drop down list 16 5 default 12 38 6 188 3 094 1 547 Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E20 2 Depending on the length or the method of JTAG signal wiring on the target system it may not be possible to communicate using the selected JTAG clock In such a case reducing the JTAG clock may achieve successful communication lt 4 gt FINE baud rate bps From the drop down list select the baud rate FINE baud rate to be used by the E20 emulator for communicating with the microcontroller on the target system This property is displayed only when FINE is selected in the Communications method property The following baud rate is displayed in the drop down list 2000000 default 750000 500000 250000 Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected
416. lated documents listed above are subject to change without notice Be sure to use the latest edition of each document when designing All trademarks or registered trademarks in this document are the property of their respective owners TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 8 1 1 Summary 8 1 2 Features 8 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 9 2 1 Overview 9 2 2 Preparation before Debugging 12 2 2 1 Confirm the connection to a host machine 12 2 3 Configuration of Operating Environment of the Debug Tool 14 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use 14 2 3 2 E1 15 2 3 3 E20 26 2 3 4 Simulator 38 2 4 Connect to Disconnect from the Debug Tool 44 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite 44 2 4 2 Disconnect the debug tool from CubeSuite 44 2 4 3 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite using hot plug in E1 JTAG E20 JTAG 45 2 5 Download and Upload 47 2 5 1 Execute downloading 47 2 5 2 An applied method of download 49 2 5 3 Executing an upload 58 2 6 Displaying and Changing Programs 60 2 6 1 Displaying source files 60 2 6 2 Displaying the disassembled result 66 2 6 3 Executing a build in parallel with other processes 69 2 6 4 Performing line assembly 70 2 7 Usage of PIC PID Function 72 2 7 1 Changing the allocation of a load module using the PIC PID function 73 2 8 Setting Overlay Sections 75 2 8 1 Selecting the priority section 76 2 9 Execut
417. latest information from the debug tool and saves data in an appropriate form in which data are currently displayed on this panel Choose Save Memory Data As from the File menu and the Data Save dialog box shown below will be opened At this time if a range is selected on panel while you choose this menu it is possible to save only the selected range of memory data In this dialog box follow the procedure below to save memory contents Figure 2 104 Saving Memory Data Data Save Dialog Box Data Save Memory Data File Name Memory1 File Type Text files txt Save Range Address Symbol Ox00000000 Ox000000ef a Specifying the File Name Specify a file name in which you want to save Directly enter it in the text box specifiable in up to 259 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Also you can select a file from the Select Data Save File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button b Specifying the File Type Select the type of file in which you want to save from the drop down list below The selectable file types are as follows R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 104 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Text files txt Text format default CSV comma separated Variables csv CSV formatNote Note Each piece of data are separated with a comma when saved To avoid the problem o
418. lect this item for the first time after the start of the program the operation will be the same as selecting Save Local Variables Data As Save Local Variables Opens the Save As dialog box in order to save the contents of this panel to a specified text file Data As txt or CSV file csv see b Saving of local variable values R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 277 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Edit menu Local Variable Panel Only ltems The Edit menu items listed below are provided exclusively on the Local Variables panel All the other menu items are disabled Copy Copies the content of a selected line or a character string to the clipboard Select All Puts the item into all selected state Rename Goes to edit mode in order to change the value of a selected local variable see 2 Changing the contents of local variables However this item is disabled during program execution Find Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Find in Files tab selected Replace Context menu Opens the Find and Replace dialog box with the Replace in Files tab selected All the items in the context menu are disabled during program execution Register to Watch1 Registers a selected local variable in the Watch panel Watch1 Copy Copies the content of a selected line or a character string to the clipbo
419. lected line The view will jump to the Editor panel if it is already open Remark Selecting Jump to Disassemble from the context menu will open the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 with the caret moved to the function call source address indicated by the selected line The view jumps to the Disassemble panel Disassemble1 if it is already open 3 Displaying local variables Selecting Jump to Local Variable at This Time from the context menu will open the Local Variables panel which displays local variables of the function indicated by the selected line 4 Saving the displayed contents of call stack information Selecting Save Call Stack Data As from the File menu will open the Save As dialog box box in which you can save the entire call stack information either in a text file txt or a CSV file CSV format When saving to a file the latest information will be retrieved from the debug tool Figure 2 117 Call Stack Information Output Image When Saved Depth Call stack 0 Call stack information 1 Call stack information R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 120 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 13 Collecting an Execution History This section describes how to collect an execution history of the program Generally a program s execution history is referred to as a trace the term of which is used in the pages below If the program goes wild it is very difficult to find
420. les at scope of the current PC value lt depth gt lt Function name file name line Displays local variables at scope of the calling function N i F number gt Ne After the program execution the scope selected here is retained as long as the selected scope exists Note It shows the function caller displayed on Call Stack panel 2 Name area Displays local variable names or function names Function parameters are also displayed as local variables Also arrays pointer type variables and structures unions have their hierarchical structure displayed in tree form This area cannot be edited The meaning of each icon displayed here is as follows Denotes a variable Auto variables internal static variables and register variables are also displayed Nte Arrays pointer type variables and structures unions have their hierarchical structure displayed in tree form If a variable is marked with at the beginning clicking it expands the next part of the variable After expansion the mark changes to Array All elements in the array Pointer type Variable at the destination pointed to by the pointer variables Note that if the destination pointed to by the pointer is a pointer it is further assigned a mark Clicking it shows the other part that is referenced However if the value pointed to by the pointer is unknown it is marked with Structure union All members of the structure union
421. licking the Add button When you click the Add button a blank item is displayed on the last line in the Download File List area R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 54 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS b Setting the properties of a download file to add In the Download file property area select a download file you want to add and set its download conditions For each displayed item make the following setting When setting is completed the file name you ve specified here is reflected in the blank item in the Download File List area Specify a file in load module format to add specifiable in up to 259 characters Default Blank Method to change By entering directly from the keyboard or specifying in the Select Download File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button displayed at the right edge of this property when it is selected Specifiable values See Table 2 2 Downloadable File Formats File type Specify the file type of a download file to add Here select Load module file Default Load module file Download object Specify whether or not to download object information from a specified file Default Yes Method to change By selecting from drop down list Specifiable values Yes Downloads object information No Does not download object information Download symbol informat
422. llowed by a hexadecimal value written in Page 285 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Type of Watch Expression Display Format Label address of immediate value EQU symbol Signed decimal value followed by a hexadecimal value written in bit symbol Unsigned decimal value followed by a hexadecimal value written in Others Hexadecimal value Note Floating point type values and complex type values are shown rounded to the nearest The meanings of the marks and colors displayed as the values of watch expressions are as follows character colors and background colors depend on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Display Example Default Description Character color Blue The value of the watch expression that the user is changing Press the Enter key to write to the target memory Background color Standard color Character color Pink The value of the watch expression that is displayed with the Real time display update function Background color Standard color Character color Brown The value of the watch expression that has been changed because of the execution of a program To reset the highlighting select the button on the toolbar or Reset Color from the context menu Background color Cream Character color Gray Variable that does not exist is registered as a watch expression or the value of the watch expres
423. log box in which you can edit the selected break event For details on editing in the dialog box see 1 Editing execution related events 3 Delete a break event execution type When deleting a break event execution type you have set first open the Events panel by selecting View menu gt gt Event After selecting the target combined break click x button on the toolbar to delete it see 2 17 5 Deleting events Each break event execution type can also be deleted by clicking on the event mark on the source or disassembled text R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 86 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Caution In the Events panel you cannot delete a break event execution type selectively in the combination breaks All the break events including access type displayed in the detailed information on the combination break will be deleted 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers By setting a break event access type with the access the program can be stopped when an arbitrary variable or I O register is accessed with the specified type You can also limit the accessed value The following types can be specified with the access Table 2 6 Types of Accesses to Variables Access Type Description Read The program is stopped with the read access to after reading the specified variable l O register Write The program is stopped with the write access
424. lso if you perform a search in the character string area you need to specify a character string as the search data The specified character string before being searched is converted to data in appropriate encode form in which data are currently displayed in that area Note that if you select any memory value immediately before opening this dialog box the value you ve selected is displayed by default b Specifying the Search Range Select the range in which you wan to be searched from the drop down list below Specify address range A search is conducted within the address range specified by Address Memory mapping A search is conducted within the selected range of memory mapping This list item displays memory mappings individually except non mapped areas that are displayed in the Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator Display form lt memory type gt lt address range gt lt size gt c Specifying the Address This item is valid only when you ve selected Specify Address Range in b Specifying the Search Range Specify the start address end address to set the address range in which you want a memory value to be searched Directly enter address expressions in the respective text boxes specifiable in up to 1 024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The calculation results of the address expressions you ve entered are respectively handled as the start address an
425. m the source level debugging but it is also possible to do so by downloading a hex format hex Motorola S format mot or binary data format bin file see 4 Performing source level debug with hex format Motorola S format or binary data format files at the source level 2 6 1 Displaying source files Use the Editor panel shown below to display the source file The Editor panel automatically opens with displaying source text of the specified position see 2 5 1 Execute downloading when a load module file is successfully downloaded If you want to open the Editor panel manually double click on the source file in the Project Tree panel For details on the contents and function in each area see the section for the Editor panel Remarks 1 You can open a file with a specific encoding selected in the Encoding dialog box that is opened via the File menu gt gt Open with encoding 2 Youcan zoom in and out of this panel See Zoom in or out on a view by using the Ctrl key mouse wheel combination R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 60 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 65 Displaying the Source File Editor Panel f main c 88 void main void 89 oR 90 E Start user code Do not edit cor 91 92 EEff86d1 93 EEff8 d4 TMP1_Start 94 EEff86da7 95 Efff8 da 96 97 Frrrs ed funci 98 Efff86e3 Func2 99 100 End user code Do not edit comme 101
426. m the drop down list change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable EXTAL Main clock operates as EXTAL frequency value HOCO Main clock operates as internal HOCO Main clock Specify EXTAL frequency in MHz units frequency MHZ Note that this property is enabled only when EXTAL is specified in the Main clock source property E1 E20 Default Blank How to By entering directly from the keyboard change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable 0 0001 to 99 9999 in MHz value Allow to change the Specify whether or not to allow manipulation of the main clock source by debugger when internal clock source on writing flash memory is rewritten internal flash memory E1 E20 Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable Yes Manipulation of the main clock source is allowed value No Manipulation of the main clock source is not allowed System clock ICLK Specify the CPU s operating clock frequency frequency MHz Default RX600 Series 100 RX200 Series 50 Simulator How to By entering directly from the keyboard change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable 1 to 1000 in MHz value 4 Connection with Emulator E1 E20 Emulator seria
427. mble Offset value Note 3 The offset value from the nearest label is displayed when a label is defined for the address results Code The code that is the target of disassembly is displayed in hexadecimal number Instruction R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Instruction is displayed as the result of disassembling The mnemonics are shown highlighted in blue ztENESAS Page 254 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Notes 1 The highlighting color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box 2 The source text can be set to non display by clicking the button toggle on the toolbar or removing the check for Mixed Display from the context menu this option is checked by default 3 Offset values are not displayed by default They can be displayed by clicking the button on the toolbar or selecting Show Offset from the context menu This area is provided with the following functions a b c d e Line assembly Instructions and code displayed in this panel can be edited line assembly See 2 6 4 Performing line assembly for details on how to operate it Program execution by instruction level Execution can be controlled at the instruction level unit by step executing a program in a state where there is a focus on this panel See 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps for details on how to operate it Setting o
428. memory For more details regarding property setting see 5 Downloading files to external flash memory E1 E20 Caution You cannot change the property in this category while connected to E20 2 Debug Tool Settings tab In the Debug Tool Settings tab you configure the basic settings of the debug tool for each one of the following categories a Memory b Access Memory While Running c Break R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 31 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS d System e Trace f Timer a Memory You can configure the memory in this category Figure 2 33 Memory Category E Memory E Memory mappings 28 0 On chip RAM area 1 Reserved area 2 20 registers area 3 Reserved area 4 1 0 registers area 5 20 registers area 6 Reserved area 7 Data flash area 8 Reserved area 9 Other memory area 10 Reserved area 11 20 registers area 12 Reserved area 13 1 0 registers area 14 Reserved area 15 External area CS7 16 External area CS6 17 External area C55 18 External area C54 19 External area C53 20 External area C52 21 External area CS1 22 Reserved area 23 Other memory area 24 Reserved area 25 Other memory area 26 Reserved area 27 On chip ROM area Verify on writing to memory Yes lt 1 gt Memory mappings Current memory mapping status is displayed in detail for each type of memory
429. mory is filled with collected trace data from the drop down list below Overwrite trace When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite continues writing trace data over the old data memory and default continue execution Stop trace When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite stops writing trace data but does not stop program execution Stop When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite stops writing trace data and stops program execution at the same time R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 121 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS c Trace data type For this property specify the type of trace data to be collected from the drop down list below Branch Source destination address information of branching during program execution are collected as trace data Branch Data Source destination address information of branching during program execution as well as data accessNote 1 information on access events that occurred are collected as trace data Note 2 Data access Data information on access events that occurred during program execution are collected as trace data Notes 1 E1 Serial RX200 Series Trace data for Branch Data access cannot be collected Therefore this item is not displayed in the drop down list 2 E1 Serial RX200 Series To collect trace data for Data access it is necessary to set address conditions in a point trace For details about
430. mple projects with debug console functions follow the procedure described below 1 Loading a sample project From Open Sample Project on the Start panel of CubeSuite load sample project RX610_Tutorial_ DebugConsole for the E1 E20 Remark For details about the Start panel see the separate edition CubeSuite Start 2 Editing the low level interface routine file assembly language part Simulator When the simulator is to be used the low level interface routine file lowlvl src assembly language part must be edited so that it will be specific to the simulator Replace the contents of IlowlvI src with the following sample code for the simulator R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 173 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS GLB _charput GLB _charget EQU Oh SECTION P CODE 10_BUF R2 R1 R2 1220000h R1 PARM R3 R2 R3 R3 R2 SIM_IO R3 1210000h R1 IO_BUF R2 PARM R3 R2 R3 R3 R2 SIM_IO R3 R3 IO_BUF R2 SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL 1 SECTION B_1 DATA BLKB ih END 3 Selecting the debug tool to be used To select or switch the debug tool use the context menu shown by right clicking on the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node on the Project Tree panel Remark For the details of debug tool selection see 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 174 of
431. n read write access to the caret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or I O register see b How to set a timer end event ztENESAS Page 242 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify a channelN te 2 in which a timer start event is set Set Timer lt N gt View Result of Timer Opens the Events panel and displays only timer related events Clears all the coverage measurement results currently being stored in the debug tool Clear Coverage Information Note that this item appears only when the debug tool used supports the coverage function Simulator Notes 1 A message is displayed if these items are selected when the downloaded load module file is older than the opened source file 2 The specifiable number of channels differs between the RX600 and RX200 Series as shown below RX600 Series 2 32 bits 2 or 1 64 bits 1 RX200 Series 1 24 bits 1 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 243 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory panel This panel displays or changes memory contents see Section 2 11 1 Displaying and changing memory contents Up to four memory panels can be opened at a time with each panel discriminated by the name in their title bar Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 or Memory 4 When memory values change after execut
432. n a jump to subroutine instruction the same operation as the when Build amp Download is under execution or when disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Return Out from the Debug menu Disconnects communication with the currently connected debug tool However this item is disabled when Build amp Download is under execution or when already disconnected from the debug tool This is the same as selecting Disconnect from Debug Tool from the Debug menu R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 189 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Note Step execution can be performed either at the source level or at the instruction level For details see Section 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps 3 Panel display area This area displays various panels available For details about displayed contents see the section in which the relevant panel is described 4 Status bar The status bar displays the information shown below Figure A 2 Statusbar Executes CPU reset 3 Line 1 Column Read only m BREAK Pow Off D oxffff863c GORX E1 JTAG 1 1215 Sy fe a Status message Displays the following messages Simple description of a selected menu item Message to notify that a value input in the panel dialog is invalid Message to notify that the character string specified in the Find and Replace dialog box could not be found Message to identify the cause o
433. n access type events and modifies the settings Detailed Settings of Interrupt Events dialog box Simulator Displays the detailed information on interrupt events and modifies the set tings Port Setting dialog box Sets COM port in the Debug Console panel Scroll Range Settings dialog box Sets the scroll range for the Memory panel Disassemble panel Go to Line dialog box Moves the caret to the specified line Go to the Location dialog box Moves the caret to the specified position Data Save dialog box Saves the settings and other data displayed in the respective windows pan els dialogs or saves upload data Progress Status dialog box Displays the progress of the processing being executed Option dialog box Makes settings for various environments External flash memory dialog box E1 E20 Selects external flash definition files USD files Open Log File dialog box Selects log files Select Download File dialog box Selects files to be downloaded Open File dialog box Selects files to be opened Print Preview window Previews the source file before printing Save As dialog box Saves files or the contents of various windows panels dialogs Select Data Save File dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Selects the file to save data 2tENESAS Page 184 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Thi
434. n is executed This property is displayed only when Stop is specified in the Select execution mode property Default Yes How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value Yes Stops simulation No Does not stop simulation 10 Instruction Decode Cache Simulator Cache the results of decoding instructions and accelerate simulation R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Specify whethe r or not to use the instruction decode cache function Default No How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value Yes Uses the decode cache function No Does not use the decode cache function 2tENESAS Page 222 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Download File Settings tab This tab is used to display the detailed information categorized by the following and the configuration can be changed For details on the download function see 2 5 Download and Upload 1 Download 2 Debug Information Figure A 18 Property Panel Download File Settings Tab Property S RX E20TAG Property 1 CPU Reset after download Yes Erase flash ROM before download No Automatic change method of event setting position Suspend event 2 gt JE DebugInformation E
435. n the Update display during the execution property is set to Yes Specify the interval in 100ms unit to update the contents in the Watch panel Memory panel display while executing a program Directly enter the Integer number between 100 and 65500 rounding up the fractions less than 100ms 500 is selected by default c Trace You can configure the trace function in this category See 2 13 Collecting an Execution History for details on the trace function and this category configuration d lt Coverage You can configure the coverage function in this category See 2 15 Measure Coverage Simulator for details on the coverage function and this category configuration e Stream input output You can configure the stream input output for performing standard input output or file input output to from the user program in this category R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 41 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 49 Stream input output Category E StreamI 0 lt 1 gt lt 2 gt Use stream 1 0 function No Stream 0 address Ree 0 Use stream input output function Specify from the drop down list whether to use the stream input output function Select Yes when using this function No is selected by default Stream input output address Specify the address at which to start the stream input output Directly enter the desired address 0x00000000 is specifi
436. n the language of the current source file has line comment delimiters specified e g C Convert Tabs to Spaces Converts all tabs on the current cursor line into spaces Convert Spaces to Tabs Converts each set of consecutive space characters on the current line to tab characters but only for those sets of spaces that are at least equal to one tab size Tabify Selected Lines Tabifies the current line causing all spaces at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to tabs where possible Untabify Selected Lines Untabifies the current line causing all tabs at the start of the line prior to any text to be converted to spaces R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 240 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Make Uppercase APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Converts all letters within the selection to uppercase Make Lowercase Converts all letters within the selection to lowercase Toggle Character Casing Toggles the character cases uppercase lowercase of all letters within the selection Capitalize Capitalizes the first character of every word within the selection Delete Horizontal Whitespace Deletes any excess white space either side of the cursor position leaving only one whitespace character remaining If there the cursor is within a word or not surrounded by whitespace this operation will have no effect Trim Trailing
437. n the value representable by 32 bits Mnemonic Specify a character string of instruction if needed as the search condition The character string specified here is searched from within the Source Disassemble area of the Trace panel Enter an instruction directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case insensitive and partial matches are also allowed Access Address Specify an access address if needed as the search condition Enter an address expression directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The access address can also be specified as a range of addresses In this case enter address expressions in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank or labeled Input value when range is specified the fixed address specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search Note that if any address value greater than the microcontroller s address space is specified the high order address value is masked when a search is performed Also no address values can be specified that are greater than the value representable by 32 bits Access Status This item is enabled only when Access Address is specified Select the type of access from the drop down list below When not limiting the type of access select No Specification No Specif
438. nd Replace dialog box Debug Console panel Performs standard input output Memory Mapping dialog box Simulator Sets the memory mapping Download Files dialog box Selects files to be downloaded and sets the download conditions Text Edit dialog box Inputs and modifies character strings Action Events dialog box Sets action events Encoding dialog box Selects a file encoding Save Settings dialog box Specifies the encoding and the new line code of the file being edited Memory Initialize dialog box Initializes memory Memory Search dialog box Searches memory Print Address Range Settings dialog box Sets the address range to print the contents of the Disassemble panel Trace Search dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Searches trace data RENESAS Page 183 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Window Panel Dialog Box Name Description Combination Condition dialog box E1 E20 Displays the conditions for event combination and modifies the settings Detailed Settings of Timer Measurement dialog box E1 E20 Displays the detailed information on timer events and modifies the settings Detailed Settings of Execution Events dialog box Displays the detailed information on execution type events and modifies the settings Detailed Settings of Access Events dialog box Displays the detailed information o
439. newly save the contents of this panel to the specified text file txt CSV file csv see e Saving trace data Edit menu Trace panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for Edit menu in the Trace panel other items are all invalid Note that all these items are invalid during execution of a program Copies the contents of the selected line to the clipboard multiple line selections impossible Opens the Trace Search dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 302 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Context menu Clear Trace Clears the trace memory and the display of this panel initialized This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Opens the Trace Search dialog box This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Copy Copies the contents of the selected line to the clipboard multiple line selections impossible This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Sets to the Mixed display mode as the display mode Mixed Display This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Disassemble View Sets to the Disassemble display mode as the display mode This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Source View Sets to the Source display mode as the display mode This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Notat
440. ng area and the Font settings for text edi tor area will be displayed Although this example shows a character string AaBbCc by default any character string can be entered directly in the text box 3 Font settings for text editor area Clicking the Font button will open the Font Dialog Box below in which you can select the font to be used by the text editor R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 388 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Font Figure A 70 Font Dialog Box Font style T Microsoft Sans Serif Regular Microsoft Sans Serf A E T Miriam O MY Boli O Myriad Web Pro O Myriad Web Pro Condi faic Miriam Fixed Bold Miriam Transparent Bold Italic Effects Sample C Strikeout C Underline AaBbYyzz 4 Buttons area Script Westem Initialize Settings Restores specifications for all of the currently displayed items to their default Function buttons Button Function Initialize All Settings OK Restores all of the set items in this dialog box to their default state For the General External Tools category however newly registered contents are not deleted Applies changes and closes this dialog box Nullifies changes and closes this dialog box Applies changes without closing this dialog box Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2
441. nload Files Dialog Box Download Files Download file list Download file property Download file information File Download object Yes Download symbol information Yes Specify the PIC PID offset No File Specify the file to be downloaded Download file list area Download file property area Here a method on how to set in the Download Files dialog box shown above is described using the following cases as examples 1 Changing the download conditions for load module files 2 Adding a download file hex mot or bin R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 51 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 Downloading multiple load module files 4 Performing source level debug with hex format Motorola S format or binary data format files at the source level 5 Downloading files to external flash memory E1 E20 1 Changing the download conditions for load module files To change the download conditions for load module files whether to load object information or symbol information under which they are downloaded follow the procedure described below as you fill in the Download Files dialog box a Selection of a load module file In the Download File List area select the load module file to download b Alteration of download conditions In the Download File List area you ll see the download conditions for the currently selected load module file
442. nnot be used Only Overwrite trace memory and continue execution can be used Trace data type Branch and Branch Data access cannot be used Only Data access can be used External trace output Do not output cannot be used CPU execution and Trace output can be used Trace memory size MByte Only 1M byte can be used b Operation after trace memory is full Specify the operation to be performed when the trace memory is filled with collected trace data from the drop down list below Overwrite trace When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite continues writing trace data over the old data memory and default continue execution Stop trace When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite stops writing trace data but does not stop program execution Stop When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite stops writing trace data and stops program execution at the same time c Trace data type This property is displayed only when you ve selected Trace for the Usage of trace function property Specify the type of trace data to be collected from the drop down list below Branch Source destination address information of branching during program execution are collected as trace data Branch Data Source destination address information of branching during program execution as well as data accessNote 1 information on access events that occurred are collected as trace data Data accessote
443. ns How to open Inthe External Flash E1 E20 category provided in the Connect Settings tab on the Property panel click button which is displayed by selecting File property in the External flash definition file property Description of each area 1 Look in area Selects the folder in which a file to download is stored from the drop down list 2 File list area Display the list of files that match the conditions specified in Look in and Files of type areas 3 File name area Specifies the file name to be registered R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 392 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Selects the file type to be registered from the following drop down list USD files usd User system definition file format default All files All file formats Function buttons Adds the specified file to the File property in the External flash definition file property Closes this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 393 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Open Log File dialog box This dialog box selects a log file in which to save the displayed content of the Debug Console panel Figure A 73 Open Log File Dialog Box Open Log File Save in sample N DefaultBuild My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents 98 My Comput
444. nstruction is executed Select Yes if you wish to stop at the execution of INT instruction default Stop BRK instruction is executed This property is displayed only when you have selected Stop in Select execution mode property Specify from the drop down list whether to stop when BRK instruction is executed Select Yes if you wish to stop at the execution of BRK instruction default Instruction decode cache In this category you can configure instruction decode cache a function which retains decode result during instruction execution so that it can be used again when the instruction at the same address is executed lt 1 gt Figure 2 51 Instruction decode cache Category E Instruction Decode Cache Cache the results of decoding instructions and accelerate simulation No Increase simulation speed by caching instruction decode result Specify from the drop down list whether to enable instruction decode cache function Select Yes to enable this function No is selected by default Caution As the instruction decode cache function reuses the decode result it cannot be used in programs that employ self modifying code If an instruction is modified as a result of unintended program operation error detection may not be performed properly 3 Download File Settings tab In the Download File Settings tab you can configure download setting for the debug tool See 2 5 1 Execute downloading for details on each categor
445. nt caret position if the Editor panel is already opened jump to the panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 300 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 5 6 In addition similarly by selecting Jump to Disassemble the Disassemble panel Disasemmble1 is opened with moving the caret to the address corresponding to the fetch address of the line at the current caret position if the Disassemble panel is already opened jump to the panel Disassemble1 c Linking with other panels By clicking the Os button on the toolbar or selecting Window Connecting gt gt Connect Source Window Connect Disassemble Window from the context menu it is possible to link and display the corresponding places on the Editor panel Disassemble panel with the address of the caret position on this panel used as the pointer no movement of the focus is done d Pop up display By superimposing the mouse cursor on a line all the area item data corresponding to that line is displayed as a pop up in tandem shape e Saving trace data The Data Save dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save Trace Data As and the contents of this panel can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv See 2 13 8 Saving the displayed content of an execution history for details on the method for saving trace data Address area The target address of memory access is displayed Howe
446. nts have been set is selected all of the events that have been set are disabled Delete Event Deletes the selected event When the event mark 8 which indicates that multiple events have been set is selected all of the events that have been set are deleted View Event Detailed Setup Opens the Events panel to display the detailed information of the selected event Pop up display By superimposing the mouse cursor on the Event mark the name of the event the detailed information for the event and the comments added to the event are pop up displayed When multiple events have been set in the applicable place information for each event up to a maximum of three events is listed and displayed 2 Address area The address per line to start disassembling is displayed hexadecimal number notation fixing In addition the current PC mark that corresponds to the current PC position PC register value is displayed The address width corresponds to the one in memory space of the specified microcontroller in the project R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 253 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE For the source text line in the mixed display mode line numbers xxx in the source file correspond to the start address are displayed This area is provided with the following functions a Pop up display By superimposing the mouse cursor on a address or line number the following
447. nts set in the Disassemble panel displays lt Line numbers in the format lt Symbol offset gt in the condition below Line information exists and the specified position where the event is set is not the top of the line information Line information does not exist and symbol information exists Shows lt Line numbers in in the following condition Line information and symbol information do not exist lt Variable name gt Shows the variable name in the source file Display format is the same as the watch type scope specification expression lt Comparison condition gt Condition to compare is shown If the comparison value is not specified comparison condition is not shown lt Comparison value gt Comparison value is shown If the comparison value is not specified comparison condition is not shown lt Address gt Address in the memory area is shown only in hex number lt Combination condition gt Displays one of the following conditions OR AND Sequential lt detailed information of combination break gt Detailed information about combination break event is displayed lt Total gt Shows the measurement result of the timer total execution time The unit is either of ns us ms s min if however the unit is in min a value in s unit also appears If a timer overflow occurs see 2 14 4 Range of measurable time or if the illegal value was acquired OVERF
448. o ITAG 16 5 Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal Res FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF F 1000 Single chip mode Single chip mode Little endian data Internal ROM RAM Connect Settings R Download File Setting Follow the steps below by selecting the corresponding tab on the Property panel 1 Connect Settings tab 2 Debug Tool Settings tab 3 Download File Settings tab 4 Hook Transaction Settings tab 1 Connect Settings tab In the Connect Settings tab you configure the connection with categories Internal ROM RAM b Clock c Connection with Emulator d Connection with Target Board e Flash f Operating Modes of CPU g External Flash a Internal ROM RAM The configuration of internal ROM RAM is displayed in this the debug tool for each one of the following category R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 16 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 8 Internal ROM RAM Category E Internal ROM RAM lt 1 gt Size of internal ROM KBytes The internal ROM size to emulate is displayed unit Kbytes You cannot change the value of this property lt 2 gt Size of internal RAM Bytes The internal RAM size to emulate is displayed unit bytes You cannot change the value of this property lt 3 gt Size of DataFlash memory KByites The data flash memory size is displayed unit Kbytes If the
449. o stop measuring the execution time of the program when the E1 E20 line at caret is executed see 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section E1 E20 Set Trace Start Event Sets a Start Tracing event to start collecting the trace data when the line at the caret is executed see 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section Set Trace End Event Sets a Stop Tracing event to stop collecting the trace data when the line at the caret is executed see 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section Register Action Event Opens the Action Events dialog box to set an action event to the corresponding address of the line at the caret position b Changing the status of events via the menu The events status can be changed from the following menu displayed by right clicking the event mark Enable Event s Changes all events state to an Enabled state When an event is enabled and its condition is met the event occurs Disable Event s Changes all events state to a Disabled state When an event is disabled and its condition is met the event will not occur Delete Event s Deletes all events View Details in Event Panel Opens the Events panel to display the detailed information of the selected event c Pop up display By hovering the mouse cursor over the Event mark the name of the event the detailed information for the event and the comments added to the event are a pop up displayed
450. of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Event mark The event mark shows the type of event and in addition shows the current setting state The meanings of the marks displayed are as follows Event Type Hardware Break Table A 11 Event Mark Valid State Invalid State Suspended State Software Break E1 E20 Combination break E1 E20 Unconditional Trace Run Break Timer Trace Used only in the Evenis panel Trace start Trace end Used only in the Editor panel Disassemble panel Timer Result E1 E20 Used only in the Evenis panel Timer start Timer end Used only in the Editor panel Disassemble panel Point Trace Printf event Action event Interrupt event Action event Simulator Notes 1 Setting of two or more events There is one or more event with valid state Used only in the Editor panel Disassemble panel 2 There is no event with valid state and at least one event with invalid state 3 All the set events are suspended state R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 306 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 c Event name APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The event type and ID number are displayed as the event name A number from 0001 is automatically provided as the ID number for each event no renumbering of the ID number is done even in t
451. of a selected item in ASCII code Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value of a selected item at the end of the value with the equivalent enclosed in parentheses Changing the contents of I O registers The I O register values can be edited In the Value area click the selected I O register value again to set it in the Edit mode Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode Edit the value directly from the keyboard and then press the Enter key The value you ve changed is written into the debug tool s target memory Cautions 1 This operation cannot be performed during program execution 2 The values of read only I O registers cannot be changed Remarks 1 If a number with fewer digits than the size of the I O register is entered the higher order digits will be padded with zeroes 2 Ifa number with more digits than the size of the I O register is entered the higher order digits will be masked 3 I O register values can also be entered using ASCII characters When 0x41 is entered as the value of I O register CRC CRCDOR gt gt 0x41 is written to CRC CRCDOR When ASCII character A is entered as the value of I O register CRC CRCDOR gt gt 0x41 is written to CRC CRCDOR Displaying and changing I O register contents during program execution Select an I O register that is the subject you want to display or change and register it as a watch expression on Watch panel That wa
452. of saving range h Input the end of saving range he 1 Specifying the File Name Specify a file name in which you save Enter directly in the text box specifiable in up to 259 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Also you can select a file from the Select Data Save File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button 2 Specifying the File Type Select the type of file in which you want to save from the drop down list below The selectable file types are as follows Note that the ID Tagged item is displayed only when the selected microcontroller is a product that comes with internal data flash memory and supports the ID tag function By selecting the ID Tagged item it is possible to save information on ID tag Table 2 3 Uploadable File Formats List display Format Intel Hex format hex Hex formatNote Motorola S format mot S Record format Binary data bin Binary data format Note In the Intel hex format memory contents are always saved in extension linear address code 32 bit address 3 Specifying the Save Range Address Symbol Specify the start address and end address to set a range of memory to be saved in a file Enter hexadecimal values or address expressions directly in the respective text boxes or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Remark By holding down Ct
453. ogram execution is halted Specifiable Non stop and overwrite Continues overwriting trace data even after trace value to trace memory memory is used up Stop trace Stops overwriting trace data when trace memory is E1 E20 used up Stop Stops running the program and overwriting trace data when trace memory is used up Trace data type Specify the type of data to be acquired from trace E1 E20 Default Branch How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable One of the following as selected from the drop down list value RX600 Series Branch branch data access or data access RX200 Series Branch or data access R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 218 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE External trace output Specify the method for trace output to external device E20 JTAG RX600 Series Default CPU execution How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable CPU execution CPU execution has priority over trace output value Trace output Trace output has priority over CPU execution Do not output Trace information is not output Trace memory Specify the size of trace memory size MByte E20 JTAG RX600 Series How to By selecting from the drop down list Default 1
454. ogram section s start address begins with the address 0x1000 enter 1000 for this item The subject section is downloaded to the address 0x2000 Default 0 Method to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable Hexadecimal number in the range 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF value PID Offset Enter an offset value to be set in the PID register that was specified in the load module when it was created For example to set 0x200 in the PID register when the load module is executed enter 200 for this item Default 0 Method to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable Hexadecimal number in the range 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF value Notes 1 Unless symbol information is downloaded source level debugging cannot be performed 2 If you select Yes for load modules created not using the PIC PID functions see Section 2 7 Usage of PIC PID Function debug operation cannot be guaranteed c Clicking the OK button Settings you ve made in this dialog box are enabled with the download conditions changed 2 Adding a download file hex mot or bin To add a file to download hex format hex Motorola S format mot or binary data format bin follow the procedure described below as you fill in the Download Files dialog box a Clicking the Add button When you click the Add button a blank item is displayed on the last line in the Download File List area b
455. oint can be set or deleted easily in the Main area as well see a Setting deleting breakpoints i Registering watch expression Variable names of C language CPU registers I O registers and assembler symbols can be registered in the Watch panel as watch expressions See 1 Registering watch expressions for details on how to operate it This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened j File monitor The following function for monitoring is provided to manage source files Amessage is displayed when the downloaded load module file is older than the source file to open If the contents of the currently displayed file have been changed without using CubeSuite a message will appear asking you whether you wish to save the file or not R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 235 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE k Selecting blocks You can select a block that consists of multiple lines by using the Alt key left mouse button combination To select a block press the Alt key and drag the left mouse button void main void Start user code Do not Editing of the selected block can be done by using Cut Copy Paste or Delete in the Edit menu I Zoom in or out on a view You can zoom in and out of the editor view by using the Ctrl key mouse wheel combination Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel forward will
456. oject File for PM prj Project file for PM C source file c C language source file C source file cpp cc cp C language source file Header file h hpp inc Header file Assemble file src Assembler source file Map file map lbp Map file Hex file hex Hex file Assemble list file Ist Assemble list file S record file mot S record file Text file txt Function buttons Text format Button Function When you select Open File from the File menu The selected file will open When you select Open with Encoding from the File menu Encoding dialog box will open This dialog box will close R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 399 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Print Preview window This window is used to preview the source file before printing Figure A 76 Print Preview Window Print Preview Toolbar lt fl ES void main void Start user code Do not edit comment ge TMPO Start TMP1 Start an 1 AD Start while 10 funci ans func2 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar Context menu How to open Focus the Editor panel and then select Print Preview from the File menu Description
457. ojects Intel Hex format hex 03 start segment address code and Standard offset address 05 start linear address code are 02 segment address code ignored 04 extension linear address code Motorola S type Hex format SO S1 S9 16 bits SO S2 S8 24 bits SO S3 S7 32 bits Binary data format Note Precautions to take when using IAR compilers made by IAR Systems of Sweden Supported versions IAR Embedded Workbench for Renesas Ver 2 30 1 or above Supported options General options Byte order Little endian big endian double type size 32 bits 64 bits int type size 16 bits 32 bits Denormal number Handled as zero Data model Far Position dependence Off C C compilers Language C C and GNU C extended specification are not supported Derived languages of C C89 C99 LVA permission Off C inline semantic Off Type of CHAR Signed unsigned Optimization None low Output Generate debug information On Assemblers Language Discriminate user symbols between uppercase and lowercase On Output Generate debug information On Linkers Output Include debug information in output files On Precautions to take when debugging Static variables in file cannot be referenced on Watch panel etc The static variables defined in functions can be referenced It is only the current function that can be displayed on the Call Stack panel If a defined variable is compose
458. om the debug tool Fy y Trace Timer E1 JTAG E20 JTAG R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 191 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Coverage Simulator Note E20 JTAG The setting of the Usage of trace function property in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab is switched between Trace and Realtime RAM monitor Simulator Reflected in the specification of Use trace function or Use coverage function property in the Trace or Coverage category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 192 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Project Tree panel This panel shows the constituent elements of the project e g microcontroller build tool and debug tool in tree form Note that the debug tools used are selected or switched from one to another on this panel Figure A 3 Project Tree Panel Project Tree Toolbar UR Tutorial Project RE RSF56108WxBG Microcontroller Ay CC RX Build Tool S RX E1 JTAG Debug Tool D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool a F File c Tutorial c c dbsct c M e intprg c c resetprg c c sbrk c c sort c vecttbl c This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar Context menu How to open Choose Project Tree from the View
459. omatically selected See 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint for details on breakpoints Software break Sets software breakpoint preferentially Hardware break Sets hardware breakpoint preferentially default d System You can configure the emulation system in this category For more information regarding the execution of a specified routine before the execution and after the break of a program see 2 9 4 Execute a specified routine E1 E20 Figure 2 19 System Category E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM No Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH No Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Yes Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Yes Routine to run immediately after execution stops lt 1 gt Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM Specify whether to debug programs that rewrite internal program ROM area such as those that use ROM P E mode R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 23 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 4 gt lt 5 gt lt 6 gt Caution You cannot change this property while connected to E1 Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH Specify whether to debug programs that rewrite internal data flash area such
460. on R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 376 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 End address area Specify the end address of the range of scrolling You can either type an address expression directly into the text box up to 1024 characters or select it from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items Note that this area becomes invalid if Start address is specified with All Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function Function buttons Button Function Sets the specified scroll range for the target panel Moves the caret to the start address from the beginning of the area displayed in the target panel Cancel Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 377 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Go to Line dialog box This dialog box is used to move the caret to a specified source line Figure A 63 Go to Line Dialog Box Go to Line Line number 1 133 1 4 4 Function buttons 4 OK This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open From the Edit menu select Go To On the Editor panel s
461. on Expression Expression Remainder calculation Expression ExpressionN Addition Expression ExpressionN Subtraction Expression amp Expression Logical multiplication by bits Expression ExpressionN Exclusive disjunction by bits Note Expression Expression Logical sum by bits Note Variables and functions can be combined by an operator only with variables functions and integer constants Example C variable name IOR name 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function This function helps users input data by selecting one of the listed symbol names that exist in the program when specifying an address expression and so on R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 181 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS The list of symbol names appears by pressing the Ctrl Space keys when a part of the target symbol name is being input in the text box that supports this function In this list double click the target symbol name or press the Space Enter key after selecting it by using the Up Down key to complement the symbol name currently being input At this time if a key other than the Space Enter key is pressed or the focus moves to outside the panel dialog box currently being operated then the list of symbol names will disappear the symbol name completion will not be performed Cautions 1 If there are no character strings in the t
462. on Note that by selecting the appropriate tab in this dialog box you can choose to search for trace data at the instruction level or search at the source level However when you search for trace data at the instruction level be sure that the Trace panel is displayed in the Mixed display mode or Disassemble display mode Also if you perform a search at the source level be sure that the trace panel is displayed in the Mixed display mode or Source display mode Figure 2 124 Searching for Trace Data Trace Search Dialog Box Trace Search Tab selection area J i Source Level Search condition Fetch Address Mnemonic Access Address Access Status Data Search range Number Search Backward Search Forward This section describes the following 1 Searching at the instruction level 2 Searching at the source level 1 Searching at the instruction level Search for trace data at the instruction level After selecting the Instruction Level tab follow the procedure below to perform a search R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 134 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 125 Searching for Trace Data at Instruction Level Trace Search Source Level Search condition Fetch Address Mnemonic Access Address Access Status Data Search range Number Search Backward Search Forward a
463. on Trace data type Branch lt 1 gt Usage of trace function Trace is displayed as the usage of trace function You cannot change the value of this property lt 2 gt Operation after trace memory is full Select the trace acquisition mode from the following drop down list R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 24 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Overwrite trace memory and continue Continues overwriting the older trace data after the trace memory is execution full Stop trace Stops writing the trace data after the trace memory is full Stop Breaks after the trace memory is full lt 3 gt Trace data type Select the type of data for which trace is to be acquired from the drop down list The type of data that can be selected differs depending on the series of the microcontroller Following data types are displayed in the drop down list RX600 series Branch Branch Data access Data access RX200 series Branch Data access f Timer You can configure the timer function in this category Figure 2 21 Timer Category RX600 Series El Timer Use 64bit counter No Operating frequency MHz 25 0000 Figure 2 22 Timer Category RX200 Series El Timer Operating frequency MHz 25 0000 lt 1 gt Use 64bit counter RX600 series Specify whether to use two 32 bit counters or one 64 bit counter lt 2 gt Operating frequency MHZz Specify the operating frequency to be used when
464. on No 8 gt fE Streami 0 Use stream 1 0 function No Stream 1 0 address Ree 9 p fE Execution Mode Select execution mode Stop when undefined instruction exception occurs Yes Stop when privileged instruction exception occurs Stop when access exception occurs Stop when floating point exception occurs Stop when interrupt occurs Stop INT instruction is executed Stop BRK instruction is executed 10 gt Instruction Decode Cache Cache the results of decoding instructions and accelerate simulation R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 213 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 17 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab Simulator RX200 Series Property RX Simulator Property 1 gt E Memory Memory mappings 2 gt E Access Memory While Running Update display during the execution Display update interval ms 500 5 gt E Trace Use trace function No Clear trace memory before running Yes Operation after trace memory is full Non stop and overwrite to trace memory Accumulate trace time No Trace memory size frames B4k 7 gt Coverage Use coverage function No 8 gt a Streami 0 Use stream 1 0 function No Stream 1 0 address Fee 0 9 Execution Mode Select execution mode Stop when undefined instruction exception occurs Stop when privileged instruction exception occurs Stop when interrupt occurs Stop INT instru
465. on is not automatically evaluated after the program has halted In this case the address expression is evaluated by clicking the Move button Move If the Move When Halted checkbox is not checked the address expression is evaluated by clicking this button and the caret moves to the address derived from that calculation 2 Changing the display form of values The forms in which data are displayed in the memory value area and character string area can be changed freely by using the toolbar buttons shown below However these buttons are disabled during program execution R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 96 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which memory values are displayed Displays memory values in hexadecimal default el Displays memory values in signed decimal Displays memory values in 16 bit width Values are converted depending on the endian of the target memory area Displays memory values in 32 bit width Values are converted depending on the endian of the target memory area Displays memory values in 64 bit width Values are converted depending on the endian of the target memory area 3 Changing memory contents Memory values can be edited In the memory value area or character string area move the caret to the target memory value and then edit it directly from the keyboard When a memory value is edited the
466. ondition by the combination break or Trace start event on a mutually exclusive basis So when AND and SEQUENTIAL are selected as a combination condition for either of the events only OR can be selected for the other b Editing the subject event Change the order of events in the subject event list using the Up or Down button These buttons are enabled only when you ve selected Sequential for the combination condition and moved the caret to an event in the subject event list R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 163 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 146 Changing the Order of Events in the Subject Event List Sequential Combination Condition Break Combination Seaueni Object event No Event 1 After Execution sort c 33 Oxffff865t 2 After Execution sort cH36 Oxffff860e Read g CharBuf 0 1000 041000 0x55 3 4 Write g_IntBuf 0x142c 0x142f Oxb Reset event Event Rel c Editing the reset event To register a reset event click the R Event button This button is enabled only when you ve selected Sequential for the combination condition and moved the caret to an event in the subject event list Also if you want to clear registration of a reset event click the Release button This button is enabled when you move the caret to an event in the reset event list Cautions 1 Only one reset event is specifiable If you press the R Ev
467. oot Reserved area Areas other than those listed above Start address Displays the starting address of the corresponding area End address Displays the ending address of the corresponding area Access width bits Displays the access width of the corresponding area When Memory type is an external area the access width can only be changed when the debug tool is disconnected Endian Displays the endians of the external area and the I O register area When Memory type is an external area the endian can only be changed when the debug tool is disconnected Caution Connecting to a debug tool see 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite will display details for each memory type lt 2 gt Verify on writing to memory Specify whether to perform a verify check when the memory value is initialized from the drop down list Select Yes to perform verification after download or when values are changed in the Watch panel Memory panel b Access Memory While Running You can configure the memory access while executing a program in this category The settings of this category are required when using the real time display update function See 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution for details on the real time display update function Figure 2 17 Access Memory While Running Category E Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution No Update display during the ex
468. op down list whether or not you want to use the coverage function To use the coverage function select Yes By default No is selected 2 Reuse coverage result This property is displayed only when Use coverage function property is set to Yes When disconnecting from the debug tool specify from the drop down list whether to automatically save the acquired code coverage measurement result and reproduce it next time you connect to the debug tool To reproduce the contents of the last obtained code coverage measurement results select Yes By default No is selected 2 15 2 Display coverage measurement results Coverage measurement starts ends automatically with the start end of the program execution 1 Code coverage ratio a Display of code coverage rates for source lines and disassemble lines The code coverage ratio is indicated on the Editor panel or Disassemble panel that is displaying the target program On each panel the target source text lines and disassemble result lines are shown in color coded background see Table 2 20 according to their code coverage ratio that was calculated based on the formula described in Table 2 19 The results are not shown when disconnected from the debug tool or during the program execution R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 148 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Selecting Clear coverage information from the context menu will reset all t
469. ope Specification Name of I O register ADO ADCR IOR ADO ADCR ADO ADCR ADO ADCR Remarks 1 By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function 2 Animmediate value is treated as a value Note however that an immediate value with operators can be used 3 An arithmetic expression with symbols can be used for a watch expression 4 Ifthe same name exists either in C C language variables CPU registers or I O registers and it is registered without specifying scopes then its value will be displayed after the symbol is determined in the following order Variable of C language gt CPU registers gt I O register 5 Ifa local variable and a global variable exist with the same name and its symbol name is registered without specifying scopes then its value will be displayed after the symbol is determined based on the scope of the current PC value 6 When watch expressions are registered from the IOR panel or the CPU Register panel the scope specification is automatically added 7 A watch expression I is recognized as a keyword for imaginary numbers If you wish to specify I as a CPU register name add REG at the end lt 3 gt Register from other application Select a character string of a variable of C language CPU register I O register or assembler symbol from a external editor then do either one of the followin
470. open On the Events panel move the caret to an interrupt event you want to set and then select Edit Condition from the context menu R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 372 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Detailed information display change area This area displays in list form of the category the detailed information on an interrupt event that is selected on the Events panel allowing for its settings to be changed directly 2 Property description area This area displays a simple description of the category or property selected in the detailed information display change area Toolbar Displays a category in the detailed information display change area Hides categories in the detailed information display change area and sorts only the property items in the ascending order Description of each category 1 Address Address Displays the address at which an interrupt event is set No address values can be specified here Default Depends on the selected event Modifying Not changeable 2 Pass Count Pass count Specifies a pass count in decimal The relevant event occurs when the event condition is met as many times as the entered pass count Default 1 Modifying Direct entry from the keyboard Specifiable value 1 to 16 383 3 Interrupt Interrupt vector Specifies an interru
471. opened text file Copy Full Path Copies the full path of the opened text file to the clipboard Open Containing Folder Opens the folder where the text file is saved in Explorer 2 Splitter bars You can split the Editor panel by using the horizontal and vertical splitter bars within the view This panel can be split up to four times To split this panel drag the splitter bar down or to the right to the desired position or double click any part of the splitter bar To remove the split double click any part of the splitter bar Figure A 22 Editor Panel Four way Split View El main c 88 void main void a 105 void func1 A 89 Hi 106 Bi l 90 E Start user 107 UINT i 91 108 92 TMPO Start 109 for i 0 i 93 TMP1_Start J 110 funcia 94 AD Start 111 95 112 96 while 10 v 113 v lt 5 R gt 122 void func2 a 140 a amp global cha 123 Bi q 141 J 124 UINT i 142 Comment 125 143 Comment 126 for i 0 i 144 Comment 127 funcza 145 128 146 global att 129 147 global _b 130 v 148 global c v lt gt lt 2 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 230 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Line number area This area displays the line number of the opened text file or source file On each line there is an indicator that shows the line modification status void main
472. or For data access by string manipulating and multiply and accumulate instructions only a history of the last access is collected 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event On the Editor panel or Disassemble panel set the events at which you want the collection of trace data to start and finish a For execution related events By setting execution related events for the trace start and trace end events it is possible to start and finish the collection of trace data at any place To set an execution related event as the trace start event move the caret to the line or address at which you want the collection of trace data to start and then choose Start Tracing from Trace Settings on the context menu A trace start event is set for the instruction at the beginning address corresponding to the line or address at the caret position Also when you set an execution related event as the trace end event move the caret to the line or addressNote at which you want the collection of trace data to finish and then choose Stop Tracing from Trace Settings on the context menu A trace end event is set for the instruction at the beginning address corresponding to the line or address at the caret position Note Trace start and trace end events cannot be set on lines that have no addresses displayed When trace start and trace end events are set the following event marks are displayed in the event area of the relevant line or address
473. or MAX 200mA property is set to Yes Default 3 3V How to change Select from the drop down list Note that changes can be made only while disconnecting from the debug tool Specifiable value One of the following as selected from the drop down list Note 3 3V 5 0V Communication method Displays the communication method to be connected when communication between the emulator and the CPU on target system is performed Default E1 JTAG E20 JTAG JTAG E1 Serial E20 Serial FINE How to change Not changeable JTAG clock MHz Specify JTAG communication speed between the emulator and the CPU on target system Note that this property is displayed only when JTAG is specified in the Communication method property Default 16 5 How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable value One of the following as selected from the drop down list 16 5 12 38 6 188 3 094 1 547 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 204 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 FINE baud rate bps APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specify FINE communication speed between the emulator and the CPU on target system Note that this property is displayed only when FINE is specified in the Communication method property Default 2000000 How to change
474. or equal to gt Less than or equal to lt Inside the range lt Values lt Outside the range lt Values lt 3 Editing combination conditions of events E1 E20 Edit the combination condition for a combination break comprised of multiple events set or for a trace The combination condition for a trace can be set by specifying a condition for start and for end respectively by switching tabs To edit the combination condition of events use the Set Combination Condition dialog box E1 E20 that is displayed by the following operation on the Events panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 162 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Combination break Move the caret to combination break and then select Edit Condition from the context menu Trace Move the caret to a trace and then select Edit Condition from the context menu a Editing the combination condition Select the combination condition between OR AND or Sequential from the pulldown menu For the explanation of operation per combination condition see 2 10 5 Set multiple break events in combination Combination break E1 E20 and 2 Combining multiple events E1 E20 Figure 2 145 Combination item Combination Sequential Cautions 1 For trace events the combination condition available for a trace end event is only OR 2 AND and SEQUENTIAL can be used as a combination c
475. ory 139 Searching for trace data 134 Setting up a trace operation 121 Combination break 92 162 166 167 306 307 Combination condition 92 129 162 353 Combination Condition dialog box 352 Configuration of operating environment 14 Connect to disconnect from the debug tool 44 Connectable debug tool 12 Connection to the debug tool 44 Control register 106 262 Coverage measurement 148 Configure the coverage measurement 148 Display coverage measurement results 148 CPU Register panel 262 Current PC mark 253 Current PC position 232 253 D Data coverage measurement 148 Data flash memory 17 28 Data Save dialog box 380 Debug Console panel 318 Debug information 224 Debug toolbar 188 Debug only project 47 Detailed Settings of Access Events dialog box 362 Detailed Settings of Execution Events dialog box 358 Detailed Settings of Interrupt Events dialog box 372 Detailed Settings of Timer Measurement dialog box 146 355 Collecting an execution history ina section 125 Disassemble display mode 132 300 Disassemble panel 251 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 421 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX C INDEX Disassembled text 66 251 Display format of watch expression 285 Display function call information from the stack 119 Display call stack information 119 Saving the dis
476. panel Watch 1 through Watch 4 In this case the character string you ve dropped is registered as a watch expression directly as it is 2 Putting the registered watch expressions in order The registered watch expressions can be classified by a category folder for display in tree form By default there are no categories Cautions 1 No other categories can be created within a category 2 Up to 64 categories can be created in one watch panel If an attempt is made to create beyond the upper limit a message is displayed a To create a new category Move the caret to the position at which you want to create and then click the toolbar button and enter a new category name directly from the keyboard b To edit a category name Select a category name you want to edit and then click on it again and edit the category name directly from the keyboard c To remove a category Select a category you want to remove and then click the toolbar button d To change the order in which watch expressions are displayed Drag and drop a registered watch expression directly onto the category you ve created That way watch expressions are classified by a category Also the order in which categories and watch expressions are displayed one above or below another can be freely changed by a drag and drop operation Remark When you drag and drop a watch expression or category onto the watch panel watch 1 through watch 4 the watch expression or ca
477. pen File dialog box by selecting Open with Encoding and then click the Open button in the dialog box Description of each area 1 Available encodings Select the encoding to be set from the drop down list All code pages and encodings supported by the OS are displayed in alphabetical order Note that the same encoding and encoding which are not supported by the current OS will not be displayed The default file encoding in the General Text Editor category of the Option dialog box is selected by default Function buttons Button Function OK Opens the selected file in the Open File dialog box using a selected file encoding Cancel Not open the selected file in the Open File dialog box and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 335 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save Settings dialog box This dialog box is used to set the encoding and newline code of the file that is being edited on the Editor panel Remark The target file name is displayed on the title bar Figure A 47 Save Settings Dialog Box main c Save Settings Encode Westem European Windows Newline code Windows CR LF 3 gt Reload the file with these settings Function buttons L f This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons
478. pending on the length or the method of JTAG signal wiring on the target system it may not be possible to communicate using the selected JTAG clock In such a case reducing the JTAG clock may achieve successful communication lt 5 gt FINE baud rate bps From the drop down list select the baud rate FINE baud rate to be used by the E1 emulator for communicating with the microcontroller on the target system This property is displayed only when FINE is selected in the Communications method property The following baud rate is displayed in the drop down list 2000000 default 750000 500000 250000 Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 2 Depending on the length or the method of FINE signal wiring on the target system it may not be possible to communicate using the selected FINE baud rate In such a case reducing the JTAG clock may achieve successful communication e Flash You can configure the flash memory rewriting in this category Caution This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 Figure 2 14 Flash Category E Flash Input Mode of ID code Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal ID code Hes FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Work RAM start address 1000 lt 1 gt Input mode of ID code Specify a mode for the input of ID code Caution This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 19 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeS
479. played contents of call stack information 120 Display the result of disassembling 66 Displaying and changing memory registers and variables 95 Displaying and changing global and static variables 111 Displaying and changing local variables 111 Displaying and changing memory contents 95 Displaying and changing the CPU registers 106 Displaying and changing the I O registers 108 Displaying and changing watch expressions 113 Displaying and changing programs 60 Displaying source files 60 Displaying the result of disassembling 66 Executing a build in parallel with other processes 69 Performing line assembly 70 DMM Dynamic Memory Modification function 98 Download 25 37 47 223 Download condition 52 323 Download Files dialog box 323 Downloadable File Formats 50 E Editor panel 228 Encoding 336 Encoding dialog box 335 Endian 20 22 33 39 103 Epilog of functions 275 Event area 232 253 Event management 156 Changing states of event setting 157 Deleting events 165 Displaying only a specific type of event 158 Editing detailed settings of events 158 Jump to an event address 158 Limitation on the number of valid events 166 Types of events that can be set or removed during execution 168 Event mark 84 126 144 306 Event type 307 Events panel 304 Execute programs 78 Execute a specifie
480. property Default Yes How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes value Stops simulation No Does not stop simulation Stop when privileged instruction exception occurs Specify whether or not to stop execution of the user program when a privileged instruction exception occurs This property is displayed only when Stop is specified in the Select execution mode property Default Yes How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes value Stops simulation No Does not stop simulation Stop when access exception occurs Specify whether or not to stop execution of the user program when an access exception occurs This property is displayed only when there is MPU module in the Peripheral function simulation module property and also Stop is specified in the Select execution mode property Default Yes How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes value Stops simulation No Does not stop simulation Stop when floating point exception occurs RX600 Series Specify whether or not to stop execution of the user program when a floating point exception occurs This property is displayed only w
481. pt vector Default Depends on the selected event Modifying Direct entry from the keyboard Specifiable value 0 to 255 R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 373 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Priority level Function buttons APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Specifies an interrupt s priority level Default Depends on the selected event Modifying Direct entry from the keyboard Specifiable value RX610 group 1to8 If 8 is specified the interrupt will act as a fast interrupt Other than RX610 group 1 to 16 If 16 is specified the interrupt will act as a fast interrupt Buttons Functions OK Applies the detailed settings made in this dialog box to interrupt events and then closes the dialog box Cancel Nullifies settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 374 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Port Setting dialog box This dialog box sets a COM port on the host machine to which communication from the microcontroller is redirected Figure A 61 Port Setting Dialog Box Port Setting COM Pott 1 4 Baudrate System Function buttons 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Debug Console panel sel
482. quipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under cer
483. r Break Option R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Opens the Property panel to set the break function 2tENESAS Page 258 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Settings The following cascade menus are displayed to set the trace related event Note that events can be set only for lines for which events can be set see 1 Event area Start Tracing Sets a Start Tracing event to start collecting the trace data when an instruction of an address at the caret position is executed see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Simulator In addition the selecting of the Use trace function property in the Trace category on the Property panel is automatically set to Yes Stop Tracing Sets a Stop Tracing event to stop collecting the trace data when an instruction of an address at the caret position is executed see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Simulator In addition the selecting of the Use trace function property in the Trace category on the Property panel is automatically set to Yes Record Reading Value Sets a Point Trace event to record the access value as the trace data when the address at the caret or the selected variable global variable static variable inside functions file internal static variable I O register is read accessed see 1 When an access to a variable or O register occurred Record Writin
484. r for details on the coverage measurement This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened g Pop up display of variables When hovering the mouse cursor over a variable in the source text a pop up that shows the name and value of the variable is displayed lt variable name gt lt variable value gt The display format of the variable value is same as Table A 10 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default depending on the type of the variable This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened h Setting of various events Various events can be set to the addresses or lines where the caret currently exists by selecting Bread Settings Trace Settings or Timer Settings from the context menu The corresponding Event mark is displayed in the Event area by setting the event In addition the detailed information about the set event is reflected in the Events panel This function is only enabled when connected to the debug tool and the source file is opened See the following for details on how to set events 2 10 3 Stop the program at the arbitrary position break event E1 E20 2 10 4 Stop the program with the access to variables I O registers 2 13 3 Collecting an execution history in a section 2 13 4 Collecting an execution history only when conditions are met 2 14 3 Measuring execution time in a section E1 E20 Remark A breakp
485. r more information about the setting of events 2 This panel also manage the events that are set on the Function panel or Variable panel of the analyze tool Program Analyzer 3 When the separator line of each area in this panel is double clicked the width of the area changes to the shortest possible size that can display the contents of the area Figure A 36 Events Panel Toolbar 4 Name Detail Information Comment C Unconditional Trace 2 M Trace Start End 2 Detail Information Start Execution main c 104 Ox2f End Execution main c 113 0x301 Name Detail Information Comment V 9 Timer Result Total 4500 ns Start End 2 Run Break Timer Total2244000 ns This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar Edit menu Events panel dedicated items Context menu How to open From the View menu select Event On the Editor panel or Disassemble panel select Timer Settings gt gt View Result of Timer from the context menu On the Editor panel or Disassemble panel move the caret to an event mark and then select View Details in Event Panel on context menu R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 304 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Name area A list of the event names that have currently been set is displayed in the following format 3 Hardwar
486. r panel Local Variables panel IOR panel and Watch panel of spots whose values have been changed by program execution Edit value Text color Blue Background color Standard color Display colors on the Memory panel CPU Register panel Local Variables panel IOR panel and Watch panel of spots whose values have been forcibly changed by user Current PC Text color Black Background color Gold Display colors on the Editor panel and Disassemble panel of a line where the current PC position exists Breakpoint Text color Black Background color Salmon pink Display colors on the Editor panel and Disassemble panel of lines where breakpoints are set Update periodic Text color Pink Background color Standard color Display colors on the Memory panel and Watch panel of areas whose display is set to be updated in real time Text color Standard color Background color Light green Display colors on the Memory panel and Trace panel of spots that have been read or fetched R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 386 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Example Display Text color Standard color Background color Orange APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description Display colors on the Memory panel and Trace panel of spots that have been written Read and write AaBbCc Text color Standard color Bac
487. r specification file mtls Link order specification file Map file map Ibp Map file Hex file hex Hex file Assemble list file Ist Assembler list file S record file mot S record file b For the CPU Register panel Watch panel IOR panel Call Stack panel and Local Variables panel Following file types are displayed The panel content is saved to a file in the file format selected from the drop down list Text file txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated csv CSV formatNote Note Each piece of data are separated with a comma when saved To avoid the problem of an invalid file format in cases where any data includes a comma each piece of data are enclosed in double quotes when they are output to a file c For the Output panel Following file types are displayed Data can be saved in only text format Text file txt Text format default Function buttons Save Saves a file with a specified file name Cancel Closes this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 403 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Select Data Save File dialog box Select a file in which to save the data Figure A 78 Select Data Save File Dialog Box Select Data Save File Look in B sample My Recent Documents 3 Desktop My Documents 58 My Computer a lt My Net
488. racters or select one from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items The data to specify various depending on the target panel as follows Target Panel Data Specified Disassemble panel Address expression IOR panel I O register name Remark _ If this dialog box is opened from the Disassemble panel By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function Function buttons Button Function OK Moves the caret to the specified location from the beginning of the area displayed in the target panel Cancel Cancels the jump and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 379 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Data Save dialog box This dialog saves the displayed contents of Disassemble panel Memory panel or Trace panel and the upload data See 2 5 3 Executing an upload This dialog can only be opened when CubeSuite is connected with the debug tool Figure A 65 Data Save Dialog Box Data Save Disassemble Data 1 File Name C Sample projects Disassemble1 2 File Type Text files txt Save Range Address Symbol Ox000002de v Ox000002ed Function buttons 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of
489. rea Adds emulation RAM area Uses simulator alternative RAM Note Memory mapping can be added in the unit of 16 bytes If you set it outside the 16 byte boundary compensation will be made to meet the 16 byte boundary area which includes the area set after OK is clicked b Address range Specify the start address and end address for the memory mapping to be added Directly input a hexadecimal number into the text box for each Note that you cannot add memory mappings to the areas that overlap the following memory types A message will appear if you click Add button in these areas Internal ROM area Internal RAM area IO register area c Access width Access width cannot be specified d Button Adds the content specified in this area to memory mapping The added memory mapping is displayed in the Memory mapped list area The changes will not take effect until the OK button is clicked 2 Memory mapped list area a List display Information about the memory mapping added in the Added memory mapping specification area and the microcontroller s internal memory mapping is displayed This area cannot be edited Memory type Following memory types are displayed Internal ROM area Internal RAM area I O register area Emulation ROM area Emulation RAM area Non map area Address range Displays the address range as lt Start address gt lt End address gt Display is fixed as
490. reakpoint of another type will be used Select the breakpoint type from the drop down list according to their functions Software break Temporarily replaces instruction code for the specified address with break instruction and stops the program when this instruction is executed Once set it is handled as a software break event Hardware break The debug tool consecutively checks the break condition while the program is in execution and stops the program when the condition is met default Note Once set it is handed as a hardware break event execution type Note Hardware break is a before execution break as the program will break before executing instruction at the specified address This function is implemented using the debug tool resources R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 83 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Set a breakpoint Perform this operation in the Editor panel Disassemble panel in which the source text disassembly text is displayed In the panel s event area click on the location where you want to set a breakpoint A breakpoint is set to the instruction at the start address corresponding to the clicked line When a breakpoint is set the following event mark appears at the breakpoint location and the source text line disassembled text line is highlighted It is interpreted as if a break event Software or Hardware Break event has been set at the target address and it is
491. remained unchanged This area has the following features a Popup display When the mouse cursor is placed on top of a memory value the following content is displayed in a popup box relative to the symbol nearest in forward direction to the address indicated by the mouse cursor However if symbol information is nonexistent i e not underlined no popup is displayed variable 0x14 Symbol name Offset value Symbol name A symbol name is displayed Offset value If the address has no symbols defined an offset from the symbol nearest in forward to it is displayed always in hexadecimal b Realtime display update function Using the realtime display update function it is possible to display or change memory values even while the program is under execution not just when the program is halted For details about the realtime display update function see 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 246 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE c d e f 9 Edit memory values You can edit a memory value directly from the keyboard by simply moving the caret to the memory value you wish to change When a memory value is edited the altered part of it changes in display color While in this state hit the Enter key and the changed value is written into the target memory Pressing the E
492. ress Range is selected in the Search Range area Specify the start address and end address to set the address range in which a memory value is searched Directly enter address expressions in the respective text boxes specifiable in up to 1 024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The calculation results of the entered address expressions are handled respectively as the start address and end address However searchable addresses are limited to the upper limit address of the program space OxFFFFFFFF Also no address values can be specified that are greater than the value representable by 32 bits Remarks 1 Function buttons By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function If the start address text box is blank address 0x0 is assumed If the end address text box is blank the upper limit address of the microcontroller s address space is assumed Button Function Search Backward Performs a search in the direction toward smaller addresses within the range specified in the Search Range area and Address area The searched spot is placed in selected state on Memory panel However if an invalid value is specified or when the program is under execution a message is displayed and a search for memory value is not performed Also if the Memory
493. ret position or a selected variable global variable static variable in function static variable in file or I O register as the condition for a combination break see 1 Set a break event access type to a variable I O register Break Option R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Opens the Property panel to set the break function ztENESAS Page 241 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Trace Settings APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The following cascade menus are displayed to set the trace related event Note that events can be set only for lines for which events can be set see 6 Event area Start Tracing Sets a Start Tracing event to start collecting the trace data when an instruction of an address at the caret position is executed see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Simulator In addition the selecting of the Use trace function property in the Trace category from the Debug Tool Settings tab on the Property panel is automatically set to Yes Stop Tracing Sets a Stop Tracing event to stop collecting the trace data when an instruction of an address at the caret position is executed see 1 Setting a trace start event and a trace end event Simulator In addition the selecting of the Use trace function property in the Trace category from the Debug Tool Settings tab on the Property panel is automatically set to Yes Record Reading Value Sets
494. ribes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar Description of each category Function buttons How to open On the Events panel move the caret to a hardware break you want to set and then select Edit Condition from the context menu On the Events panel move the caret to an execution related event in a trace that you want to set and then select Edit Condition from the context menu E1 E20 On the Events panel move the caret to an execution related event in a combination break that you want to set and then select Edit Condition from the context menu On the Events panel move the caret to an execution related event in a timer result that you want to set and then select Edit Condition from the context menu R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 359 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Detailed information display change area This area displays in list form of the category the detailed information on an execution related event that is selected on the Events panel allowing for its settings to be changed directly 2 Property description area This area displays a simple description of the category or property selected in the detailed information display change area Toolbar Displays a category in the detailed information display change area Hides categories in the detailed
495. rl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function 4 Clicking the Save button Memory contents are saved in specified form to a specified file as upload data R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 59 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 Displaying and Changing Programs This section describes how to display and change programs when a load module file with the debug information is downloaded to a debug tool Downloaded programs can be displayed in the following panels Editor panel The source file is displayed and can be edited Furthermore the source level debugging see 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps and the display of the code coverage measurement result see 2 15 2 Display coverage measurement results can be performed in this panel Disassemble panel The result of disassembling the downloaded program the memory contents is displayed and can be edited line assemble Furthermore the instruction level debugging see 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps and the display of the code coverage measurement result see 2 15 2 Display coverage measurement results can be performed in this panel In this panel the disassemble results can be displayed with the corresponding source text default Remark Itis normally necessary to download a load module file with debugging information in order to perfor
496. rmation about the set breakpoint is reflected in the Events panel When this operation is performed at a place where any one of the event marks is already being displayed that event is deleted and the setting of breakpoints cannot be done See 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint for details on how to set the breakpoint b Configuring breakpoints via the menu When you right click in this area the following menu below is displayed Set Breakpoint Sets a breakpoint in the area at the current source line see 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrary position breakpoint E1 E20 By default the debug tool will set a hardware break when resources are available This behavior can be customized by using the Hardware Break First or Software Break First menu items Set Hardware Breakpoint E1 E20 Sets a breakpoint Hardware Break event to the line at the caret position Set Software Breakpoint E1 E20 Sets a breakpoint Software Break event to the line at the caret position Hardware Break First E1 E20 The type of break that can be set by a one click operation of the mouse is set as a hardware breakpoint this is reflected in the setting of the First using type of breakpoint property in the Break E1 E20 category from the Debug Tool Settings tab on the Property panel Software Break First E1 E20 The type of break that can be set by a one cli
497. rming a search it is possible to choose whether the search is made at the instruction level or source level Figure A 51 Trace Search Dialog Box Trace Search 1 Source Level mi Search condition Fetch Address Mnemonic Access Address Access Status Data Search range Number Function buttons 4 Search Backward Search Forward This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Select the toolbar button on the Trace panel Choose Find from the context menu on the Trace panel Description of each area 1 Tab selection area Selecting a tab switches the level at which a search is performed This dialog box has the following tabs Instruction Level tab Source Level tab R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 344 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Search condition setting area Set specific conditions under which a search is performed For details about display contents and on how to set see the section in which the relevant tab is described Function buttons Button Function Search Backward Performs a search in the direction toward smaller addresses within a specified range The searched spot is put in selected state on the Trace panel However if an invalid value is specified or when the p
498. rogram is under execution a message is displayed and a search of trace data is not performed Also if the Trace panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Search Forward Performs a search in the direction toward larger addresses within a specified range The searched spot is put in selected state on the Trace panel However if an invalid value is specified or when the program is under execution a message is displayed and a search of trace data is not performed Also if the trace panel is hidden or if focus is moved to this dialog box while focus was present on another panel this button is disabled Nullifies the setting for a search of trace data and closes this dialog box Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 345 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Instruction Level tab The acquired trace data is searched at the instruction level Caution If while the Trace panel is displayed in the Source display mode an instruction level search is performed on this tab the subject data cannot be searched correctly To perform an instruction level search make sure the Trace panel is displayed in the Mixed display mode or Disassemble display mode Figure A 52 Trace Search Dialog Box Instruction Level Tab Trace Search Instruction Level Source Le
499. roject folder in which the file is registered If the file is not registered in any project the reference point of the path will be the active folder 3 Path specifications path file names including space characters must be enclosed in R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 65 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 6 2 Displaying the disassembled result To display the disassembled result disassembled text of a downloaded program memory content use the Disassemble panel shown below Choose Disassemble from the View menu and then select Disassemble1 4 Up to four disassemble panels can be opened at a time with each panel discriminated by the name in their title bar Disassemble1 Disassemble2 Disassemble3 or Disassemble4 For details on how to read each area and details about their functionality see the section in which the Disassemble panel is described Figure 2 71 Displaying the Disassembled Result Disassemble Panel Disassemble1 Toolbar _main void tutorial void _tutorial ffffs561 6e68 R6 R8 f fLfS563 710008 28H RO p sam g Sample f LFFS566 F 72 0 0000100 init p sam ef71 05670000 BSR A for i O i lt 10 i j Event sea Address area Disassemble area Remark Inthe Scroll Range Settings dialog box which opens by clicking on View gt gt in the toolbar you can set the scroll range of the vertical scroll bar on this panel Following
500. roller Default Internal RAM size of a selected microcontroller How to change Not changeable Size of DataFlash memory Kbytes E1 E20 2 Endian Simulator Displays the size of the data flash memory area of a selected microcontroller Default Data flash memory size of a selected microcontroller How to change Not changeable Displays detailed information on CPU endian and modifies its settings Endian of CPU Displays the mi crocontroller s endian The endian information set in properties of the build tool is acquired for display here Default Little endian data How to change For the build amp debug tool Not changeable For the debug tool only By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable value One of the following as selected from the drop down list Little endian data or Big endian data R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 202 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Clock The detailed information on clocks is displayed and its configuration can be changed Main clock source For products with internal HOCO E1 E20 Specify the main clock from the EXTAL frequency and internal HOCO For products without internal HOCO Displays EXTAL frequency as the main clock Default EXTAL How to By selecting fro
501. rting execution immediately before execution of the user program property Default Blank How to By entering directly from the keyboard change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Depends on selected microcontroller value Execute the specified Specify whether or not to run a specified routine immediately after the program breaks routine immediately after halting of the user program How to By selecting from the drop down list Default No change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes A specified routine is run immediately program breaks value No A specified routine is not run immediately after program breaks The routine to run Specify the address to be executed immediately after the program breaks immediately after This property is displayed only when Yes is specified in the Execute the specified routine halting execution immediately after halting of the user program property Default Blank How to By entering directly from the keyboard change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Depends on selected microcontroller value 5 Trace The detailed information on trace functions is displayed and its configuration can be changed Caution E20 JTAG RX600 Series The trace function and the realtime RAM monitor function RRM function in part are usable exclusively o
502. s for debug console functions Low level interface routine files C language part lowsrc c and lowsrc h Low level interface routines open close read write and lseek Called by standard input output Initialize input output libraries _ INIT_IOLIB Close all open functions CLOSEALL Each called by the internal initialization routine PowerON_Reset_PC of the initialization routine file resetorg c Low level interface routine file assembly language part lowlvl src Function to output 1 character _charput Function to input 1 character _charget Called by low level interface routines write and read respectively Source file including the main function DebugConsole_Sample c Calls the standard library functions scanf and printf in the main function Caution E1 E20 To use the debug console do not switch the system clock in the charput and charget functions of the program Switching of the system clock may adversely affect the communication between the emulator and microcontroller hampering normal transmission or reception of data Remarks 1 For details about the low level interface routines see Chapter 7 Startup in the separate edition CubeSuite RX Coding R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 172 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Simulator For details about the simulator s input output functions see APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS To use sa
503. s dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 405 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS This section describes the input output settings for the simulator in a low level interface routine assembly language part The simulator provides functions for handling standard I O and file I O B 1 Standard Input Output and File Input Output The content of a file that is called from a low level interfaced routine to perform input and output is replaced with a program for input output With the standard input output functions GETC and PUTC the functions that perform 1 character input and output charput charget _charput _charget are replaced with a program for debug console facilities to perform input and output of data onto and from the Debug Console panel The input output functions are listed below Table B 1 Input Output Facilities Classification Facility name Description Standard input output GETC Accepts 1 byte from standard input PUTC Outputs 1 byte to standard output File input output FOPEN Opens a file FCLOSE Closes a file FGETC Accepts 1 byte from a file FPUTC Outputs 1 byte to a file FEOF Checks termination of a file FSEEK Moves the file pointer to a specified position FTELL Obtains the file pointer s current position Remark For details about low level interface routines se
504. s is the first window that opens when you launch CubeSuite When debugging a program use this window to control program execution and opening of each panel Figure A 1 Main Window SEE Tutorial CubeSuite Project Tree Project Tree Sl AX E1U TAG Property E Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM KBytes B R Tutorial Project B R5F56108WxBG Microcontroller Ay CC RX Build Tool Size of DataFlash memory KBytes SARX E1 JTAG Debug Tool E Clock D Program Analyzer Analyze Tool Main clock a EXTAL E E File Main clock frequency MHz 12 5000 j Tutorial c Allow changing of the clock source on writing internal flash memo No dbsct c E Connection with Emulator j intprg c Emulator serial No j resetprg c Size of internal ROM KBytes amp sbrk c Size of the internal ROM sort c c vecttbl c E1 OFS001340 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area How to open Choose All Programs from Windows Start menu and then select Renesas Electronics CubeSuite and then CubeSuite R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 185 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Menu bar The debug related menu items are describe below Remark The items drawn from each menu can be customized using the User Settings dialog box a View Each item on View
505. s prohibited while the specified routine is in execution PM Flag Switching to the user mode is prohibited while the specified 10 11 12 routine is in execution While the specified routine is in execution its event settings will be disabled along with Trace Break Real time RAM monitor and Timer functions Non maskable interrupt is always prohibited while the specified routine is in execution When starting a program after executing the specified routine the state of microcontroller will be as follows General Register Remains in the state at which the program stopped or reflects the user setting The contents of the register following the execution of the specified routine are not reflected Memory Reflects the memory access made after the execution of the specified routine Peripheral Functions The operation of microcontroller peripheral functions after the execution of the specified routine continues R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 82 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 10 Stop Programs Break This section describes how to stop the program in execution Remark When the program in execution is stopped a statement of the cause of the break appears on the Status bar in the Main window 2 10 1 Stop the program manually The program in execution is forcibly stopped by clicking the button on the debug toolbar 2 10 2 Stop the program at the arbitrar
506. s tab is used to configure Printf events as action events see 2 16 1 Insert printf A Printf event momentarily stops the execution of the program at a specified location and executes the printf command via software processing When a Printf event is set the program momentarily stops immediately before executing the command at the location where this event is set and the value of the variable expression specified in this dialog box is output to the Output panel Figure A 43 Action Events Dialog Box Printf Event Tab Action Events Printf event Interrupt Event Setting Output string Example S ample Variable expression Example aaa bbb ccc Address C Test Example for Output panel Sample aaa 10 bbb 20 cee 30 Function buttons Cancel This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open On the Editor panel move the caret to the line where you wish to set a Printf event then select Register Action Event from the context menu On the Disassemble panel move the caret to the address where you wish to set a Printf event then select Register Action Event from the context menu On the Events panel select Edit the conditions from the context menu after selecting the Printf event Description of each area 1 Output string area Type in the string to add to the Output pane
507. s written into the memory area to which the variable ch is mapped When using numerals to enter values Enter the numeral 0x41 in the Value area for the variable ch gt gt The numeral 0x41 is written into the memory area to which the variable ch is mapped When using character strings ASCII to enter values Set the display form of the character array str to ASCII and then enter the letters ABC in the Value area gt gt The numerals 0x41 0x42 0x43 and 0x00 are written into the memory area to which the array str is mapped 3 Saving the displayed contents of local variables By choosing Save Local Variables Data As from the File menu it is possible to open the Save As dialog box and then save the contents of local variables in whole to a text file txt or a CSV file csv When saving to a file CubeSuite gets latest information from the debug tool Note that if arrays pointer type variables structures unions or CPU registers only those that are assigned the names to represent sections are displayed in expanded form the values of their expansion elements are also saved When not expanded they are marked with at the head with the values left blank Figure 2 111 Local Variable Value Output Image When Saved Scope Current scope V Variable P Parameter F Function Name Value Type Byte Size Address V Variable name 1 Value Type Address V Variable name 0 Value Type Ad
508. sc key before pressing Enter key cancels editing For details on how to change memory values see 3 Changing memory contents Search and initialize memory values Open the Memory Search dialog box in which you can search memory contents in the specified address area by selecting Find from the context menu Also selecting Fill from the context menu will open the Memory Initialize dialog box in which you can collectively modify memory contents in the specified address range Copy and pasie By selecting a range of memory values with the mouse you can copy the content of the selected part as a character string to the clipboard and then paste it to the caret position To perform these operations select the appropriate item from the context menu or from the Edit menu Note that pasting is possible only when the display format notation and bit width of the character string matches that of the area to which it is pasted A message will appear if the formats do not agree The following table shows the character code and character strings that can be used in this area A message will appear when a character string other than those listed here is pasted Character code ASCII Character string 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c d e f A B C D E F Register watch expressions A memory value at the addresses for which symbol is defined is underlined to indicate that it can be registered as a watch expression
509. selected deletes them except when the expanded item of the watch expression is selected Deletes the selected character string s and copies them to the clipboard If the watch expression s category s are selected deletes them except when the expanded item of the watch expression is selected Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s If the watch expression s category s are selected copies them to the clipboard except when the expanded item of the watch expression is selected If texts are in editing pastes the contents of the clipboard to the caret position If texts are not in editing and the watch expression s are copied in the clipboard registers them to the caret position R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 291 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Notation APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The following cascade menus are displayed to specify the notation AutoSelect Displays the value of the selected watch expression in the default notation see Table A 10 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default according the type of variable default Hexadecimal number Displays the value of the selected item in hexadecimal number Signed Decimal Displays the value of the selected item in signed decimal number Unsigned decimal number Displays the value of the selected item in unsigned decimal number Octal Displa
510. selected encoding and newline code to the target file and reloads the file And then closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the settings and closes this dialog box Help Displays the help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 337 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Initialize dialog box This dialog box initializes memory values See 6 Collectively changing initializing memory contents A pattern of specified initialization data is written into a specified address range of memory repeatedly Figure A 48 Memory Initialize Dialog Box Memory Initialize Start address symbol End address symbol v Gnput the end address or sy gt gt v hitialize data 2 4 Hex Input the initial data in hexadecimal here The two or more data p gt w Function buttons 4 Here the following items are explained How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Choose Initialize from the context menu on the Memory panel Description of each area 1 Range specification area Specify an address range of memory whose values need to be initialized in Start address symbol and End address symbol Enter address expressions directly in the respective text boxes specifiable in up to 1 024 characters or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries T
511. sion cannot be retrieved variable is out of the scope Background color Standard color Remarks 1 The I O register that cause the microcontroller to operate when it is read is read protected and therefore cannot be read To read the value of read protected I O register select Force Read Value from the context menu 2 Each watch expression acquires the value in the order it was registered As the timing to acquire a value is different the values displayed may be different if the same I O register is registered more than once 3 When a hexadecimal value is also given then values in the specified notation and hexadecimal values are read separately For this reason the values with the specified notion and the hexadecimal values may differ due to the time lag between being read This area is provided with the following functions a Real time display update function Using the real time display update function enables to display modify the value of the watch expression not only while the program is stopped but also in execution See 4 Displaying and changing memory contents during program execution for details on the real time display update function b Changing values of watch expressions To edit the value of the watch expression change the value directly from the keyboard after double clicking on the value to be edited press the Esc key to cancel the edit mode R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 286
512. ss lt Start end gt lt Trace start trace end detailed information gt related Example Start OR End OR Total of Start End 6 Start Execution main c 100 0x300 Start Execution funcA 0x100 0x300 Start Write variable 0x100 0x101 0x10 End Execution main c 200 0x100 End Execution funcA 0x10 0x100 End Read main c variable1 0x100 0x101 0x5 Simulator R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 309 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Event Type Display ContentsNote1 Timer Result Total lt Total execution time gt Total of Start End lt Total number of Start Generation condition timer Stop timer gt N e 2 Execution related lt Total execution time gt lt Pass Count gt lt Average gt lt Max gt lt Min gt E1 E20 lt Start End gt lt Detailed information of Start timer Stop timer gt Example Total 10ms Total of Start End 4 Total 10ms Pass Count 5 Average 2ms Max 4ms Min 1ms Start After Execution main c 100 0x300 Start After Execution funcA 0x30 0x100 End After Execution main c 100 0x300 End After Execution funcA 0x50 0x100 Point Trace Formati lt Generation condition gt lt Variable name gt lt Variable address gt Generation condition Example Read variable 0x100 Access related Format2 lt Generation condition gt lt File name Variable name gt lt Variable address gt Example Write sub c variabl
513. ss where the selected eventNotet is being set Edit Condition Opens the detailed settings dialog box corresponding to a selected eventNote2 If a Trace event or combination break is selected the Combination Condition dialog box E1 E20 is opened If a Printf event is selected the Action Events dialog box is opened Edit Comment Sets to the edit mode to input comments for the selected event When comments are already present all of that character string is set to a select state Notes 1 Events other than Trace events Timer Result events and built in events Unconditional Trace events Run Break Timer events can be objects of this button 2 Edit Condition is valid for the following events Hardware breaks execution related events access related events and timer measurement events R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 E1 E20 2tENESAS Page 314 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Output panel This facility displays the messages output by various components supplied with CubeSuite e g design build and analysis tools including the debug tool as well as display the results of global searches conducted using the Find and Replace dialog box and the output results by Printf events see 2 16 1 Insert printf Messages are displayed separately on respective tabs classified by tools from which they are output Figure A 37 Output Panel B
514. start to stop Run Break time Therefore when a program starts running its execution time is automatically measured The measurement result can be confirmed by one of the following methods 1 Checking the status bar for confirmation 2 Checking the event panel for confirmation Cautions 1 The measurement result of the Run Break timer event includes the time between the start of the measurement and the program execution as well as the time between the program break and R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 141 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS the measurement break Note that this result is used only for a reference purpose as it contains clock error of the measurement clock source 2 The execution time displayed in the Status bar and the Events panel is the time measured while the program is being executed Values smaller than 100 us are discarded The execution time will be incorrect when Step in Step over or Return out is performed Remark This function is actuated by a Run Break timer event which is one of the built in events set in the debug tool by default The Run Break timer event is always Enabled settings not changeable 1 Checking the status bar for confirmation When a program has stopped running the measurement result is displayed in the status bar on the Main window While no measurements are made this status shows Not measured Figure 2 131 Example of a Run Break Timer Event
515. starting execution property and the The routine to run immediately after halting execution property you can also specify function name when using C language or label name when using Assembly language as property values Use an interrupt stack when using a stack inside the specified routine Describe a return sub routine RTS instruction for terminating the specified routine processing The processing time of one specified routine must not exceed 100ms If a clock remains halted in the specified routine it may affect the control over the debug tool The register value for the start of the specified routine is not determined As such you need to perform initial setting of the register value in the specified routine Execution of a specified routine starts in the supervisor mode Do not switch it to the user mode When executing a specified routine do not perform memory access download break point setting to the program area of the specified routine When executing a specified routine the 4 bytes indicated by the interrupt stack pointer will be used for the control on the debug tool side Following restrictions will apply to the general registers and flags used in the specified routine ISP Register Once the specified routine is executed the value should be returned to the one at the start of the execution U Flag Switching to the user mode is prohibited while the specified routine is in execution Flag Interrupt i
516. stem call in R3 System call Set the address of the parameter block in R1 Set the first byte of R1 result of execution in R1 Return to the address where the function was called Parameter block area Input output buffer R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 415 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS Checks for end of file Function Code R1 Regisiter 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Parameter Block R2 Register 1 byte 1 byte 0 Execution result Parameters Parameter Description Execution result output 0 Not EOF 1 EOF detected File number input Number that is returned when a file is opened Detailed Description Checks for end of file Example PARM R2 Set the address of the parameter block in R2 R1 1h 5 R2 Set the value of R1 file number in R2 1 bytes 010B0000h R1 Set the function code of FEOF in R1 SIM_IO R3 Set the address of the system call in R3 R3 System call PARM R2 Set the address of the parameter block in R2 R2 R1 Set the first byte of R2 result of execution in R1 Return to the address where the function was called SECTION B DATA ALIGN 4 BLKL Parameter block area R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 416 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX B INPUT OUTPUT FUNCTIONS Moves the file pointer to a specified position Fun
517. t Download file property E Download file information al File Download object Yes Download symbol information Yes Specify the PIC PID offset No File Specify the file to be downloaded Function buttons This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Select the Download files property in the Download category on the Download File Settings tab of the Property panel and then click the button that is displayed Caution This dialog box cannot be opened during program execution Description of each area 1 Download File List area a Displaying a list This area displays a list of file names to download By default the file names specified in the project main project or sub project as the subject to build are displayed not removable Files are downloaded in the order in which they are listed here To add a new download file click the Add button in this area and then specify the download conditions for the file to be added in the Download file property area R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 323 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE b Buttons Button Function Moves a selected file one line up However this button is disabled when the file at the top of the list or a file specified as the subject to build in the project is selected Moves a sel
518. t from the following option buttons a Current display area default Prints only the contents of the Disassemble panel currently being displayed b Current selected area Prints only the range currently being selected in the Disassemble panel Note however that this option button will be invalid when nothing is selected in the Disassemble panel c Range of specified Specify the range of address to print via Start address and End address You can either type address expressions directly into the text boxes up to 1024 characters or select them from the input history via the drop down list up to 10 items Remark By holding down Ctrl Space keys in this text box you can complete the symbol name at the present caret position see 2 20 2 Symbol name completion function R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 342 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Function buttons Button Function OK Closes this dialog box and opens the Windows dialog box to print the contents of the specified range of Disassemble panel Cancel Cancels the range specification and closes this dialog box Help Displays help for this dialog box R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 343 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Search dialog box This dialog box searches for trace data see Section 2 13 7 Searching for trace data Before perfo
519. t will also be ignored 3 Execute after changing PC value The program is executed after you have forcibly changed the current PC value to an arbitrary position To start this operation move the caret to the line instruction at which you wish to start the program in the Editor panel Disassemble panel then select Set PC to Here from the context menu the current PC value is set to the address of the line instruction where the caret currently exists Then execute either one of the execution method described in 2 Execute from the current address 2 9 3 Execute programs in steps When either of the following operation has occurred the program will stop automatically after conducting step execution in the source level 1 line of source text or in the instruction level 1 instruction Once the program is stopped the contents of each panel will be updated automatically As such step execution is suited for debugging the program execution in transition either in source or instruction level The unit in which the program is step executed is determined automatically depending on which panel is currently in focus When the focus is not in the Disassemble panel Step execution in the source level When the focus is in the Disassemble panel Step execution in the instruction level Note If the line information does not exist in the address specified by the current PC value the step execution is conducted in instruction level Step execution
520. tain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electroni
521. target memory Character color Brown The value of the CPU register that has been changed because of the Background color Cream execution of a program The highlighting is rest by executing again the program This area is provided with the following functions a Changing the CPU register value To edit the CPU register value change the value directly from the keyboard after double clicking on the value to be edited press the Enter key to cancel the edit mode After you edit the value of the CPU register it is written to the target memory of the debug tool by pressing the Enter key or moving the focus to outside the edit region b Saving the contents of the CPU register The Save As dialog box can be opened by selecting the File menu gt gt Save CPU Register Data As and all the contents of this panel can be saved in a text file txt or CSV file csv See 4 Saving the displayed CPU register contents for details on the method for saving the contents of the CPU register R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 ztENESAS Page 265 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbar E Acquires the latest data from the debug tool and updates the contents of this panel This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Notation The following buttons to change the notation of a data value are displayed Displays the value of the selected
522. target memory Pressing the Esc key before pressing Enter key cancels editing Copying and pasting By selecting a range of character strings with the mouse you can copy it to the clipboard as character strings and then paste it to the caret position To perform these operations select the appropriate item from the context menu or from the Edit menu Note that pasting is possible only when ASCII is specified for the character code If any other character code is specified a message is displayed A Obtains latest information from the debug tool and updates display a Resets the highlighting that indicates the spot whose value has changed as a result of program execution However this button is disabled during program execution Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which memory values are displayed However these buttons are disabled during program execution Displays memory values in hexadecimal default Displays memory values in signed decimal Displays memory values in unsigned decimal Displays memory values in octal Displays memory values in binary Size Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which memory value size is displayed However these buttons are disabled during program execution Displays memory values in 4 bit width Displays memory values in 8 bit width default Displays memory values in 1
523. te 1 that is displayed at the right edge of the column when this item is selected Specifiable value See Table 2 2 Downloadable File Formats Specifiable in up to 259 characters File type Specify the file format of a file to download Default Load module file How to change Select from the drop down list Specifiable value One of the following Load module file Hex file S record file Binary data file R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 324 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE This item is displayed only when the files to download are in hex format Specify an offset value from the address at which download of a specified file begins Default 0 How to change Enter directly from the keyboard Specifiable value Hexadecimal values from 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Start address This item is displayed only when the files to download are in binary data format Specify the start address from which a specified file is downloaded Default 0 How to change Enter directly from the keyboard Specifiable value Hexadecimal values from 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Download object This item is displayed only when the files to download are in load module format Specify whether or not to download object information from a specified file Default Yes How to change Select from the drop down list
524. te is performed with a specified value If no values are specified the program breaks when a selected variable is read or written to no matter what value is read or written Cautions 1 Only the variables in current scope are selectable 2 No trace event can be set for a variable or I O register on a line whose background color in the event area is grayed indicating that the line cannot be converted into a corresponding address To set this trace event select a variable or I O register ona line whose background color in the event area is white 3 The types of access that can be set from the source text or disassembled text are only a read write To change the access type to a read or write after setting trace start and end events edit them in a dialog box that opens from the Events panel see 4 Editing trace start and trace end events R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 RENESAS Page 127 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS To set events for registered watch expressions Perform this operation on the Watch panel After selecting the watch expression for which you want to set an event multiple selections not accepted perform the following operation from the context menu However the watch expressions you can select are only global variables static variables in function static variables in file and I O registers Note that when you have performed this operation it is interrupted as if a trace event
525. tegory is copied to the watch panel onto which you ve dropped 3 Editing the registered watch expressions The watch expressions you ve registered can be edited Double click on a watch expression you want to edit and the subject watch expression will be placed in edit mode Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode Edit the content directly from the keyboard and hit the Enter key 4 Removing watch expressions To remove a registered watch expression select the watch expression on Watch panel that you want to remove and then click the toolbar button R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 116 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 5 Changing the form in which values are displayed The form in which the data in the Value area is displayed can be freely changed using the toolbar buttons shown below Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays the value of a selected watch expression in per variable predetermined notation default see Table A 10 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default Displays the value of a selected item in hexadecimal Displays the value of a selected item in signed decimal Displays the value of a selected item in unsigned decimal Displays the value of a selected item in octal Displays the value of a selected item in binary Displays the value of a selected item in ASCII co
526. tents to a file in the arbitrary format e g Intel hex format binary data format etc as required 14 Disconnect the debug tool from CubeSuite Disconnect the debug tool from CubeSuite to terminate communication R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 10 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 15 Save the project file Save the setting information of the project to the project file Remark For details on Save the project file see CubeSuite Start R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 11 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 2 Preparation before Debugging This section describes the preparation to start debugging the created program 2 2 1 Confirm the connection to a host machine Connection examples for each debug tool are shown Note that the relationship between the microcontroller selected in the project and the connectable debug tools is as the following table Remark Serial JTAG in the table below means that E1 E20 is used with FINE communications or JTAG communications Table 2 1 Relationship between Types of Microcontroller and Connectable Debug Tools Microcontroller Debug Tool E20 Serial Simulator E20 JTAG RX610 RX621 RX62N and RX62T Groups RX630 RX631 and RX63N Groups RX210 Group 1 E1 2 E20 3 Simulator 1 E1 Connect a host machine and E1 If required
527. ter data in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank the fixed variable value specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 138 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 4 gt Specifying the Number Specify a range of trace data to search by numbers displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel Specify start and end numbers in the left and right text boxes respectively By default 0 to ast number are specified Enter a number in decimal notation directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries If the left side text box is blank the number 0 is assumed If the right side text box is blank the last number is assumed lt 5 gt Clicking the Search Backward or Search Forward button When you click the Search Backward button a search is performed in the direction toward smaller numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel When you click the Search Forward button a search is performed in the direction toward larger numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel 2 13 8 Saving the displayed content of an execution history The contents of collected trace data can be saved after specifying a range of data in a text file txt or CSV file csv format When saving to
528. ternal flash definition file file The number of external flash definition files specified is displayed in properties Default 0 How to Main item change Not changeable Sub items By selecting in the External flash memory dialog box E1 E20 The External flash memory dialog box is opened by clicking the button that is displayed at the right edge in the column of this property when it is selected External flash definition files cannot be specified on property panel Display Main item content Number of external flash definition files Sub items Definition file names are displayed for each index 1 to 4 by clicking the mark on external flash definition file 9 Peripheral Function Simulation Simulator Displays detailed information on peripheral function simulation or changes settings made in it Peripheral function Displays usable peripheral function simulation modules allowing to specify whether or not to use simulation module Default Main item lt Number of usable peripheral function simulation modules gt Sub items lt Peripheral function simulation module name gt Not use How to Main item change Not changeable Sub items Peripheral function simulation module names not changeable Whether or not to use a peripheral function simulation module is specified by selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Spe
529. terrupt event at a location where you want an interrupt request to be generated In the Editor panel Disassemble panel move the caret to the line address event and then select Register Action Event from the context menu to open the following Action Events dialog Note ot which you want to set an interrupt box In this dialog box follow the steps below R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 153 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Note Interrupt events cannot be set to lines with no address indication Figure 2 141 Set Interrupt Event Action Events Dialog Box Set interrupt event Tab Action Events Printf event Interrupt Event Setting Interrupt Vector Priority Cancel a Specify the Interrupt vector Specify the interrupt vector by directly entering a corresponding number between 0 and 255 b Specify the Priority order RX610 Group Specify the priority order by directly entering a number between 1 and 8 When 8 is specified the event is handled as a fast interrupt Non RX610 Group Specify the priority order by directly entering a number between 1 and 16 When 16 is specified the event is handled as a fast interrupt c Click the OK button Set the interrupt event to the line at the caret position in the Editor panel Disassemble panel When the interrupt event is set the o mark is displayed in the event area on the Editor panel Disassemble panel
530. text color Specify any color for the text color of the items selected in the Setting place area The Font Color button is enabled c Use default background color The items selected in the Setting place area are displayed using the standard background color Specify any color for the background color of the items selected in the Setting place area The Background Color button is enabled R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 RENESAS Page 387 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE d Buttons Font Color Opens the Edit Colors Dialog Box making it possible to specify a text color for the item selected in the Setting place area However this button is disabled when the Use default color checkbox is checked Background Color Opens the Edit Colors Dialog Box making it possible to specify a background color for the item selected in the Setting place area However this button is disabled when the Use default background color checkbox is checked Reset Selected Item Colors Resets color information for the item selected in the Setting place area to restore it to its default Figure A 69 Edit Colors Dialog Box Edit Colors Basic colors BEE Ee EH Custom colors it i i i oe op it i ie i oe op Define Custom Colors gt gt 2 Display example area Shows an example of how the colors and fonts specified in the Color setti
531. th the address of the currently selected line referenced as a pointer it is possible to have the corresponding place simultaneously displayed on other panels the focus not moved Clicking the toolbar button Tn starts a linked display on the Editor panel Clicking the toolbar button starts a linked display on the Disassemble panel Clicking the button again stops the linked display Remark When you select Jump to Source or Jump to Disassemble from the context menu the Editor panel or Disassemble panel opens with the caret on it moved to the source line or address corresponding to the address of the currently selected line the focus moved Clearing the trace memory To clear the content of the collected trace data click the toolbar button el However this button is disabled while the trace function is in operation Remark Simulator If you ve selected Yes for the Clear trace memory before running property in the Trace category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab the trace memory is cleared each time the program is run R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 133 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 13 7 Searching for trace data To search for the collected trace data use the Trace Search dialog box that is opened by clicking the toolbar button EM Note that the searching function is disabled during program execution In this dialog box perform the following operati
532. that was specified in the load module when it was created For example to set 0x200 in the PID register when the load module is executed enter 200 for this item Default 0 Method to By entering directly from the keyboard change Specifiable Hexadecimal number in the range 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF values Unless symbol information is downloaded source level debugging cannot be performed If you select Yes for load modules created not using the PIC PID functions see Section 2 7 Usage of PIC PID Function debug operation cannot be guaranteed For the load module files that do not require symbol information you can set No for the Download symbol information item to reduce the amount of memory used However this file cannot be debugged at the source level c Confirming the order in which a download is executed A download is executed in the order in which files are displayed in the Download File List area To change the order use the Up or Down button to move any file up or down in the list d Clicking the OK button Settings you ve made in this dialog box are enabled with the specified load module file added as a download file The added file is displayed in the Download category on the Property panel s Download File Settings tab 4 Performing source level debug with hex format Motorola S format or binary data format files at the source level Even when a file in hex format he
533. the debug tool Find and Replace Displays the results of global searches conducted from the Find and Replace dialog box Caution Even when a new message is output on some unselected tab the panel does not have its tabs automatically switched to show the new message In this case the relevant tab is marked with an asterisk at the beginning of its name indicating that a new message has been output File menu Output Panel Only Items The File menu used exclusively for the output panel is as follows The other items are shared However all of these items are disabled during program execution Save Output tab name Saves the contents displayed on the currently selected tab to a text file txt that has been saved previously See c Saving logs If this item is selected for the first time after startup the same operation as you ve selected Save Output tab name As is performed However this is disabled during build execution R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 316 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Save Output file name Opens the Save As dialog box to save the contents displayed on the currently selected tab to a As specified text file txt See c Saving logs Edit menu Output Panel Only ltems The Edit menu used exclusively for the output panel is as follows All other items are disabled Copy Copies a selected character string to the
534. the internal program ROM is value debugged No A program that involves rewriting the internal program ROM is not debugged R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 216 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Debugging the Specify whether or not to debug a program that involves rewriting the internal data flash e g a program re writing the program making use of data flash P E mode on chip DATA FLASH Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when disconnected from the debug tool Specifiable Yes A program that involves rewriting the internal data flash is debugged value No A program that involves rewriting the internal data flash is not debugged Execute the specified Specify whether or not to run a specified routine immediately before program execution routine immediately before execution of the user program How to By selecting from the drop down list Default No change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes A specified routine is run immediately before program execution value No A specified routine is not run immediately before program execution The routine to run Specify the address to be executed immediately before program execution immediately before This property is displayed only when Yes is specified in the Execute the specified routine sta
535. the range of specified values the condition holds true Compare data 1 lt data lt Compare data 2 Outside the range lt Values lt When data is outside the range of specified values the condition holds true data lt Compare data 1 Compare data 2 lt data No conditions Comparison data is not specified Note For Inverse sign and Difference since comparison is made with the previous data the condition never holds true after a reset and in the first determination of whether condition is true Remarks 1 E1 E20 This property is displayed only when you ve specified Yes in the Specify the data mask property 2 Simulator This property is not displayed only when you ve specified No conditions in the Access size property R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 161 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS lt 4 gt Compare data E1 E20 Specify a data value with a hexadecimal number lt 5 gt Compare data1 Simulator Specify a data value in hexadecimal This property is displayed when you ve specified one of the following items in the Compare condition property Equal Not equal Greater than gt Less than lt Greater than or equal to gt Less than or equal to lt Inside the range lt Values lt Outside the range lt Values lt lt 6 gt Compare data2 Simulator Specify a data value with
536. the value of CPU register with Value source Python script path Process Automatically executes a script file specified with Python script path After CPU reset under Specify the process to proceed right after CPU reset during break breaking Default After CPU reset under breaking 0 is the current number of specified processes How to change Specify with the Text Edit dialog box Format Either one of the following O register name space Value Process Automatically overwrites the value of I O register with Value CPU register name space Value Process Automatically overwrites the value of CPU register with Value source Python script path Process Automatically executes a script file specified with Python script path Before running Specify the process to proceed right before execution Default Before running 0 is the current number of specified processes How to change Specify with the Text Edit dialog box Format Either one of the following O register name space Value Process Automatically overwrites the value of I O register with Value CPU register name space Value Process Automatically overwrites the value of CPU register with Value source Python script path Process Automatically executes a script file specified with Python script path After breaking Specify the process to proceed right after the break
537. ther or not to use the stream input output function function Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Yes Stream input output function is used value No Stream input output function is not used Stream I O address Specify the start position of a stream input output that is used to perform standard input output or file input output from the user program Default 0 How to By entering directly from the keyboard change However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable Hexadecimal number in the range 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF value R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 220 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 9 Execution Mode Simulator Select execution mode Specify whether or not to stop execution of the user program when a simulation error or an exception occurs Default Stop How to change By selecting from the drop down list However changeable only when program execution is halted Specifiable value Stop Stops simulation Continue Continues simulation Stop when undefined instruction exception occurs Specify whether or not to stop execution of the user program when an undefined instruction exception occurs This property is displayed only when Stop is specified in the Select execution mode
538. ting the selected variable by any value will cause the break to occur Read Write E1 E20 Select Break Settings gt gt Set R W Combination Break to and then press the Enter key Simulator Select Break Settings gt gt Set R W Break to and then press the Enter key If you have specified a value in the text box in the menu break will occur only when the specified value is used for the reading writing On the other hand if no value is specified reading writing the selected variable by any value will cause the break to occur Cautions 1 Variables within the current scope can be specified 2 Variables or I O register at lines that have no valid addresses cannot be used for break events R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 88 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Figure 2 90 Example of Setting a Break Event Access type on Variable in the Source Text E1 E20 ali be _ __ __ 23 3 24 Register to Watch1 From the context menu above the variable A Register Action Event g_IntBuf enter a value in Break Settings gt gt 27 FEFE8Sec void sort X cut wel Set Write Combination Break to then press 26 Bi os n Copy ah the Enter key 30 ily ee cyi Here the program will break when the value at P 3 Oxb is written to the variable g_IntBuf 32 Efff85f1 g A Find Ctrl 2 E ETRS wal GoTo Ctrl G 34 Efff85f5 35 EEff8606 A Forward to Next Cursor Position 36 E ETO60A w B
539. tion after trace memory is full Trace data type E Timer Use 64bit counter Operating frequency MHz No Yes 500 Hardware break No No Yes Yes Trace Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Branch No 25 0000 Memory Connect Settings N Debug Tool Settings A ook Transaction Settings R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 2tENESAS Page 210 of 429 CubeSuite V1 01 00 Property APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Figure A 13 Property Panel Debug Tool Settings Tab E20 Serial RX600 Series amp AX E20 Serial Property a s Memory mappings Verify on writing to memory Access Memory While Running Access by stopping execution Update the display during execution Update interval ms E Break Type of breakpoints to be preferentially used E System Debug the program re writing the on chip PROGRAM ROM Debug the program re writing the on chip DATA FLASH Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Routine to run immediately before execution starts Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Routine to run immediately after execution stops E Trace Usage of trace function Operation after trace memory is full Trace data type B Timer Use 64bit counter Operating frequency MHz 28 Yes No Yes 500 Hardware break No No Yes Yes Trace Overwrite trace memory and continue execution Branch No 25 0000
540. to after writing the specified variable I O register Read Write The program is stopped with the read access write access to after reading or writing the specified variable I O register Cautions 1 The program is not stopped with the access via DMAC Dynamic Memory Access Controller DTC Data Transfer Controller 2 Simulator With the string operation instruction and multiply accumulation instruction only the final data access is subjected to the event check This section describes the following 1 Seta break event access type to a variable I O register 2 Edit a break event access type to a variable IO register 3 Delete a break event access type to a variable IO register 1 Set a break event access type to a variable I O register Use one of the following methods to set a break event access type that stops programs with the access to a variable I O register Cautions 1 Also see 2 17 7 Points to note regarding event setting for details on break event access type settings including the allowable number of valid events 2 E1 E20 Break events access type are displayed as Read Write or Read Write as part of detailed information on combination breaks in the Events panel a Set a break event access type to a variable I O register in the source text disassembled text Perform this operation in the Editor panel Disassemble panel in which the source text disassembly text is displayed Follow the
541. to Use Break factors E1 Serial E1 JTAG Simulator E20 Serial E20 JTAG Execution failed or cause unknown WAIT Instruction executed Undefined instruction exception encountered Privileged instruction exception encountered Access exception encountered Floating point exception encounteredNote 2 Interrupt encountered INT instruction exception encountered NIN IN IN IN INNS BRK instruction exception encountered Peripheral function simulation error occurred Illegal memory access made Stream input output error occurred Allocation of coverage memory failed Allocation of trace memory failed Notes 1 The operation depends on the setting of the Operation after trace memory is full property in the Trace category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel 2 Applicable only to the RX600 Series 3 Simulator The operation depends on the settings of each property in the Execution Mode Simulator category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 94 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 11 Displaying and Changing Memory Registers and Variables This section describes how to display or change the contents of memory registers and variables 2 11 1 Displaying and changing memory contents Use the Memory panel shown below to display memory contents or change valu
542. tor Toolbar 4 Hex E tAddress Condition Compare condition No conditions E Data Condition Access type Read Write Access size Long word Compare condition Outside the range lt Values lt 1 Compare datal HEX 55 Compare data2 H FO Specify the data mask No Sign Signed 2 5 Function buttons 4 This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Toolbar Description of each category Function buttons How to open On the Evenis panel move the caret to an access related event in a trace that you want to set and then select Edit Condition from the context menu On the Events panel move the caret to an access related event in a point trace that you want to set and then select Edit Condition from the context menu E1 E20 On the Events panel move the caret to an access related event in a combination break that you want to set and then select Edit Condition from the context menu On the Events panel move the caret to an access related event in a timer result that you want to set and then select Edit Condition from the context menu Simulator On the Events panel move the caret to an access related hardware break that you want to set and then select Edit Condition from the context menu R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 363 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of
543. ts for execution address and 2 events for data access which are shared in each function 5 If the combination condition for the combination break is Sequential the maximum number of events that can be set differs with each microcontroller used as shown below RX600 Series 7 events reset event R event RX200 Series 3 events reset event R event 6 Ifthe maximum number of execution related events have already been used as trace start trace stop events or timer start timer stop events Go to Here in the context menu of the Editor panel or Disassemble panel is not usable Also it is not possible to run the program to the address of a specified symbol after the CPU has been reset R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 167 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 Types of events that can be set or removed during execution Types of events that can be set or removed during execution of the program or during execution of the tracer timer are as follows IODO x Notes 1 Table 2 24 Types of Events that Can Be Set or Removed during Execution Type of event Software break Debug tool E1 Serial E1 JTAG E20 Serial E20 JTAG Note1 Note2 Simulator Hardware break execution related before Go Note2 A Break event execution related after Go Note2 Break event access related Read Write Read Write Note2 A Trace trace start trace en
544. u Register to Watch1 Registers the selected register or category to the Watch panel Watch1 Copy Copies the selected character string to the clipboard during editing If a line is selected copies the register or the category to the clipboard The copied item can be pasted to the Watch panel Notation The following cascade menus to specify the notation of a data value are displayed AutoSelect Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in the default notation default Hexadecimal Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in hexadecimal number Signed Decimal Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in signed decimal number Unsigned Decimal Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in unsigned decimal number Octal Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in octal number Binary Displays the value of the selected item including sub items in binary number ASCII Displays the character string of the selected item including sub items in ASCII code If the character size is 2 bytes and above it is displayed with the characters for each 1 byte arranged side by side Displays the value of the selected item in Float Note that when the value is not 4 byte data displays it in the default notation Double Displays the value of the selected item in Double Note that when the value is not 8 byte data
545. u is disabled during program execution Fill Opens the Memory Initialize dialog box Refresh Obtains latest information from the debug tool and updates the display Copy Copies a selected range as character string to the clipboard However this menu is disabled during program execution Pastes the copied character string from the clipboard to the caret position However this menu is disabled during program execution To paste in the memory value area see e Copy and paste To paste in the character string area see b Copying and pasting R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 249 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Notation Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the display notation in the memory value area However this menu is disabled during program execution Hexadecimal Displays memory values in hexadecimal default Signed Decimal Displays memory values in signed decimal Unsigned Decimal Displays memory values in unsigned decimal Octal Displays memory values in octal Binary Displays memory values in binary Size Notation Shows the following cascaded menu to specify the display width in the memory value area However this menu is disabled during program execution 4 Bits Displays memory values in 4 bit width 1 Byte Displays memory values in 8 bit width default
546. u want a timer measurement to start and then select Timer Settings on context menu and from it choose Set Timer Start R W Value and then Set Timer Note 2 A timer start event is set for the watch expression on the watch panel b How to set a timer end event To set from the Editor panel Move the caret to the line or address Note 1 Timer Settings on context menu and from it choose End Timer A timer end event is set for the instruction at the beginning address corresponding to the line or address at the caret position at which you want a timer measurement to finish and then select R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 143 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS To set from the Disassemble panel Move the caret to the line or address Note 1 at which you want a timer measurement to finish and then select Timer Settings on context menu and from it choose End Timer and then Set Timer x Note 2 A timer end event is set for the instruction at the beginning address corresponding to the line or address at the caret position Move the caret to the variable at which you want a timer measurement to finish and then select Timer Settings on context menu and from it choose Set Timer End R W Value and then Set Timer x Note 2 A timer end event is set for the variable at the caret position To set from the Watch panel Move the caret to the watch expression Note 3 ot which you
547. uild ended Success 1 Projects Failed 0 Projects Thursday August 28 2008 1 12 28 PM Debug Tool Search And Replace Here the following items are explained How to open Description of each area File menu Output Panel Only Items Edit menu Output Panel Only Items Context menu How to open Choose Output from the View menu Description of each area 1 Message area Displays the messages output by each tool search results and the output results by Printf events During display of search results global search this area displays a new message after clearing previous messages each time a search is performed except for the All Messages tab Note that messages are displayed in different colors by type of output message as shown below The colors in which text and backgrounds are displayed depend on how the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box are set Type of message Display example Default Description Normal message Text color Black Displayed when notifying any information Background color White Warning message Text color Blue Displayed when notifying any warning for the operation performed Background color Standard color R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 315 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Error message Text color Displayed when unable to execute for a fatal error or operation
548. uite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS f 9 lt 2 gt ID code Specify the ID code to use when reading the code from the memory If you have selected Specify the ID code as a 32 digit hexadecimal in the Input mode of ID code property enter the ID code in a 32 digit hexadecimal number If you have selected Specify the ID code as an ASCII code within 16 characters enter the ID code using maximum 16 ASCII characters Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 2 Ifthe ID code entered in ASCII characters is shorter than 16 characters the unused space will be padded with 0 lt 3 gt Work RAM start address Specify the location address of the work RAM to be used by the debugger The size of work RAM to be used by the debugger firmware at a designated RAM location address is indicated in Work RAM size bytes property Cautions 1 This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 2 This area can also be used by the user program since the memory contents are swapped and restored However you cannot designate this area as the source or destination of DMA or DTC function transfer lt 4 gt Work RAM size bytes Displays the size of the work RAM to be used by the debugger Operating Modes of CPU In this category you configure the operating mode of the microcontroller to be emulated Caution This property cannot be changed while connected to E1 Figure 2 15 Operating Modes of CPU Category
549. ulator E Trace Use trace function No Clear trace memory before running Yes Operation after trace memory is full Non stop and overwrite to trace memory Accumulate trace time No Trace memory size frames 64K a Use trace function Specify from the drop down list whether or not to use the trace function To use the trace function specify Yes by default No is selected b Clear trace memory before running Specify from the drop down list whether or not to clear initialize the trace memory once before the trace function begins To clear specify Yes default Remark The trace memory can be forcibly cleared by clicking the button in the Trace panel toolbar c Operation after trace memory is full Specify the operation to be performed when the trace memory is filled with collected trace data from the drop down list below Non stop and overwrite to When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite continues writing trace data over the old trace memory data default If you ve selected Yes for the Clear trace memory before running property when the program is re executed the trace memory is cleared before trace data is written to When the trace memory is filled CubeSuite stops writing trace data and stops program execution at the same time If you ve selected No for the Clear trace memory before running property even when re executed the program is halted and not executed R20
550. ule files into CubeSuite and how to upload the memory content under debug from CubeSuite to files 2 5 1 Execute downloading Download the load module files to be debugged Following the procedure below make the necessary settings for downloads on the Property panel s Download File Settings tab before you execute a download 1 Setting the Download category R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Figure 2 56 Download Category E1 JTAG E1 Serial E20 JTAG E20 Serial E Download E Download files 1 E 0 DefaultBuild test_RxX abs Download object Yes Download symbol information Yes Specify the PIC PID offset No CPU Reset after download Yes Erase flash ROM before download No Automatic change method of event setting position Suspend event Figure 2 57 Download Category Simulator E Download E Download files 1 E 0 DefaultBuildstest_A abs Download object Yes Download symbol information Yes Specify the PIC PID offset No CPU Reset after download Yes Automatic change method of event setting position a Download files Suspend event Displays the file names to be downloaded as well as download conditions the numeric value in property value indicating the number of files currently specified to be downloaded The files to be downloaded here are those files that have been specified as the subject to build in the main project and sub projects This means that the same files that were specified
551. umber to specify an accessed variable value Enter a variable value directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 350 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE The variable value can be specified as a range of values In this case enter variable values in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank the fixed variable value specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search of accessed location 3 Search range area a Number Specify a range of trace data to search by numbers displayed in the Number area of the Trace panel Specify start and end numbers in the left and right text boxes respectively By default 0 to last number are specified Enter a number in decimal notation directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries If the left side text box is blank the number 0 is assumed If the right side text box is blank the ast number is assumed Function buttons Button Function Search Backward Performs a search in the direction toward smaller addresses within a specified range The searched spot is put in selected state on the Trace panel However if an invalid value is specified a message is displayed and a search of trace data is not performed Also if t
552. ut Output 406 APPENDIX C INDEX 421 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CubeSuite is an integrated developing environment platform for the RX family V850 microcontroller RL78 family 78KOR microcontroller and 78KO microcontroller CubeSuite comprehensively supports the operations required for program development such as designing coding building debugging and flash programming In this manual the debugging is explained out of those operations needed for the program development Among them this manual focuses on the description of debugging the outline of which is provided in this chapter 1 1 Summary You can efficiently debug the program developed for the RX family using the debugger provided by CubeSuite 1 2 Features The following are the features of the debugger provided by CubeSuite Connectable to various debugging tools Usable in combination with the on chip debugging emulator E1 E20 and the simulator it provides improved effi ciency in program development Mixed display of C C source text and disassembled text The C C source text and the disassembled text can be displayed together on the same panel Source level debugging and instruction level debugging C C source program can be debugged either at the source or the instruction level Data flash memory programming When the selected microcontroller is provided with a data flash memory you can display or edit th
553. vel Search condition Fetch Address Mnemonic 1 4 Access Address Access Status Data Search range 2 4 Number Function buttons 4 Search Backward Search Forward This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Select the toolbar button onthe Trace panel Choose Find from the context menu on the Trace panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 346 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Description of each area 1 Search condition area a b c d Fetch Address Specify a fetch address if needed as the search condition Enter an address expression directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The fetch address can also be specified as a range of addresses In this case enter address expressions in both the right and left text boxes to specify a range If the right side text box is blank or labeled Input value when range is specified the fixed address specified in the left side text box is used to perform a search Note that if any address value greater than the microcontroller s address space is specified the high order address value is masked when a search is performed Also no address values can be specified that are greater tha
554. ver in the event of access to I O register the I O register name is displayed instead of the address when a plurality is accessed these are displayed in the following lines The radix of a data value can be selected by the button on the toolbar or the context menu item Data area The accessed data value and the access type at that time are displayed However CPU register access is not displayed The notation of a data value can be selected by the button on the toolbar or the context menu item The display format of the data value and the access type are as follows character colors and background colors depend on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box Display Example Default Memory Access Type RData value Character color Standard color Read access Background color Palegreen WData value Character color Standard color Write access Background color Orange RW Data value Character color Standard color Read and write access Background color Paleturquoise R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 301 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Toolbar Acquires the latest data from the debug tool and updates the contents of this panel This item becomes invalid during execution of a program Clears the trace memory and the display of this panel initialized This item becomes invalid during exe
555. void Start user code Do not 2 91 92 TMPO Start 93 Pl Start 94 AD Start 95 96 while 1U This area changes color only when the downloaded module is out of date using the Warning color of the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box This area is valid only when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened void main void Start 1 CEE This means new or modified line but unsaved cera This means new or modified line and saved This means that the downloaded module is out of date 4 Coverage area This area is valid only when connected to the debug tool and the downloaded source file is opened When the coverage function is valid lines corresponding to the specified coverage measurement area are shown highlighted based on the code coverage measurement result that is acquired by executing the program the color depends on the configuration in the General Font and Color category of the Option dialog box See 2 15 Measure Coverage Simulator for details on the coverage measurement Hovering the mouse cursor over this area displays the area title Coverage This area is provided with the following function a Clearing the coverage information via the menu When you right click in this area the following menu below is displayed Clear Coverage Clears all the coverage measurement results currently being stored in the debug
556. where ram01 is selected as the priority section left pane and then changed to ram02 right pane for the Overlay sections property in the case shown in Figure 2 79 Allocation of Overlay Sections Figure 2 82 Changing the Selection for Priority section from ram01 to ram02 pragma section sect0l i pragma section sect01 66 int Var01 1000 int Var01 1000 void func01 void 7 void func01 void int 1Var01 1Var01 100 Var0l 1Var0l funcii int 1Var01 1Var01 100 Oo wow o func11 ON pragma section pragma section ee ee ee ee t gt 76 pragma section sect02 6 pragma section sect02 77 int Var02 2000 77 int Var02 2000 78 void func02 void 78 void func02 void 79 79 80 int 1Var02 o 81 lVar02 200 1 00003 82 Var02 1Var02 00003 83 funcl2 00003 84 85 pragma section ds Eg watch1 Z X Notation emo Value Type Byte Size Address Memo W A me Byte ize ddre u w lVar0l 100 0x00000064 inti4 0x000017f4 lVar l 2 w lVar02 wae w lVar02 200 0x000000c8 imt 4 Ox000017 f4 lVar03 2 w ivarus 77 7 gt R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 77 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 9 Execute Programs This section describes how to execute programs The major operations discussed in this section can be conducted either from the debug toolbar or the De
557. work File name _ Function buttons Files of type Text files txt This section describes the following How to open Description of each area Function buttons How to open Click the button in the File Name area of the Data Save dialog box Description of each area 1 Look in area From the drop down list select the folder which contains the file you wish to save 2 File list area Displays a list of files that match the conditions selected in the Look in area and Files of type area 3 File name area Specify the name of a file you wish to save R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 404 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Files of type area Select the type of file to save file type from the drop down list below The selectable file format is determined by the type of data you are saving a When saving the displayed content of a panel Text files txt Text format default CSV Comma Separated Variables csv CSV formate Note The data is saved with entries separated by commas If the data contains commas each entry is surrounded by double quotes in order to avoid illegal formatting b When saving upload data For the selectable file format see Table 2 3 Uploadable File Formats Function buttons Open Specifies a specified file in the Data Save dialog box Cancel Closes thi
558. x Motorola S format mot or binary data format bin is specified to be the subject file to download it is possible to do source level debug by downloading symbol information for the load module file from which the subject file was created along with the subject file that you download In this case follow the procedure described below as you fill in the Download Files dialog box a Clicking the Add button When you click the Add button a blank item is displayed on the last line in the Download File List area b Setting the properties of a load module file In the Download file property area specify for each item as shown below R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 56 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Specify a load module file from which the file in hex format hex Motorola S format mot or binary data format bin that you want to download was created Enter directly from the keyboard or specify in the Select Download File dialog box that is opened by clicking the button File type Specify Load module file default Download object Specify No Download symbol information Specify Yes default Specify the PIC PID offset Specify No default N Note For files in hex format Motorola S format or binary data format be aware that the destination to which they are downloaded cannot be discriminated between the P
559. xecute to the specified symbol after CPU Reset Yes Specified symbol _main Download Connect Settings Debug Tool Settings A Download File 5 Hook Transaction 5 Description of each category 1 Download The detailed information on download is displayed and its configuration can be changed Download files Specify the file to downloadNote 1 The names of files to be downloaded and the download conditions are listed in the lower area Default Number of files to download How to Specify with the Download Files dialog box change The Download Files dialog box is opened when clicking the button appears at right by selecting this property you cannot specify the file to download on this panel CPU Reset after Specify whether to reset the CPU after downloading download Default Yes How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes Resets the CPU after downloading value No Does not reset the CPU after downloading R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 223 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Erase flash ROM Specify whether to erase the flash ROM before downloading before download E1 E20 Default No How to By selecting from the drop down list change Specifiable Yes Erases the flash ROM before downloading value No Does not erase the flash ROM before downloading Automatic change Sp
560. xt menu items displayed differ depending on the microcontroller selected in the project see Table 2 1 Relationship between Types of Microcontroller and Connectable Debug Tools Remark E1 E20 Select Microcontroller type E1 Serial Microcontroller type E20 Serial to perform FINE communications between E1 E20 and the target system Select Microcontroller type E1 JTAG Microcontroller type E20 JTAG to perform JTAG communications between E1 E20 and the target system If the Property panel is already open click the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node again The view switches to the Property panel of the selected debug tool If the Property panel is not open double click the above mentioned node to open the corresponding Property panel R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 14 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 2 Et Configure the operating environment on the Property panel below when using E1 Note that the contents of the Property panel differ depending on the communication method FINE communications E1 Serial or JTAG communications E1 JTAG between E1 and the target system Figure 2 6 Property Panel E1 Serial R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 Oct 01 2011 Property l AX E1 Serial Property E Internal ROM RAM Size of internal ROM KBytes Size of internal RAM KBytes Size of DataFlash memory KBytes E Clock Main clock source Main clock frequency MHz
561. y you can display or change the value of any I O register in real time even while the program is running not just when the program is halted For details about watch expressions see Section 2 11 6 Displaying and changing watch expressions Saving the displayed I O register contents By choosing Save IOR Data As from the File menu it is possible to open the Save As dialog box and then save the contents of I O registers in whole to a text file txt or a CSV file csv Regardless of whether you ve chosen to show or not show on this panel the values of all I O registers are saved When saving to a file CubeSuite reloads I O register values and saves the latest values thus obtained However the I O registers protected against read are not reloaded To save the latest content select Force Read Value from the context menu before saving to a file R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 110 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 109 I O Register Value Output Image When Saved IOR name Value Type Byte Size Address Category name IOR name Value Type Byte Size Address 2 11 4 Displaying and changing global and static variables Use the Watch panel to display or change global variables or static variables Select a variable whose value you want to display or change and register it as a watch expression on watch panel For details about watch expressions see Section 2
562. y configuration 4 Hook Transaction Settings tab In the Hook Transaction Settings tab you can configure hook transaction for the debug tool See 2 18 Setting Up the Hook Process for details on each category configuration and hook transaction R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 43 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 4 Connect to Disconnect from the Debug Tool This section describes connection to and disconnection from the debug tool including hot plug in connection 2 4 1 Connect the debug tool to CubeSuite Select the Debug menu gt gt Connect to Debug Tool to connect to the debug tool selected in the currently active project After succeeding in the connection to the debug tool the Status bar of the Main window changes as follows For details on each item displayed on the Siatus bar see the section of the Main window Figure 2 52 Statusbar Indicating the Successful Connection to the Debug Tool DISCONNECT m BREAK GGRXELQTAG Not measured The information of the debug tool appears at this area Remark When the button on the Debug toolbar is clicked it will download the specified file after connecting to the debug tool see 2 5 1 Execute downloading When the button on this toolbar is clicked it will build the project connect to the debug tool and then download the specified file 2 4 2 Disconnect the debug tool from CubeSuite Click the button on th
563. y excess white space either side of the cursor position leaving only one whitespace character Whitespace remaining If there the cursor is within a word or not surrounded by whitespace this operation will have no effect Trim Trailing Deletes any trailing whitespace that appears after the last non whitespace character on the cursor line Whitespace Delete Line Completely delete the current cursor line Duplicate Line Duplicates the cursor line inserting a copy of the line immediately after the cursor line Delete Blank Lines Deletes the line at the cursor if it is empty or contains only whitespace Window menu Editor panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the Window menu in the Editor panel other items are common to all the panels Splits the active Editor panel horizontally Only the active Editor panel can be split Other panels will not be split A panel can be split up to two times Remove Split Removes the split view of the Editor panel Context menu Characters area Line number area while disconnecting from the debug tool Cuts the selected character string and copies it to the clipboard If there is no selection the entire line is cut Copies the contents of the selected range to the clipboard as character string s If there is no selection the entire line is copied Inserts insert mode or overwrites overwrite mode the characters that are copied on
564. y item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries If the left side text box is blank the number 0 is assumed If the right side text box is blank the ast number is assumed lt 3 gt Clicking the Search Backward or Search Forward button When you click the Search Backward button a search is performed in the direction toward smaller numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel When you click the Search Forward button a search is performed in the direction toward larger numbers with the searched spot put in selected state on the Trace panel c To specify a global variable name before performing a search Select The execution part is retrieved specifying the global variable in the Search object area then perform the following operation lt 1 gt Specifying the Variable Name Enter a variable name you want to search directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries Searches are case sensitive and only perfect matches are allowed lt 2 gt Specifying the Kind Select the type of access Reference Substitution default Reference or Substitution from the drop down list lt 3 gt Specifying the Value Enter an accessed variable value directly in the text box or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries The variable value can be specified as a range of values In this case en
565. y position breakpoint The program in execution can be stopped at the arbitrary position by setting a breakpoint A breakpoint can be set with a single click of the mouse You need to configure the type of breakpoints to use before setting a breakpoint This section describes the following 1 Configure types movements of breakpoints to use E1 E20 2 Seta breakpoint 3 Edit a hardware breakpoint 4 Delete a breakpoint Caution E1 RX630 RX631 RX63N and RX210 Groups E20 RX630 RX631 RX63N and RX210 Groups If a break occurs for an executed related break that is set in the WAIT instruction or an instruction immediately preceding it a time out error may occur To cause the target program to break in the WAIT instruction or an instruction immediately preceding it use a breakpoint 1 Configure types movements of breakpoints to use E1 E20 Breakpoints to use are set in the Break E1 E20 category on the Debug Tool Settings tab of the Property panel The setting method differs depending on the debug tool used Figure 2 86 Break Category E1 E20 E Br First using type of breakpoint Software break Specify the type of preferential breakpoint breakpoint that can be set with a single click of the mouse in the First using type of breakpoint property Note however that if the number of the set breakpoints of the specified type exceeds the limit settable see 1 Limitation on the number of valid events a b
566. y the start trace number and end trace number to set a range of data to be saved in a file Enter numeric values in decimal notation directly in the respective text boxes or select an input history item from the drop down list up to 10 history entries If you want to save all trace data select All Trace Data in the drop down list on the left side right side text box disabled Note that if a range is selected on panel this selected range is specified by default in the text boxes If no range is selected the currently displayed range on panel is specified 4 Clicking the Save button Trace data is saved in the specified format to a specified file Figure 2 128 Trace Data Output Image When Saved Number Time Line Number Address Source Disassemble Address Data Number Time Line Number Address Source Disassemble Address Data R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 tENESAS Page 140 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 14 Measuring the Execution Time This section describes how to measure a program s execution time 2 14 1 Setting the timer measurement operation E1 E20 For timer measurements to be performed it is necessary to make the following settings related to timer measurements Do these settings in the Timer E1 E20 category on the Property panel s Debug Tool Settings tab Note that properties in this category can only be changed while CubeSuite is disconnected from the debug too
567. y while connected to E20 Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program Specify whether to execute a specified routine before executing the user program Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution Routine to run immediately before execution starts Specify the address to be executed immediately before the user program execution This property is displayed only when Execute the specified routine immediately before execution of the user program property is set to Yes Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops Specify whether to execute a specified routine after the user program break Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution Routine to run immediately after execution stops Specify the address to be executed immediately after the user program break This property is displayed only when Execute the specified routine immediately after the user program stops property is set to Yes Caution You cannot change this property while the program is in execution e Trace You can configure the trace function in this category R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 35 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS Figure 2 38 Trace Category E20 Serial RX600 Series E Trace Usage of trace function
568. yboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF Specify the data mask Specify whether or not to specify a data mask Default No Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Yes Data mask is specified No No data mask is specified Mask value Specify mask data in hexadecimal Note This property is displayed only when Yes is specified in the Specify the data mask property Default Blank Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 0x0 to OxFFFFFFFF R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 stENESAS Page 366 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 APPENDIX A WINDOW REFERENCE Compare condition Specify data compare condition This property is displayed only when Yes is specified in the Specify the data mask property Default Specified value Modifying By selecting from the drop down list Available values Specified value True when data compare condition matches Any other value True when data compare condition does not match Note The address value to be used as the condition is masked bit wise with a mask value for which 0 is specified d Pass Count Pass count Specify a pass count in decimal The relevant event occurs when the event condition is met as many times as the entered pass count Default 1 Modifying By entering directly from the keyboard Available values 1 to 256
569. you want to create and then click the toolbar button Pea and enter a new category name directly from the keyboard b To edit a category name Select a category name you want to edit and then click on it again and edit the category name directly from the keyboard c To remove a category Select a category you want to remove and then click the toolbar button However only blank categories can be removed d To change the order in which I O registers are displayed Drag and drop an I O register name into any category That way the I O registers are classified by a category Also the order in which categories and I O register names are displayed one above or below another can be freely changed by a drag and drop operation R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 2tENESAS Page 109 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 3 4 5 6 Changing the form in which values are displayed The form in which the data in the Value area is displayed can be freely changed using the toolbar buttons shown below Notation Shows the following buttons that change the form in which values are displayed Displays the value of a selected item in hexadecimal default Displays the value of a selected item in signed decimal Displays the value of a selected item in unsigned decimal Displays the value of a selected item in octal Displays the value of a selected item in binary Displays the value
570. ys it in the default notation Displays a selected item in Double Except for 8 byte data however they are displayed in predetermined notation Adds a hexadecimal equivalent for the displayed value at the end of it with the equivalent enclosed in parentheses Changing the CPU register contents The CPU register values can be edited Double click the subject CPU register value in the Value area and the selected value will be placed in edit mode Pressing the Esc key cancels the edit mode Edit the value directly from the keyboard and then press the Enter key The value you ve changed is written into the debug tool s target memory Caution This operation cannot be performed during program execution Displaying and changing the CPU register contents during program execution Select a CPU register that is the subject you want to display or change and register it as a watch expression on Watch panel That way you can display or change the value of any CPU register in real time even while the program is running not just when the program is halted For details about watch expressions see Section 2 11 6 Displaying and changing watch expressions Saving the displayed CPU register contents By choosing Save CPU Register Data As from the File menu it is possible to open the Save As dialog box and then save the contents of CPU registers in whole to a text file txt or a CSV file csv When saving to a f
571. ys the value of the selected item in octal number Binary Displays the value of the selected item in binary number ASCII Displays the value of the selected item in ASCII code Include Hexadecimal Value Adds the value in hexadecimal number enclosing with at the end of the value of the selected item except the item displayed in hexadecimal number Float Displays the value of the selected item in Float Note that when the selected watch expression value is not 4 byte data or has the type information displays it in the default notation see Table A 10 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default Double Displays the value of the selected item in Double Note that when the selected watch expression value is not 8 byte data or has the type information displays it in the default notation see Table A 10 Display Format of Watch Expressions Default Decimal Notation for Array Index Displays array indexes on this panel in decimal number default Hexadecimal Notation for Array Index Displays array indexes on this panel in hexadecimal number Encoding The following cascade menus are displayed to specify the character code ASCII Displays the value of the selected item in ASCII code default Shift_JIS Displays the value of the selected item in Shift_JIS code EUC JP Displays the value of the selected item in EUC JP code UTF 8 Displays the valu
572. ystem For more details on the connection using a 38 pin to 14 pin conversion adapter see E20 User s Manual 3 Simulator A host machine is only needed for debugging emulators are not needed Figure 2 4 Connection Example Simulator Host machine 8 CubeSuite R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 13 of 429 Oct 01 2011 CubeSuite V1 01 00 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS 2 3 Configuration of Operating Environment of the Debug Tool This section describes the configuration of the operating environment for each debug tool 2 3 1 Select the debug tool to use You can configure the operating environment in the Property panel corresponding to the debug tool to use Therefore first select the debug tool to be used in a project the debug tool to be used can be specified in the individual projects To select or switch the debug tool use the context menu shown by right clicking on the Microcontroller type Debug tool name Debug Tool node on the Project Tree panel Figure 2 5 Select Switch Debug Tool to Use Project Tree 8 LB sam le Project RSF5S630EDxBG Microcontroller A CC RX Build Tool ax D Program Anal x RX Simulator Deh una Tool Using Debug Tool RX E1 Serial ey bi Z Property RX E1 JTAG sct c tra RX E20 Serial _ resetprg c RX E20 JTAG c sbrk c c vecttbl c Sample cpp h iodefine h Caution The conte
573. zoom into the view making the contents larger and easier to see max 300 Using the Ctrl key mouse wheel backward will zoom out of the view making the contents smaller min 50 Remark The following items can be customized by setting the Option dialog box Display fonts Tab interval Show or hide whitespace marks Colors of reserved words comments File menu Editor panel dedicated items The following items are exclusive for the File menu in the Editor panel other items are common to all the panels Close file name Closes the currently editing Editor panel When the contents of the panel have not been saved a confirmation message is shown Save file name Overwrites the contents of the currently editing Editor panel Note that when the file has never been saved or the file is read only the same operation is applied as the selection in Save file name As Save file name As Opens the Save As dialog box to newly save the contents of the currently editing Editor panel File name Save Opens the Save Settings dialog box to change the encoding and newline code of the file being Settings opened in the currently editing Editor panel Print Opens the Windows dialog box for printing the contents of the currently editing Editor panel Print Preview Opens the Print Preview window to preview the file contents to be printed R20UT0769EJ0100 Rev 1 00 ztENESAS Page 236 of 429 Oct 01 2

RX Debug - Renesas Electronics

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents